Home

R&S®FSV-K70 Vector Signal Analysis User

1. 6 13 12 76 13 01 Phase Error RMS 3 48 3 49 deg Peak 7 31 7 45 deg Frequency Error 33 87 34 200 Hz Rho 0 996279 0 996261 TQ Offset TI 43 11 42 76 Gain Imbalance Quadrature Error 017 27 Amplitude Droop 0 000 zone Power 27 21 d st root OIC K 40 00 01 01 00 RT RU RR ES l Ji r i TN L MIT CO TREI DUT 20 01 02 00 00 Start 0 0 sym Stop 8000 0 sym 199 01 01 00 01 0 12 0 13 Distinction between Source Result type and Result type transformation The Display Config dialog provides the following settings e Source Here you can choose the data source for which you want to display the results Resulttype Here you can specify the way you want to look at the Source For example select Magnitude Absolute to see the magnitude of your measurement signal The avail able choices depend on the selected source For example an eye diagram of the inphase component can only be selected if the source for the current screen is Meas amp Ref Signal Result type transformation For certain result types it is not only possible to see the common over time repre sentation of the measurement but also the spectrum or the statistics in form of a histogram Furthermore it is possible to specify how many point
2. CALCulate n LIMit MACCuracy OOFFset CURRent VALue lt LimitValue gt CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy OOFFset MEAN VALue lt LimitValue gt CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy OOFFset PEAK VALue lt LimitValue gt This command defines the upper limit for the current peak or mean UO offset Note that the limits for the current and the peak value are always kept identical Suffix n 1 4 window Setting parameters lt LimitValue gt numeric value Range 200 0 to 0 0 RST 40 0 mean 45 0 Default unit dB Example CALC2 FEED XTIM DDEM MACC Switch on result summary in screen 2 CALC2 LIM MACC OOFF PEAK VAL 50dB define a limit of 50 dB Mode VSA CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy PERRor PCURrent VALue lt LimitValue gt CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy PERRor PMEan VALue lt LimitValue gt CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy PERRor PPEak VALue lt LimitValue gt CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy PERRor RCURrent VALue lt LimitValue gt CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy PERRor RMEan VALue lt LimitValue gt CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy PERRor RPEak VALue lt LimitValue gt This command defines the value for the current peak or mean phase error peak or RMS limit Note that the limits for the current and the peak value are always kept iden tical Suffix lt n gt 1 4 window Setting parameters lt LimitValue gt numeric value the value x x gt 0 defines the int
3. M 144 Digital Standards ij aia 114 Display Configuration RESULT YPC ettet eerte 182 Result Type Transformation sssss 183 Ee EE 115 134 ee ET 181 Display Points Syimbol 2 entente 184 lege EE 258 Display range RE Une TEE 116 E EDGE filters Frequency respofise sisisi creer teri e eren aon 365 El Attenuation RF SOUS o cuoi ii doce vereint Oo Pep iri Dion 157 Electronic input attenuation RE EE 275 Error model FSK ageet eval 68 Error Vector Magnitude EVM FRESUIETY DG Zenteren eege ee ec 90 Estimation gu que luese 177 Eine 58 Evaluation Eu Gist ook 173 174 Range remote control ceseeeeeeeseseeeeeeeteeeeeeaes 248 Range display aa 110 Refreshing 124 Uca 129 Evaluation Meas Ref Remote control oett eter teca eius 256 SHEET eege 128 EVM Res l Summary sarsii guiaron anaE 96 EX IQ BOX osise wee 142 lee 143 Export VQ data EMOTE E 278 led Me 145 EXPORTOM A ransas ania EAS 206 Exporting UO data remote UO data format remote External SOK OY sx eoe etn tete i Een n ao Pre nds 130 Eye Diagram Frequency Geleet Ae Ce me shone tte i exe x a ee Res 85 Eye Diagram Imag Q Result type oce a er rr ae ree RES Rue 84 Eye Diagram Real I IxesulttyDG oom o E ees 83 F Filter bandwidth Digital UO r
4. ss Cont Meas remote control sinisesse Continue Single Sweep remote control Continuous Sweep remote control Default Settings remote control Deviation Lin Log remote control El Atten Mode Auto Man eeseesese Export remote control or eret Frequency Offset d Grid Abs Rel remote control ssss Left Limit remote control rn Limits On Off remote control ud Link Mkr1 and Delta 5 nre Link Mrk1 and Delta1 remote control Manual remote control Marker 1 remote control Marker 1 to 4 remote control 216 217 242 243 Marker 2 remote control Marker 3 remote control Marker 4 remote control Marker Norm Delta m Marker Norm Delta remote control 215 Marker to Trace remote control 216 Meas Time Auto Meas Time Manual um Min remote control ramuli eias Next Min remote control 214 241 242 Next Peak eio eoe e eR E RR re denen 137 Next Peak remote control 213 214 215 239 240 241 242 Peak qe Peak remote control nee R amp S SUPPO eege Eed ENEE dee Range Lin Unit remote control Range Linear
5. Chapter 1 Introduction General information Chapter 2 Front and Rear Panel Chapter 3 Preparing for Use Chapter 4 Firmware Update and Installation of Firmware Options Chapter 5 Basic Operations Chapter 6 Basic Measurement Examples Chapter 7 Brief Introduction to Remote Control Appendix LAN Interface Operating Manuals The Operating Manuals are a supplement to the Quick Start Guide Operating Manuals are provided for the base unit and each additional software option The Operating Manual for the base unit provides basic information on operating the R amp S FSV in general and the Spectrum mode in particular Furthermore the software options that enhance the basic functionality for various measurement modes are Documentation Overview described here The set of measurement examples in the Quick Start Guide is expan ded by more advanced measurement examples In addition to the brief introduction to remote control in the Quick Start Guide a description of the basic analyzer commands and programming examples is given Information on maintenance instrument interfa ces and error messages is also provided In the individual option manuals the specific instrument functions of the option are described in detail For additional information on default settings and parameters refer to the data sheets Basic information on operating the R amp S FSV is not included in the option manuals The following Operating Manual
6. SENSe DDEModTFILISrUSER 12er crt a ENEE SENSe DDEMod TFILter STATe ve SENSe TD MAM SENSeEDDEMOQ UQAM FORMlAat irure certa cz oso PM rt aerial ee SEENEN SENSeEDDEMOd UGAM NS Tale 5 n remit cr eNe er rete rer ro e eet c RR EE ERA 314 SENSeESWESp COUNEGUPERORL cain itin tnter ctp EGE rae game e ELSE DR AEAEE ENEE 316 SENSeESWEeGp GOUNI EVALUG cicatrice tpe tette te erro pee Edge 316 CALCulatesi gt RTR e IER ME 247 GAL Culatesp DELTamatrkersmm AO coercuit pre EENE EE E AEN EEPE EEEE EANAN 212 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt LINK s CAL Culate nz D I Tamarker mz MAXimum APEak nennen nnne neret enne 212 CALCulate n DELTamarker m MAXimum LEFT sess nennen 213 CAL Culate nz D I Tamarker mz MAximum NENT 213 CAL Culate nz D I Tamarker mz MAXimum RICH 214 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MAXimum PEAK walls GALCulate n DELTamarker m MlNimutrm bEF T 2 eerte tnt nennen 214 CAL Culate nz D I Tamarker mz MiNmum NENT 214 CAL Culate nz D I Tamarker mz MiNmmum HIGH 215 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MINimum PEAK 215 GALGCulate n DELTamarkersm TRAQGe 2 rre that a rer irn ra i ee oaa ti n ERR ERR 216 ee EE RN KENE EE 216 GALCGulate n DELTamarker m X ABSol te n rrt three intr nnn tinea 216 CALCulate lt n gt DEL Tamarker lt m gt X RELALIVE is eene tr ree
7. nennen 182 OVGINIOW dii anaiari aiaa eee KENE 76 Transformialon oan eH Leone cross Reges 183 Results SAVING 111 RF Attenuation Ee ne EE 156 RF Preamplifier ZEN en ens 120 156 RF Settings Attenuation Mode cem Meee 156 EL Attenuation Frequency Input Coupling Ref Level Offset Reference Level RF Attenuation oie eet tege deste Rotatirig HE aiia e T RX Settings tic M E 142 S Sample rate Digital UO Interface remote control 274 Digital e cc 141 Save As Standard MONKEY ELM 114 Saving liem ccem c Results Screenshots scaling MOM 190 Conformity information sposarsi manio 209 Screens Display Configuration 181 Screenshots Printing iuo nete tee me pede oreste ea 111 search MINIMUM EE 138 DOAK c 137 Search BI ze E Direction Real or Imag El m Tolerance Burst Search Settings Overview SOMKSY T Signal Description Continuous Burst Signal sssini 152 zu M dee 152 Ec M M 132 Signal MAPPING ertt mener mnes 150 Signal Source l Q Ahalyzer TT 141 Remote control s eiim Softkey All Marker Off 1 etre rn nere CF Stepsize remote control
8. esee 123 e Softkeys of the Trace Menu R amp S FSV K70 seem 126 e Softkeys of the Trigger Menu R amp S ESV KROO L 130 e Softkeys of the Meas Config Menu R amp S FSV K70 sees 132 e Softkeys of the Marker Menu R amp S ESV KOO seen 134 e Softkeys of the Marker To Menu R amp S FSV K70 sss 136 e Setting Limits Softkeys of the Lines Men 138 e Softkeys of the Input Output menu R amp S ESVkOO 141 e Softkeys of the Save Recall Menu R amp S ESVkKOO 144 Available Context leet geed 145 Softkeys of the VSA menu R amp S FSV K70 The VSA menu provides basic functions for vector signal analysis For information on configuring VSA measurements see chapter 3 3 Configuring VSA measurements on page 146 Softkeys and Menu Overview for Vector Signal Analysis R amp S FSV K70 The following softkeys are available in the VSA and MEAS menus MIG TINGS OVEN EM 114 Brenner EE 114 EP i o ERREUR 114 L Save As Standard BEE 114 L Delete Standanml iiiisitese phase rx LUE EE 115 L Standard Doble cuti oett de 115 L Restore Standard F les cicer tttm t tert ct 115 L New Folder netten tenet tetntnt ttti tata toss 115 Blende D 115 Restore Factory Settings SEENEN epic tpe FER nione ER Rn noon tu th FE Hd hanes 115 L Restore Standard Elles tnn 115 L Restore Pattern Files toten ttt tt tonat nd 115 Settings Overview Displays the main settings
9. HA Operating Manual 1176 7578 02 05 111 Measurement Result Display 6 If you want the colors of your screenshot to be as they appear on the screen select Screen Colors Hardcopy 7 Press the PRINT key again and then press the Print Screen softkey 8 If you selected Print to file a file selection dialog box is opened Specify the file location for your screenshot and press Save To store a screenshot via remote control HCOP DEV LANG BMP Selects the data format HCOP DEST MMEM Directs the hardcopy to a file MMEM NAME C R_S instr user Print bmp Selects the file name If the file Print bmp already exists it is replaced HCOP Saves the hardcopy output into the file Print bmp To save the I Q data to a file and reload it You can store the captured UO data to a file and reload it on the instrument again later 1 Select a window that displays UO data Press the SAVE RCL hardkey and then the Save softkey Define a file name for the data file 2 3 4 Select IQ Data from the list of items to be stored 5 Press Save to close the dialog and store the data to the file 6 To load the data again later press the SAVE RCL hardkey and then the Load softkey Select the file name with the stored data d 1 extension To export the trace data in ASCII format The R amp S FSV can save your results as plain text in a text file 1 Close all screens tha
10. Example SENS DDEM TFIL NAME USER Defines the use of a user defined Transmit filter SENS DDEM TFIL USER D MyTXFilter Selects the user defined filter MyTXFilter Mode VSA SENSe subsystem SENSe DDEMod TIME lt ResultLength gt The command determines the number of displayed symbols result length Setting parameters lt ResultLength gt numeric value Range 10 to 10000 FMR 7 20000 others depending on CPU board indicated in SETUP gt System Info gt Hardware Info RST 800 Default unit SYM Example DDEM TIME 80 Sets result length to 80 symbols Mode VSA Manual operation See Result Length on page 171 SENSe DDEMod UQAM FORMat Name This command selects the type of UserQAM demodulation Setting parameters Name string Name of the UserQAM demodulation Example DDEM FORM UQAM Selects user QAM demodulation DDEM UQAM FORM 32ary Selects 32ary user QAM name DDEM MAPP DVB S2 32APSK 34 Selects the mapping DVB S2 32APSK 34 Mode VSA SENSe DDEMod UQAM NSTate This command returns the order of the active UserQAM Usage Query only Mode VSA SENSe FREQuency CENTer Frequency This command defines the center frequency frequency domain or measuring fre quency time domain SENSe subsystem Parameters lt Frequency gt Range 0 to fmax RST fmax 2 Default unit Hz fmax iS specified in the data sheet min span is 1
11. Increase the I Q Correlation Threshold see I Q Correlation Threshold on page 166 False negative The I Q pattern search misses a position where transmitted symbols match the pat tern symbols Solution Decrease the UO Correlation Threshold see I Q Correlation Threshold on page 166 In case of bursted signals the pattern search finds only the first occurrence of the UO pattern within each burst If a false positive occurs in this situation cf case 1 the use of Meas only if pattern symbols correct will not provide a satisfactory sol ution In this case do the following Increase the I Q Correlation Threshold Specify the expected position of the pattern within the burst by adjusting the Offset parameter Message Sync Prefers More Valid Symbols Note Note that this message does not necessarily indicate a problem Its purpose is to inform you that you might have the opportunity to get a more stable demodulation and or better measurement results by improving your setup Synchronization in the R amp S FSV K70 is performed in two stages coarse synchroniza tion that precedes the reference signal generation and fine synchronization based on the reference signal The coarse synchronization stage can work data aided i e based on a known pat tern or non data aided i e based on the unknown data symbols The default is a non data aided coarse synchronization In the case that a pattern is pa
12. Burst Search In this stage the Capture Buffer is searched for bursts that comply with the signal description The search itself can be switched on or off via the Burst Search dialog see Burst Search on page 163 A list of the detected bursts is passed on to the next processing stage IQ Pattern Search The IQ Pattern Search is performed on the Capture Buffer This means the R amp S FSV K70 option modulates the selected pattern according to the transmit filter Tx filter and the modulation scheme Subsequently it searches the Capture Buffer for this IQ pattern i e the IQ waveform of the pattern It is assumed that patterns can only appear within bursts i e the IQ pattern search range is limited to the bursts detected by the Burst Search stage If the burst search is switched off the whole Capture Buffer is searched for the IQ pattern A list of all detected IQ patterns is passed on to the next processing stage It is important to note that the R amp S FSV K70 option can only search for one pattern at a time The pattern search can be switched on or off via the Pattern Search dialog see Pat tern Search on page 165 Extraction of Result Range The Result Range can be aligned to a burst a pattern or simply the start of the Cap ture Buffer see Result Range on page 170 Within this stage the Result Range is cut from the Capture Buffer starting at a point that is specified by the user e g the start of a detected b
13. ER Demodulation amp Measurement Filter Measurement Filter Measurement Filter Auto according to TX Filter Type RRC Alpha BT 0 3 Related Settings Modulation Settings IZQ Constellation Meas amp Ref 1M Clrw Start 3 51 Stop 3 51 Auto The measurement filter is defined automatically depending on the Transmit filter speci fied in the Modulation tab of the Modulation amp Signal Description dialog box see Transmit filter Type on page 150 EH Operating Manual 1176 7578 02 05 179 3 3 1 6 Configuring VSA measurements Note If a user defined Transmit filter is selected and the measurement filter is defined automatically a Low ISI measurement filter according to the selected user filter is cal culated and used Remote command SENSe DDEMod MFILter AUTO on page 290 Type Defines the measurement filter type if the Auto setting is not enabled An overview of available measurement filters is provided in table 2 4 Remote command SENSe DDEMod MFILter STATe on page 291 To turn off the measurement filter SENSe DDEMod MFILter NAME on page 291 To define the name of the measurement filter Load User Filter Type Opens a file selection dialog box to select the user defined measurement filter to be used For details see chapter 2 2 7 Customized Filters on page 20 Remote command SENSe DDEMod MFILter NAME on page 291 Alpha BT Defines the roll off fa
14. IQ Meas with corrected timing IO Meas with corrected timing phase frequency offset scaling Symbol Decision IQ Meas corrected IQ Symbols Passed on to Pattern Symbol Check Fig 2 44 Demodulation and Symbol Decision algorithm Demodulation Overview 2 5 4 Pattern Symbol Check This stage performs a bit by bit comparison between the selected pattern and the demodulated bits It is important to note that this comparison is only performed at posi tions that have been identified by the IQ pattern search as possible pattern positions The algorithm and a simple example are illustrated in figure 2 45 First the pattern candidate bits are extracted from the whole bitstream calculated by the Demodulation amp Symbol Decisions stage This means that the symbol stream is cut at the position that has been detected by the Q Pattern Search as the start of the pattern The extracted sequence is then compared to the selected pattern If the demodulation has been ambiguous with respect to the absolute phase position the extracted sequence needs to be compared to all possible rotated versions of the selected pattern For example in the case of QPSK modulation the rotational symme try has the order four i e there are four pattern hypotheses If the extracted sequence coincides with one of the hypotheses the pattern is declared as found and the abso lute phase corresponding to the appropriate hypothes
15. Values 691 Number of measurement points 10000 10 3 15 7 10130 11 5 16 9 10360 12 0 17 4 Sege Measured values lt x value gt lt y1 gt lt y2 gt lt y2 gt being available only with detector AUTOPEAK and containing in this case the smallest of the two measured values for a measurement point Notation 4 Remote Control Commands R amp S FSV K70 This chapter lists and describes all remote control commands specific to this software application For further information on analyzer or basic settings commands refer to the corre sponding subsystem in the base unit description MEM DucupD 208 4 2 ABORtSubsysterm irren tre niece ierra te eru x REA RE Pc aaa n RR rx a Eun Eas 211 A 3 e EE E treten nene tena Maaa ck kan Enea te Stn RAS ER RE nE oca RcS 211 4 3 1 CALCulate DELTamarker subesvstem eene 211 4 3 2 CALCulate LIMit MACCuracy subsvstenm enn 217 4 3 3 CALCulate MARKer subsvstem eee eeeeeeeeeseneeeeeeteeeeeeeeteeaaeeeteeeaeees 225 4 3 4 Other CALCulate commande 246 4 4 DISPlay SUDSySte Mii ciicccscicescceshecsvccedes ccceavectesvestecvacecessadatecetessasstxeeicevessenesededeesvouerseas 257 4 5 FORMat SubSysteitiisicccccciccccccccceccccscedcvecssccctccecsccaeecccasseedeccevscacevecsvsccevedsasccadeeccssendees 268 4 6 INi Tate Subsystem nier rec reene uiia recen runi adaa En anna Eran 269 4 7 JINPutSubsyster
16. 64QAM 128QAM 256QAM FSK 2FSK 4FSK 8FSK UserQAM 2ary 4ary 16ary 32ary Remote command SENSe DDEMod PSK FORMat on page 296 SENSe DDEMod QPSK FORMat on page 298 SENSe DDEMod MSK FORMat on page 292 SENSe DDEMod QAM FORMat on page 297 Configuring VSA measurements FSK Ref Deviation The FSK Reference Deviation sets the deviation to the reference frequency In case of 2FSK it indicates the distance from the reference frequency to the positive negative deviation frequency and in case of 4FSK the distance to the outer positive negative deviation frequency Select Relative from the dropdown menu next to the input field to set the deviation as a multiple of the symbol rate x SR If you want to set the deviation as an absolute value in Hz select Absolute from the dropdown menu Note that this parameter is available only in combination with FSK modulated signals Remote command CALCulate lt n gt FSK DEViation REFerence VALue on page 252 CALCulate n FSK DEViation REFerence RELative on page 251 Modulation Mapping The available mapping types depend on the Modulation Type and Modulation Order For more information on the modulation mapping refer to chapter 2 3 Symbol Mapping on page 22 Remote command SENSe DDEMod MAPPing VALue on page 290 SENSe DDEMod MAPPing CATalog on page 290 Symbol Rate Th
17. HR 22 150 marker POA e 137 Markers IS lie e EE Coupling remote control px Selecting icr enr nene in s DOU gogig o Setting to Trace Settings Matched filter Max Hold trace mode eme Max Peak tji M 137 maximum SeatChi EE 137 OSTEN 16 MEAS KEY eem Meas only if burst was found Measurement bandwidth bu Measurement filters Deactivating remote control sessssse 291 Enabling nere A79 Predefined A WY X N 180 WSer detined isis eet dnte ees 180 Measurement result display esseessesss 74 Menu RI eet eed tun voee iss At Measurement VSA Min Hold trace mode ssssssseees minimum search Minimum shift keying MSK ModAcc Limits SOflKGy rtt ene need 138 Modulation Errors TEE Mapping op PH Onder Symbol Rate MY Il H Modulation Accuracy INIS 2 cte Be rrt tte cod acetone 138 204 N New Folder eji deeg ee 115 Normalization DenmodulatlOn dese cassis ioni read rie ci cba caasa ua 176 O Octal SONKEY M 119 offset liis emer ET 116 Offset EVM e 176 IP atte WEE 153 QPSK qe 30 Reference level Result range srie
18. If Offset EVM is active however the R amp S FSV compensates the delay of the Q com ponent with respect to the component in the measurement signal as well as the refer ence signal before calculating the error vector That means that the error vector con tains only one symbol instant per symbol period Estimation Points Sym The estimation points per symbol affect and control synchronization of the signal You can set the estimation points manually or let the R amp S FSV decide which estimation points to use If you define the estimation points manually you can set the estimation points to 1 or 2 per symbol or the value of the Capture Oversampling per symbol Setting the estima tion points to 1 means that the estimation algorithm takes only the symbol time instants into account while setting the estimation points to Capture Oversampling means that all sample time instants are weighted equally If you select the automatic routine the R amp S FSV uses 2 estimation points per symbol for Offset QPSK modulation and 1 estimation point per symbol for other PSK and QAM modulated signals For MSK and FSK modulated signals the estimation points corre spond to the capture oversampling Remote command SENSe DDEMod EPRate AUTO on page 285 SENSe DDEMod EPRate VALue on page 285 Coarse Synchronization It is not only possible to check whether the pattern is part of the signal but also to use the pattern for synchronization
19. Auto In single sweep mode captures the UO data once and evaluates it In continuous sweep mode captures UO data continuously for each evaluation the average is calculated over the last 10 capture sets moving average Manual In single sweep mode captures UO data until the defined number of evaluations have been performed In continuous sweep mode captures UO data continuously if trace averaging is selected the average is calculated over the defined number of capture sets moving average Note If the Statistic Count is set to 1 trace averaging is not per formed Max Hold and Min Hold however remain active unlike in Spectrum mode Remote command SENSe SWEep COUNt VALue on page 316 Select Result Rng Opens an input field to select the result range you want to analyze By default the R amp S FSV shows the results over all result ranges that have been cap tured in the data capturing process and are in the R amp S FSV s memory By selecting a range number you can analyze a specific result range e g a particular burst The range depends on the number of result ranges you have captured previously A selection of the result range is possible in single sweep mode only For more information refer also to Capture Length on page 159 e Result Length on page 171 e Statistics Count on page 124 Remote command SENSe DDEMod SEARCh MBURst CALC on page 303 Softkeys and Menu Overview for Vector Signal
20. Block Diagram for Digital Baseband Input The following block diagram provides an overview on how digital baseband input is processed in the R amp S FSV K70 option The digital baseband input requires option R amp S FSV B17 Digital Down Converter B17 digital IQ Decimation input Filter connector downsampling decimation by or upsampling 2 n Fig 2 2 Block diagram of digital hardware for digital baseband input B17 in vector signal analysis The digital UO data stream is fed into the analyzer via the connector of the digital base band interface R amp S FSV B17 option There is no need to equalize any IF filter or mix the signal into the complex baseband The digital hardware just has to ensure that the final UO data stored in the record buffer has the correct sample rate therefore the sig nal is resampled and filtered Filters and Bandwidths During Signal Processing This section describes the used filters in vector signal analysis with an R amp S FSV as well as the bandwidth after each filter The relevant filters for vector signal analysis are shown in figure 2 3 R amp S FSV K70 Brief Description of Vector Signal Analysis IQ Demodulation Bandwidth Bandwidth Optional IF Filter m seg We Reen dei Measurement Filter Digi aseband Baseband Baseband Analog Section f Digital Hardware Section DSP Section Fig 2 3 Block diagram of bandwidth relevant filters for vector signal analysis e
21. Enlarge the capture buffer length such that all the bursts you want to demodulate can be seen within the capture buffer INITiatel CONTinuous OFF Go to single sweep mode Operating Manual 1176 7578 02 05 355 Frequently Asked Questions SENSe1l SWEep COUNt 0 Set the Statistic Count to Auto mode INITiatel IMMediate Do single sweep SENSe1 SWEep COUNt CURRent Query the number of demodulated bursts within the capture buffer For n 1 NumberOfBursts SENSe1 DDEMod SEARCh MBURSt CALC n TRACe4 TRACel Query the result symbols in screen D End Step through all bursts and query the demodulated symbols Question Why do the EVM results for my FSK modulated signal look wrong Answer For an FSK modulated signal the signal processing differs to an PSK QAM MSK modulated signal The estimation model does not minimize the EVM but the error of the instantaneous frequency see chapter 2 6 2 1 Error Model on page 68 There fore the measurement value that corresponds to the EVM value for FSK is the the Fre quency Error Absolute Relative Source Type Modulation Error Result Type Fre quency Error Absolute Relative Formulae 7 Annex Formulae and Abbreviations The following sections are provided for reference purposes and include detailed formu lae and abbreviations e FOMM iarrt ete E eer EEE EEEE eis 357 e ADNO EE 371 7 1 Formulae e Wrace based Eelere E O Cd c ue 357 e Result Summary Eva
22. In the External or IF Power trigger mode a common input signal is used for both trigger and gate Therefore changes to the gate delay will affect the trigger delay trig ger offset as well Remote command TRIGger lt n gt SEQuence HOLDoff TIME on page 328 Trigger Level Defines the trigger level as a numeric value Remote command TRIGger lt n gt SEQuence LEVel IFPower on page 327 For digital input via the R amp S Digital UO Interface R amp S FSV B17 TRIGger lt n gt SEQuence LEVel BBPower on page 326 Trigger Polarity Sets the polarity of the trigger source The sweep starts after a positive or negative edge of the trigger signal The default set ting is Pos The setting applies to all modes with the exception of the Free Run and Time mode Pos Level triggering the sweep is stopped by the logic 0 signal and restarted by the logical 1 signal after the gate delay time has elapsed Neg Edge triggering the sweep is continued on a O to 1 transition for the gate length duration after the gate delay time has elapsed Remote command TRIGger lt n gt SEQuence SLOPe on page 328 Trigger Hysteresis Defines the value for the trigger hysteresis for IF power or RF Power trigger sour ces The hysteresis in dB is the value the input signal must stay below the power trig ger level in order to allow a trigger to start the measurement The range of the value is between
23. R amp S FSV K70 Instrument Functions for Vector Signal Analysis D MagAbs Meas amp Ref e Start 26 sym l Stop 174 sym Fig 3 24 Evaluation lines in absolute magnitude diagram In symbol tables the evaluated symbols are indicated by red square brackets D Symbol Table Hexadecimal EDEBEZE CHEREE A In other result displays that are based on the evaluation range only two red vertical lines are displayed in the diagram header to indicate a limited evaluation basis B Result Summary 3 1 7 Saving Measurement Results After a data acquisition or measurement you may like to save the results for further evaluation or documentation purposes You can save a screenshot of the display to a file or print it and you can export the trace data in ASCII format To print or store a screenshot 1 Press the PRINT key 2 Press the Device Setup softkey 3 To copy the screenshot to the clipboard or print it on a printer select the corre sponding option Before you print to a printer make sure a printer is installed see the description in the base unit manual To save the screenshot to a file select the file format for your screenshot e g JPEG and then select the Print to file option 4 Close the Hardcopy Setup dialog 5 Press the Colors softkey and then Select Print Color Set p H
24. 0L L BZ O ET E gp apnyubepy eee eee eee eee eee ee eee eee ee 80 L 100 14 16 18 1 2 0 8 0 6 0 4 0 2 Frequency in f ymbol Rectangular 20 E VI 1 8 1 6 1 4 1 2 fsymbol 0 8 0 6 0 4 ee ees elleie Seier o ei beer wei weg dw eme eee eee ee ret E eee E Ae mme e e ele eeeeebemee me dee 2 D aM Hs 60 80 100 gp apnyubepy Frequency in ISI Filters Low The following frequency responses are obtained when using a low ISI measurment fil ter and the Transmit filter indicated in the title of each diagram Formulae APCO25 CAFM q 4 2 2 pBp 2 2 24 2 2 22 2Bp 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 22 24 2 2 2 2 2 2p 2 22 24 20 N N CH D D 1 1 D D 1 1 1 1 D 1 i i i i L co co co mmm tem Sm m pesesmessem qam mmm d Sp d Sp KN 1 1 1 D D 1 i i i i D D D C D D D 1 1 D 1 D 1 D 1 NE CUNEO NN FEN KC mi d C E 1 d 1 D 1 D 1 D 1 D D 1 1 D 1 D 1 i i i M i i i D D D t DH D t DH D aT be TT EE 1 DEEL EE DEE TT CEET EE EE H H H E H H H D D D D D D 1 D 1 o DH 1 wo 1 DH D D 1 D 1 D D H D EE E poy E apu E r 3 H D i Ki d U H 1 D 1 n D E Co D 1 D i i e i a c E 1 H 1 a D e 1 H eelerer gie pes m e cl anal alerte
25. 3 Select Load User Filter 4 Load your vaf file from the USB stick Symbol Mapping Mapping or symbol mapping means that symbol numbers are assigned to points or transitions in the I Q plane e g PSK and QAM In the analyzer the mapping is required to decode the transmitted symbols from the sampled UO or frequency time data records 2 3 1 Symbol Mapping The mappings for all standards used in the analyzer and for all employed modulation modes are described in the following Unless characterized otherwise symbol num bers are specified in hexadecimal form MSB at the left Phase Shift Keying PSK With this type of modulation the information is represented by the absolute phase position of the received signal at the decision points All transitions in the UO diagram are possible The complex constellation diagram is shown The symbol numbers are entered in the diagram according to the mapping rule BPSK NATURAL Fig 2 7 Constellation diagram for BPSK including the symbol mapping QPSK Fig 2 8 Constellation diagram for QPSK including the symbol mapping for CDMA2000 FWD and DVB S2 Symbol Mapping Fig 2 11 Constellation diagram for QPSK including the symbol mapping for WCDMA Symbol Mapping 8PSK EI AS Fig 2 14 Constellation diagram for 8PSK including the symbol mapping for DVB S2 Symbol Mapping 2 3 2 Rotating PSK A rotating PSK modulation is basically a PSK modulatio
26. DDEMod RLENgth AUTO on page 299 Dmm mM ETUR TUE RUE REA EES Operating Manual 1176 7578 02 05 158 R amp S FSV K70 Instrument Functions for Vector Signal Analysis Capture Length Defines the capture length in symbols or seconds if not defined automatically Capture Length Auto The sample rate and the usable UO bandwidth are displayed for reference only Remote command SENSe DDEMod RLENgth VALue on page 299 Capture Oversampling Sets the oversampling rate i e the number of captured points per symbol The default value is 4 This parameter affects the demodulation bandwidth If the bandwidth is too narrow the signal is not displayed completely If the bandwidth is too wide interference from out side the actual signal to be measured can distort the result Thus for signals with a large frequency spectrum e g FSK modulated signals a higher capture oversampling rate may be necessary For an indication of the required capture oversampling value view the Real Imag I Q display of the Capture Buffer with a Spectrum transformation If the complete signal is displayed and fills the width of the display the selected value is suitable If the signal is cut off increase the oversampling rate if it is too small decrease the over sampling value A Spec Reallmag CapBuf 1 Clrw 80 dB 100 dB 140 dB Start 541 667 kHz Stop 541 667 kHz Fig 3 26 Determining the DO bandwi
27. Displays the phase error of the measuremente signal with respect to the reference sig nal as a function of symbols over time PHASE _ERR t PHASE yras t PHASE pep t with tzn Tp and Tp the duration of one sampling period at the sample rate defined by the display points per symbol parameter see Display Points Sym on page 184 Measurement Result Display A Phase Error Fig 3 14 Result display Phase Error in normal mode Available for source types e Modulation Errors SCPI commands CALC FEED XTIM DDEM ERR MPH to define the required source type see CALCulate lt n gt FEED on page 249 CALC FORM PHAS to define the result type see CALCulate lt n gt FORMat on page 249 TRAC DATA TRACE1 to query the trace results see TRACe lt n gt DATA on page 324 3 1 1 20 Frequency Error Absolute Displays the error of the instantaneous frequency in Hz of the measurement signal with respect to the reference signal as a function of symbols over time FREQ _ERR t FREQy4s FREQper t with tzn Tp and Tp the duration of one sampling period at the sample rate defined by the display points per symbol parameter see Display Points Sym on page 184 Note that this measurement does not consider a possible carrier frequency offset This has already been compensated for in the measurement signal This measurement is mainly of interest when using the MSK or FSK modul
28. Frequency Offset Opens an edit dialog box to enter a frequency offset that shifts the displayed frequency range by the specified offset The softkey indicates the current frequency offset The allowed values range from 100 GHz to 100 GHz The default setting is 0 Hz Remote command SENSe FREQuency OFFSet on page 315 3 2 3 SoftkeySoftkeys of the Amplitude Menu R amp S FSV K70 When you click the AMPT key the Amplitude menu is displayed which provides the following softkeys Reference LOVE EE 117 REIN E 117 ME ir or itch ha areca EEE di daeaneesedaratesaede 117 L Y Axis Reference Value eene tentent 118 L Y Axis Reference Poelon etna 118 Ly dole AUOD EE 118 Ranges statistic measurements x creed seii cedi edi a 118 Softkeys and Menu Overview for Vector Signal Analysis R amp S FSV K70 e EEN 118 L X Axis Reference Value ertt een cerent e dern edd 118 ue so Lic n MODE ROMA 118 RE dr Nr E 119 s VLL EE 119 A ETE NER a 119 Et C Ec EEN 119 E Aniust Sella iie ties tori EI Qa WERDE RT LIC POOR PAP REX ped 119 Ranges Symbol Tablg EE 119 d o Er 119 2o EE 119 5 P 119 L Hassdpelbiisl EE 120 Ji d TD n 120 5 1 9 120 Ro 10 PNE E T 120 Dis E 120 Pres OM OM een EE ee 120 RF Atten Manual Mech Att Manual 120 RF Atten Auto Mech Att Auto 121 E ces ME 121 El Atten Mode Auto Man eite cit tete e beoe ESA 1
29. RST The default for trace 1 is always the measurement signal MEAS For all other traces the default sig nal type depends on the current measurement Example CALC2 TRAC5 MEAS Sets the measurement signal for trace 5 Usage SCPI confirmed Mode VSA Manual operation See Evaluation Meas Ref on page 128 4 4 DISPlay subsystem CALCulate lt n gt UNIT ANGLe lt Unit gt This command selects the default unit for angles Suffix lt n gt 1 4 Setting parameters lt Unit gt DEG RAD RST RAD Example CALC UNIT ANGLe DEG Selects degrees as the default unit Mode VSA CALCulate lt n gt X UNIT TIME lt Unit gt This command selects the unit symbols or seconds for the x axis Suffix lt n gt 1 4 Setting parameters lt Unit gt S SYM RST SYM Example CALC X UNIT TIME S Sets the unit to seconds Mode VSA Manual operation See X Axis Unit on page 120 See Capture Unit on page 120 DISPlay subsystem DISPlay WINDow sns E PRATe ATQ iiie iceereesduseccot kc icio ce etat iode EAE AVE LR iaaa 258 DISPlay WINDow n PRATe VALue esee enne enema 258 DISPlaypWINDows r SIZE 1 ttti rrr tuni ern de epp a Pha accu top net MER Rn dne Rune 259 DISPlayWINDowWwsms ES E 259 DISPlay WINDow sn TRAGe st MODE 1 1 itor rtu ma ca ede a toten oes 259 DISPlay WINDow n TRACe t STATe essere rere nennen 260 bISPlay WINDowen E TRACSSESSYMBOL
30. SENS e DDEMOd SEARCHES d e ER LEE 308 SENSe DDEMod SEARch SYNC PAT Tern ADD A 308 SENSe DDEMod SEARch SYNC PATTern REMowve sse nennen 309 E ENT Te RE E d Le E 309 SENSE DDEMOGSEARCI SING SUA KE 309 I SENSeEDDEMod SEARGh SYNO VEXT 1er qas retira EES EAR 309 SENSej DDEMod SIGNaEBAT Terbi iacit si ioc eer eee dena eu e nap cod apos ruere 310 SENSe DDEMod SIGNal VALue ence tette tent teni 310 II DDEMOd SRA f 310 SENSe DDEMod S TANGard COMMen tis aco eeote terertt rn l raten ere rna 311 SENSe DDEMod STANdard DELete 2 i aicut REENEN ate ee caves tee ey py a NEEN 311 SENSe DDEMod STANdard PREset VAL ue 311 I SENSeEDDEMod S L pleine ENEE 311 SENSe DDEMod STANdard SYNC OFFSet STATe eese enne 312 SENSe DDEMod STANdard SYNC OFFSet VAL ue 312 ISENZGel DDEMod TElier AL Pa 312 ISENSe DDEMod T FILter NAME naar adc e tenete a ttd I aaa e crt za 313 SENSe DDEMod TFILter S TATe eccentric 313 ISENSe E DBEMOSTFIEtGE USE rcn eu eeu s Ce eges tpe reco up riUcu RE i as RcMETR RI REIKG 313 I SENSeEDDEMOG TIME tact ete ENEE ENEE 314 E ERT e Ke he e TE 314 SENSE DDEMOGSUGAMING Tale 1 itr pte eau etra eR SE Ee ENEE Ee 314 SENS FREQUENCY CENT Eeron iraniana a nia baan raa an aiani ainina Eain 314 SENSeTFREQUericy CENTer STEP prenra E d d pe cre e dd 315 SENSe FREQuency CENTer STEP AUTO nuiiiieiieseitesceeses
31. Single Sweep Single Sweep remote control 269 Trace Mode remote control sssss 259 Trg Gate Source remote control Trigger Holdolff rtr es 162 Trigger Hysteresis ertet rre tenes 162 Trigger Offset ee MIQW Ee leese Softkeys Lower Level Hysteresis Upper Level Hysteresis So leier Special characters ssrin Sege echte geg ege Spectral display nre rre net Ps Standard Defaults rej M 115 Standards Predefined WT 42 Saving 114 Saving remote control 311 Statistical display 106 Statistics COLE oci ded oe ee rer eerta 124 Status registers STATus QUEStionable eege 3 eee 332 Status reporting system ES SWap WO Sweep Continue single Sweep erts 124 COMUNUOUS ER 124 Ire 124 Switching On the Option vie cs ieee elie 73 Symbol mappihg 2 trn te ettet e rne 22 Symbol rate 150 Remote Corto i iei DEE 310 Symbol tables eeler 1i tee rere nre eins 89 Symbols Display Configuration rene 181 Syntax Known data Tiles 21i ttt uei aea 202 T Trace Clear E 126 205 Trace mode E Le 127 206 Ell 127 206 Clear Write 126 205 Max Hold 126 205 Min HOI ou 127 205 View 127 206 Ree e H 128 Traces COMMQ
32. tem Info gt Hardware Info FMR 7 10000 symbols others 20000 symbols Remote command SENSe DDEMod TIME on page 314 Configuring VSA measurements Reference Defines the reference for the result range alignment The result of the current setting is displayed in the visualization area of the dialog box Capture the capture buffer Burst the detected burst Pattern the detected pattern Remote command CALCulate lt n gt TRACe lt t gt ADJust VALue on page 256 Alignment Defines the type of alignment of the result range to the reference source The result of the current setting is displayed in the visualization area of the dialog box Remote command CALCulate lt n gt TRACe lt t gt ADJust ALIGnment DEFault on page 255 Offset Defines the offset of the result range to the alignment reference The result of the cur rent setting is displayed in the visualization area of the dialog box Note Note the following restrictions to this parameter e An offset lt 0 is not possible if you align the result range to the left border of the capture buffer e An offset that moves the pattern outside the result range is not allowed For exam ple if you align the result to the left border of the pattern only offsets S 0 are allowed Otherwise you would never be able to find the pattern within the result range Remote command CALCulate n TRACe t ADJust ALIGnment OFFSet on page 255 Symbol Number at
33. 1 4 screen number lt m gt 1 4 irrelevant Query parameters lt type gt lt none gt quadrature error for current sweep AVG Average quadrature error over several sweeps RPE Peak quadrature error over several sweeps SDEV Standard deviation of quadrature error PCTL 95 percentile value of quadrature error RST PEAK Usage Query only Mode VSA CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion DDEMod STATistic RHO lt type gt This command queries the results of the Rho factor measurement performed for digital demodulation Suffix lt n gt 1 4 screen number lt m gt 1 4 irrelevant Query parameters lt type gt lt none gt Rho factor for current sweep AVG Average rho factor over several sweeps RPE Peak rho factor over several sweeps SDEV Standard deviation of rho factor PCTL 95 percentile value of rho factor RST PEAK Usage Query only Mode CALCulate subsystem VSA CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion DDEMod STATistic SNR lt type gt This command queries the results of the SNR error measurement performed for digital demodulation Suffix lt n gt lt m gt Query parameters lt type gt Usage Mode 1 4 screen number 1 4 irrelevant lt none gt Average SNR value of current sweep AVG RMS Average SNR value over several sweeps RPE Peak value of SNR over several sweeps SDEV Standard deviation of SNR values over several sweeps
34. 1 A device is connected lt DeviceName gt Device ID of the connected device lt SerialNumber gt Serial number of the connected device lt PortName gt Port name used by the connected device lt SampleRate gt Maximum or currently used sampling rate of the connected device in Hz depends on the used connection protocol version indicated by lt SampleRateType gt parameter lt MaxTransferRate gt Maximum data transfer rate of the connected device in Hz INPut Subsystem lt ConnProtState gt State of the connection protocol which is used to identify the connected device Not Started Has to be Started Started Passed Failed Done lt PRBSTestState gt State of the PRBS test Not Started Has to be Started Started Passed Failed Done lt SampleRateType gt 0 Maximum sampling rate is displayed 1 Current sampling rate is displayed lt Placeholder gt for future use currently 0 Example INP DIO CDEV Result 1 SMU200A 103634 Out A 70000000 100000000 Passed Not Started 0 0 Mode IQ VSA EVDO CDMA WCDMA GSM ADEMOD TDS Manual operation See Connected Device on page 141 See Digital IQ Info on page 144 INPut DIQ RANGe COUPling State If enabled the reference level for digital input is adjusted to the full scale level automat ically if the fullscale level changes This command is only available if the optional R amp S Digital UO Interface option R amp S FSV B17 is installed For details s
35. 2 Select AMPT gt Ranges gt X Axis Quantize see X Axis Quantize on page 118 3 Enter the number of bars to be displayed The diagram is adapted to display the specified number of bars To define the scaling manually using a reference point With this method you define a reference value on the x axis The y axis is adapted so that it crosses the x axis at the reference value 1 Focus the result screen 2 Select AMPT gt Ranges gt X Axis Reference Value see X Axis Reference Value on page 118 3 Enter a reference value on the x axis in the current unit The y axis is adapted so that it crosses the x axis at the reference value Example If you want to analyze the probabilities of occurrence for errors greater than 95 enter the reference value 95 l I Start 95 0 Stop 100 0 9o Fig 3 33 Defining the x axis scaling using a reference point To define the x axis range manually 1 Focus the result screen 2 Select AMPT gt Ranges gt X Axis Range see X Axis Range on page 118 3 Enter the range in the current unit The diagram is adapted to display the probabilities for the specified range To define the scaling automatically 1 Focus the result screen Operating Manual 1176 7578 02 05 191 Configuring VSA measurements 2 Select AMPT gt Ranges gt Adjust Settings see Adjust Settings on page 119 The x axis is adapted to display the current results optimally only
36. 3 2 2 3 2 3 3 2 4 3 2 5 3 2 6 3 2 7 3 2 8 3 2 9 3 2 10 3 2 11 3 2 12 3 2 13 3 2 14 3 3 3 3 1 3 3 2 3 3 3 3 3 4 3 3 5 3 3 6 3 3 7 3 3 8 3 4 3 4 1 3 4 2 3 1 Measurement Result Display Result Ranges and Evaluation Hanges 109 Saving Measurement Results tacta erectas itas e deca e E 111 Softkeys and Menu Overview for Vector Signal Analysis R amp S FSV K70 113 Softkeys of the VSA menu R amp S ESVkKoOn een 113 Softkeys of the Frequency Menu R amp S FSV K70 sssssssss 116 SoftkeySoftkeys of the Amplitude Menu R amp S FSV K70 ssssssssss 116 Softkeys of the Auto Set Menu R amp S EOVkKOO 122 Softkeys of the Sweep Menu R amp S EOGV kO 123 Softkeys of the Trace Menu RSSEOVkKOO 126 Softkeys of the Trigger Menu R amp S FSV K70 ssssssssssseeeenes 130 Softkeys of the Meas Config Menu R amp S ESVkKOO 132 Softkeys of the Marker Menu R amp S EGVKOO 134 Softkeys of the Marker To Menu R amp S ESV kKoO 136 Setting Limits Softkeys of the Lines Men 138 Softkeys of the Input Output menu R amp S EGVkO erreneren 141 Softkeys of the Save Recall Menu R amp S ESVkKoOn 144 Avallable Context MOrIus etc tee ciere tette n eco de te 145 Configuring VSA measurements essent nnne nnn nennt 146 Settings OVEMVIOW sis ES 146 Defining the Result Range ed Do ritate e nite rat a een 186 Changing the Display Scalirigus un
37. Accuracy Measurements on page 204 Remote command CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy STATe on page 219 Config ModAcc Limits Opens a dialog to configure modulation accuracy limits for the result summary Softkeys and Menu Overview for Vector Signal Analysis R amp S FSV K70 Limit Checking Set to Default Current Limit Value Check EVM RMS lv EVM Peak E Phase Err Rms v Phase Err Peak W Magnitude Err Rms Ii Magnitude Err Peak E Carr Freq Err M Rho E IQ Offset W Note Limits for Current and Peak are always equal Note The dialog box differs depending on the modulation type For FSK modulation different result types are available For details on configuring limits see chapter 3 3 8 Working with Limits for Modulation Accuracy Measurements on page 204 Limit Checking Config ModAcc Limits Activates or deactivates a limit check on the subsequent measurements Remote command CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy STATe on page 219 Set to Default Config ModAcc Limits Restores the default limits and deactivates all checks Remote command CALCulate n LIMit MACCuracy DEFault on page 218 Current Mean Peak Config ModAcc Limits Define and activate the limits for the currently measured value the mean and the peak value on separate tabs Note that the limits for the current and peak values are always the same Softkeys and Menu Overview for Vector Signal Analysis R amp S FS
38. Amplitude Quadrature Inbalance Offset UO Offset Distorsion Noise i i i Fig 2 46 Modelling Modulation Errors The measured signal model for PSK QAM and MSK modulation is depicted in fig ure 2 46 and can be expressed as MEAS Qi REF 1 jo REF 7 c lei Jef emm n t where REF and REF t the inphase and quadrature component of the reference signal g and gq the effects of the gain imbalance c and cq the effects of an IQ offset D the quadrature error a the amplitude droop fo the carrier frequency offset Q the carrier phase offset Signal Model Estimation and Modulation Errors C the timing offset n t a disturbing additive noise process of unknown power 2 6 1 2 Estimation The R amp S FSV K70 option includes two synchronization stages The first stage has already been described in the context of the Demodulation amp Symbol Decisions block see chapter 2 5 3 Demodulation and Symbol Decisions on page 53 The second stage is realized within the Synchronization block Here the measure ment signal is matched to the reference signal by minimizing the mean square of the error vector magnitude This is done by selecting the optimum parameter vector e MEAS neris The minimization takes place at the sample instants specified by the Estimation Points Sym parameter i e t n T with Tg the sampling period used for estim
39. An UO pattern is considered detected if the correlation metric i e the correlation value between the ideal IQ pattern and capture buffer exceeds a specified UO Correlation Threshold see Q Correlation Threshold on page 166 If the burst search is switched on the UO pattern search only searches the UO pattern in bursts previously detected by the burst search Furthermore it only finds the first UO pattern within each burst If the burst search is switched off the UO pattern search searches for the UO pattern in the entire capture buffer Demodulation and Symbol Decisions This stage operates on the Result Range and aims to make the correct symbol deci sions The algorithm is illustrated in figure 2 44 using the example of a QPSK modula tion After timing and scaling recovery a frequency offset and phase offset estimator is employed After this coarse synchronization the R amp S FSV K70 option makes symbol decisions i e recovers which symbols were transmitted by the device under test DUT Typically the employed estimators are non data aided NDA estimators This means that they operate on an unknown data sequence Since the local oscillators LO of the transmitter device under test and the receiver R amp S FSV are normally not coupled their phase offset with respect to each other is unknown The unknown transmission delay between DUT and R amp S FSV adds a further unknown phase offset Due to this unknown phase offs
40. Baseband power for digital input via the R amp S Digital UO Inter face R amp S FSV B17 RST IMMediate Example TRIG SOUR EXT Selects the external trigger input as source of the trigger signal Manual operation See Free Run on page 130 See External on page 130 See IF Power Baseband Power on page 130 See Trigger Mode on page 160 5 Status Reporting System Option R amp S FSV K70 The status reporting system stores all information on the current operating state of the instrument e g information on errors or limit violations which have occurred This infor mation is stored in the status registers and in the error queue The status registers and the error queue can be queried via IEC bus In this section only the new and altered status registers bits for the VSA option R amp S FSV K70 are described Detailed information on the status registers of the base system is given in the section Status Reporting System in chapter 5 of the Operating Manual on CD Description of the Status Registers In addition to the registers provided by the base system the following registers are used in the VSA option R amp S FSV K70 STATus QUEStionable SYNC lt n gt contains application specific information about synchronization errors or errors during burst detection e STATus QUESTionable MODulation lt n gt provides information on any limit violations that occur after demodulation in one of the 4 windows e STATus QUESTiona
41. D D D D D D 1 1 4 D D D 1 1 D D 4 D 1 D 1 D 4 1 D D D D J 1 D D D 1 1 4 1 1 D D D E D 1 D D D D rr M PME D D 1 D r D 1 D D D D D 1 D 1 D D r 1 D 1 D r H D D i e c eN gp apnyubepy GDH T nnn nn nn nr nnn png np 4 4 8 80 100 0 8 04 06 0 2 fsymbol Frequency in CDMA2000 1X Forward D D Q4 2pB 4 eee eee eee eee ee 20 N D H D 1 D D D D i co Ce ddan tier mim Eege eege es cine J D 1 1 D D D 1 1 D D D D D D D DT EECH e D 1 D 1 D D D 1 D H D 1 D D D D D D D 1 D 1 D 1 D D DH T 4 p 4 T7 KE 5 H H H H 1 D D D 1 D D D H 1 D 1 D D H TT 4 F T T 4 1 F N D H H H 1 D 1 D D D 1 D 1 D 1 D 1 D D D T J2 2 b J 1 t 1 DH 1 g J D D D D 1 D D D D D D D 1 D D D 1 i D H H H H ci CO 2 24 R 4 t d D nem 1 D D D 1 DH D D D D 1 D 1 D D D 1 D 2 4 2 2 Lecco ini TETTIE o o o e 1 T D 1 H D D D e 1 D 1 D 1 H H D D 1 D 1 D RT VE et oe oe E H H e D D D 1 D D D D D 1 D 1 D D D H H H CN DEET ET ETC D D c D 1 D 1 D 1 D D D D 1 D D D 1 D H a e ce ce e a c N t e co e D Y T 1 gp apnyiubeyy feymbol Frequency
42. D T L D D DH D DH D Ss mm mm ale wm zm mm zm zm wk a zm zm mm zm mm d a zm zm mm zm mm zk wm zm mm zm zm ss a zm zm mm zm mm le zm zm zm zm mm ss kb a zm mm zm zm zm d a zm mm mm zm mm Ah i UNE DN Te OU DEE DEET LLL LA DEET VE Pree ewe gee ewe ee peeee E ll kee gang gp apnyiubeyy Jg Pessac 80 0 8 0 6 0 4 0 2 100 Frequency in fsymbol Linearized GMSK 1 D 1 ee ee ee ee eee ee rr 20 e zm mm wm mm mm all 6 zm mm wm d a mm mm zm mm zm wl zm wm zm wm zm wm a wm wm mm mm zm sl wm zm mm mm zm ss kb wm wm zm mm zm mm d mm mm zm mm mm E 1 M 4 Bp B Q4 R 2 2 4 2 pRp 2 2 4 DEER ee i Eecusos E Hss gp apnyubepy 4 80 100 Kate Frequency in 7 2 Abbreviations The following abbreviations are commonly used in the description of the R amp S FSV K70 option Frequency Shift Keying FSK c o 2 o o o o o o L o 2 o o S Ss E o O 929 c Ss 29 o o 92 g Y oS EWS 2 coo o EL 5 gt oo o9 989 E c uc e Ejo sas S easEs8 d o0 9o5o99 32 2 t SES E c o 2 S gt D en zl lt o9 Abbreviations Abbreviation ISI free demodulation Meaning Demodulation structure in which the signal is no longer influenced by adjacent symbols at the deci sion instants after signal adapted filtering See secti
43. Display Config Start Osym Fig 6 8 Example for failed alignment In this screenshot the alignment of the long result range to the burst center is not pos sible because there are not enough samples in the capture buffer before the burst starts In this scenario the trigger settings should be changed such that the burst is in the middle of the capture buffer Solution Change the trigger settings and or enlarge the capture length For more information see e Q Capture on page 157 Operating Manual 1176 7578 02 05 342 R amp S FSV K70 Support Message Pattern Search On But No Pattern Selected Spectrum VSA Modulation amp Signal Description Ref Level 4 00 d m SGL BURST PATTERN Signal Type AEVM Continuous Signal e Burst Signal Burst Min Length 148 sym 546 462 us Max Length 148 sym 546 462 us Run In B sym 11 077 us Run Out 3 sym 11 077 us vw Pattern EE 5 Start 13 sym Name L JPattem settings C Mag CapBuf w Offset 58 sym 214 154 us Description K Burst Length d Offset Start 0 sym Stup 1900 Syiti Fig 6 9 The red circle shows the place where you can specify a pattern Solution Select an existing pattern or create a new pattern that you expect to be within the signal For more information see e Signal Description on page 151 chapter 3 3 5 Working with Pattern Searches on page 194
44. Fig 3 32 Defining the y axis scaling using a reference point To define the scaling automatically 1 Focus the result screen 2 Select AMPT gt Ranges gt Y Axis Autorange see chapter 3 2 3 SoftkeySoftkeys of the Amplitude Menu R amp S FSV K70 on page 116 The y axis is adapted to display the current results optimally only once not dynamically 3 3 3 2 Scaling Statistics Diagrams Statistic diagrams show the distribution i e probabilities of occurrence of the values as a set of bars You can define the number of bars to be displayed i e the granularity of classifications Additionally you can specify whether absolute or percentage values are displayed For statistics measurements both the x axis and the y axis can be scaled to optimize the display The range of the displayed x axis for statistics diagrams can be defined in the following Ways e manually be defining a range in dB manually by defining reference values and positions e automatically according to the current results The range of the displayed y axis can be defined in the following ways e manually by defining the minimum and maximum values to be displayed automatically according to the current results After changing the scaling you can restore the default settings Operating Manual 1176 7578 02 05 190 R amp S FSV K70 Instrument Functions for Vector Signal Analysis To define the number of bars 1 Focus the result screen
45. PCTL 95 percentile of RMS value over several sweeps PEAK Maximum SNR over all symbols of current sweep PAVG Average of maximum SNR values over several sweeps TPE Maximum SNR over all symbols over several sweeps PSD Standard deviation of maximum SNR values over several sweeps PPCT 95 percentile of maximum RMS values over several sweeps RST PEAK Query only VSA CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt LINK lt MarkerCoupling gt With this command markers between several screens can be coupled i e use the same stimulus All screens can be linked with an X axis scaled in symbols or time except those showing the capture buffer If several capture buffer measurements are visible their markers are coupled too CALCulate subsystem Suffix lt n gt 1 4 lt m gt 1 4 Setting parameters lt MarkerCoupling gt ON OFF RST OFF Mode VSA Manual operation See Couple Screens On Off on page 134 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MAXimum APEak This command positions the active marker or deltamarker on the largest absolute peak value maximum or minimum of the selected trace Suffix lt n gt 1 4 m 1 4 Usage Event Mode VSA Manual operation See Max Peak on page 137 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MAXimum LEFT This command positions a marker to the next smaller trace maximum on the left of the current position i e in descending X values If no next smaller maximum value is found
46. SENSe ADJust CONFigure LEVel DURation MODE essen 284 SENSE FAD Just BVel dicks nter ro Cette tool EES 284 ISENSeIEDDEMog EGALGDPESBL ecce nter dat eda erecta ux e ANA dE 284 ISENSel DDEModECALGEMODEL tette tette tentes 284 SENSE DDEMOT EPRE AUTO E 285 ISENZGelt DDEMod EPhRateVAl ue 285 SENSE DDEMGGIFAC TO VALUE EE 286 SENSeEDDEMOd FIETer ALPHA isiin iien anara ea iiiaae nice Re aee eon 286 IGENSel DDEMod ElUTertSTATel tette ttes 286 SENSeEDDEMod FORIMl aan e E sa de ee apttd exu AE NEES 287 SENSeEDDEMod FSK NSTale 2 need ceci Im cii erede aai a a 287 I SENSeEDDEMOd FS YING AUTO oo EE 287 SENSep DDEMGadIESYNcBEVOl ien rue aani aa aaa ad iaaa Piai 288 SENSeEDDEMOG FSYNc RESUIE und e eee Rex uez e a Sect da x eoe epa eu cete er cana atn 288 SENSe DDEMod FSYNG MODE ence tette tentent tette 288 SENSeEDDEMOSIKDATa STATB 11 naaa aaa EES EEN 289 SENSe DDEMod KDATa NAME cette tette tet tent tette 289 SENSeE DDEMOd MAPPing CATalog 1 tede e coru d a REENEN EEEEEEER DH EY Ra Rede E 290 SENSe DDEMod MAPPing VALue 2 einen no arum RR RET iste nina 290 ISENSGel DDEMod MEI ier AL Pa 290 ISENSeEDDEMOodSIMEILterdAU TO tee petere tis arret ne ror t re ete teens 290 SENSe DDEMGGHMFIbter NAME odio orici uto NEESS e hte AEN 291 IGENSe DDEModMElLiertStAtel tette teet tentent tens 291 I SENSerDDEMOodIMFIEter USE
47. This command is available for FSK modulation only Suffix lt n gt 1 4 window Setting parameters lt LimitValue gt numeric value the value x x gt 0 defines the interval x x Range 0 0 to 100 RST 1 5 mean 1 0 Default unit Hz Example CALC2 FEED XTIM DDEM MACC Switch on result summary in screen 2 CALC2 LIM MACC FERR RPE VAL 15 define a limit of 15 15 Hz Mode VSA CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy MERRor PCURrent VALue lt LimitValue gt CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy MERRor PMEan VALue lt LimitValue gt CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy MERRor PPEak VALue lt LimitValue gt CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy MERRor RCURrent VALue lt LimitValue gt CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy MERRor RMEan VALue lt LimitValue gt CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy MERRor RPEak VALue lt LimitValue gt This command defines the value for the current peak or mean magnitude error peak or RMS limit Note that the limits for the current and the peak value are always kept identical Suffix lt n gt 1 4 window Setting parameters lt LimitValue gt numeric value the value x x gt 0 defines the interval x x Range 0 0 to 100 RST 1 5 Default unit Operating Manual 1176 7578 02 05 223 CALCulate subsystem Example CALC2 FEED XTIM DDEM MACC Switch on result summary in screen 2 CALC2 LIM MACC MERR RPE VAL 2 4 define a limit of 2 496 Mode VSA
48. This command sets the left limit of the marker search range If the power measurement in zero span is active this command limits the evaluation range to the trace Note The function is only available if the search limit for marker and delta marker is switched on see CALCulate n MARKer m X SLIMits STATe Suffix n Selects the measurement window m irrelevant Parameters Limit Range 1e9 to 1e9 RST 0 0 Example CALC MARK X SLIM ON Switches the search limit function on CALC MARK X SLIM LEFT 10MHz Sets the left limit of the search range to 10 MHz CALCulate subsystem Manual operation See Search Limits on page 137 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt X SLIMits RIGHT Limit This command sets the right limit of the marker search range If the power measurement in zero span is active this command limits the evaluation range to the trace Note The function is only available if the search limit for marker and delta marker is switched on CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt X SLIMits STATe Suffix lt n gt Selects the measurement window lt m gt irrelevant Parameters lt Limit gt Range 1e9 to 1e9 RST 800 0 Example CALC MARK X SLIM ON Switches the search limit function on CALC MARK X SLIM RIGH 20MHz Sets the right limit of the search range to 20 MHz Manual operation See Search Limits on page 137 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt X SLIMits ZOOM lt St
49. for burst search The RLENgth is given in time S or symbols SYM As a result of a query the value is given in time Note that the maximum record length depends on the capture oversampling rate see Capture Oversampling on page 159 For the default value 4 the maximum is 50 000 For larger oversample rates the maximum record length can be calculated as Recordlengthyax 200 000 Capture oversampling gt SENSe subsystem Setting parameters lt RecordLength gt numeric value Range 100 symbols 26 042 us to 50000 symbols 13 021 ms RST 8000 symbols 2 083 ms Default unit S Example DDEM RLEN 1000SYM Sets a capture length of 1000 symbols Mode VSA Manual operation See Capture Length on page 159 SENSe DDEMod SBANd lt SidebandPos gt This command selects the sideband for the demodulation Setting parameters lt SidebandPos gt NORMal INVerse NORMal Normal non inverted position INVerse Inverted position RST NORMal Example DDEM SBAN INV Selects the inverted position Mode VSA Manual operation See Swap Q on page 160 SENSe DDEMod SEARch BURSt AUTO lt AutoBurstSearch gt This command links the burst search to the type of signal When a signal is marked as bursted burst search is switched on automatically see also Auto On Off on page 164 Setting parameters lt AutoBurstSearch gt AUTO MANual RST AUTO Example DDEM SEAR BURS AUT
50. i treo rete rte etes 260 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt X SCALe PDIVISION een 261 DiSblavlf WiNDow nzUTR ACectz MI SCALelbRbOigon rene 261 DISPlay WINDow n TRACe t X SCALe RVALue esses 261 DISPlay WINDow n TRACe t X SCALe STARt essssssssssesssseseee nennen 262 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt X SCALe VOFFSEt cecce cee eeeeeceeteeeeeeeseeteeeeeeeeereees 262 DiSblavlfWiNDow nztTR ACectz Tt SCAL el 263 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe AUTO VALUG ceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeaeaes 263 DISPlay subsystem DiSblavlfWiNDow nztTR ACectstSCALelAUTOALL eene 263 DISPlay WINDow n TRACe st Y SCALe MODE eese 264 DISPlay WINDow n TRACe t Y SCALe PDlVision ccce 264 DISPlay WINDow n TRACe t Y SCALe RLEVel esses eene 265 DISPlay WINDow n TRACe t Y SCALe RLEVel OFFSet eeeeesessssssss 265 DISPlay WINDow n TRACe t Y SCALe RPOSition sse 265 DISPlay WINDow n TRACe t Y SCALe RVALue cessisse 266 DISPlay WINDow n TRACe t Y SPAQCing aecenas iiaii 266 bpISPlayPWINDowens ZOOM STAT 1 ceti aa once e uuo o RAE Petre RRRE Rer ENEE 267 DISPlay AWINDowsn gt ZOOM AREA eene ennt en nnns sns tr naanin ai iaia 267 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt PRATe AUTO lt DisplayPPSM
51. in order to obtain the correct reference signal Depend ing on the signal making use of the pattern for synchronization speeds up your mea surement considerably and makes it more robust against high carrier frequency off sets However in case the parameter is set to Pattern you should make sure that the pattern is suitable for synchronization e g a pattern that was made for synchronization purposes like in GSM In case the pattern is short or the pattern does not have good synchronization properties e g a pattern that consists of only one symbol that is repeated this parameter should be set to Data Note In previous versions of the R amp S FSV K70 application this setting was referred to as Use Pattern For Sync The former setting True corresponds to the new setting Pattern The former setting False corresponds to the new setting Data If Auto mode is selected the detected data is used Operating Manual 1176 7578 02 05 177 Configuring VSA measurements Data Default the detected data is used for synchronization i e unknown symbols Pattern Known symbols from a defined pattern are used for synchronization Remote command SENSe DDEMod SEARch PATTern SYNC AUTO on page 304 SENSe DDEMod SEARch PATTern SYNC STATe on page 304 Fine Synchronization In addition to the coarse synchronization used for symbol decisions a fine synchroni zation is available to calculate vario
52. lt n gt lt ResultType gt lt LimitType gt Setting parameters lt LimitState gt 1 4 window CFERror EVM FDERror FERRor MERRor OOFFset PERRor RHO CFERror Carrier Frequency Error EVM Error Vector Magnitude FERRor Frequency error FSK only FDERror Frequency deviation error FSK only MERRor Magnitude Error OOFFset UO Offset PERRor Phase Error RHO Rho CURRent MEAN PEAK PCURRent PMEan PPEak RCURRent RMEan RPEak For CFERor OOFFset RHO CURRent MEAN PEAK For EVM FERRor MERRor PERRor PCURRent Peak current value PMEan Peak mean value PPEak Peak peak value RCURRent RMS current value RMEan RMS mean value RPEak RMS peak value ON OFF Activates a limit check for the selected result and limit type RST OFF CALCulate subsystem Example CALC2 FEED XTIM DDEM MACC Switch on result summary in screen 2 CALC2 LIM MACC CFER CURR VAL 100 Hz define a limit of 100 100 CALC2 LIM MACC CFER CURR STAT ON switch limit check ON Mode VSA Manual operation See Check on page 140 CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy lt ResultType gt lt LimitType gt RESUIt lt LimitResult gt This command queries whether the limit for the specified result type and limit type was violated Suffix lt n gt 1 4 window lt ResultType gt CFERror EVM FDERror FERRor MERRor OOFFset PERRor RHO CFERror
53. measurement results are only displayed if a valid pattern has been found See also Meas only if pattern symbols correct on page 166 To define an offset for the pattern search 1 In the VSA gt Settings Overview dialog box select Signal Description 2 Select the Offset option and enter the number of symbols to be used as an offset Configuring VSA measurements 3 3 6 Managing patterns The available patterns and those assigned to the current standard are listed in the Pattern Settings dialog box In addition details for the currently focussed pattern are displayed in the upper right hand part of the dialog box To show the details for a spe cific pattern simply click on it To add a predefined pattern to a standard 1 Inthe VSA gt Settings Overview dialog box select Signal Description 2 Press Pattern Settings 3 In the list of All Patterns select the required pattern If the required pattern is not displayed see To change the display for the list of patterns on page 196 4 Press Add to Standard The selected pattern is inserted in the list of Standard Patterns To change the display for the list of patterns 1 In the VSA gt Settings Overview dialog box select Signal Description 2 Press Pattern Settings 3 To display all available patterns select Show All To display all patterns that are compatible to the defined standard select Show Compatible To display only patterns
54. mit filters for measuring the same FSK MSK signal Example e f your transmit filter for the R amp S FSQ K70 was NONE you need to choose Rec tangular as the transmit filter type in the R amp S FSV e f your transmit filter for the R amp S FSQ K70 was GAUSS you need to choose GMSk as the transmit filter type in the R amp S FSV Problem The EVM trace looks okay but the EVM in the result summary is signif icantly different Solution e Make sure that the position of the Evaluation Lines is reasonable The Result Summary only evaluates sample instants that are within the evaluation lines Hence in the case the Result Range covers the burst ramps it is important to adjust the Evaluation Range appropriately Operating Manual 1176 7578 02 05 352 R amp S FSV K70 Support Spectrum VSA Ref Level 0 00 dBm Std EDGE 16QAM SR 270 833 kHz m tel Att 20 0 dB Freq 1 0GHz Res Len 300 SGL ResRange Count 0 BURST PATTERN 1 Cirw_ B Result Summary Phase Err RMS Carrier Freq Err Gain Imbalance Quadrature Err Amplitude Droop Start 76 sym C Mag CapBuf Spectrum VSA Ref Level 0 00 dBm Std EDGE 16QAM SR 270 833 kHz m t el Att 20 0 dB Freq 1 0GHz Res Len 300 SGL ResRange Count 0 BURST PATTERN A EVM el Clrw Phase Err RMS Carrier Freq Err Gain Imbalance Quadrature Err Amplitude Droop Start 76 sym C Mag CapBuf 20 dBm 40 dBm 60 dBm Start 0 sym Fig 6 13 Solution Result Summary
55. y Axis Min Value on page 119 CALCulate lt n gt STATistics SCALe Y UNIT lt Unit gt This command defines the scaling type of the y axis Suffix lt n gt selects the screen Parameters lt Unit gt PCT ABS RST ABS Example CALC STAT SCAL Y UNIT PCT Sets the percentage scale Manual operation See y Unit Abs on page 119 CALCulate lt n gt STATistics SCALe Y UPPer Value This command defines the upper limit for the y axis of the diagram in statistical mea surements Since probabilities are specified on the y axis the entered numeric values are dimensionless Suffix lt n gt irrelevant Parameters lt Value gt 1E 8 to 1 0 RST 1 0 Example CALC STAT SCAL Y UPP 0 01 Manual operation See y Axis Max Value on page 119 CALCulate subsystem CALCulate lt n gt TRACe lt t gt ADJust ALIGnment OFFSet FitOffset This command shifts the display range relative to the reference time by the number of given symbols The resolution is 1 symbol A value gt 0 results in a shift towards the right and a value lt 0 results in a shift towards the left Suffix lt n gt 1 4 irrelevant lt t gt 1 6 irrelevant Setting parameters lt FitOffset gt numeric value Range 8000 to 8000 RST 0 Default unit SYM Example CALC TRAC ADJ ALIG OFFS 5 The display range is shifted by 5 symbols towards the right Mode VSA Manual operation See Offset on page 172 CALCulate lt n gt TRACe lt t gt ADJust
56. 1 to 15 RST 1 Default unit NONE Mode VSA Manual operation See FSK Ref Deviation on page 150 CALCulate subsystem CALCulate lt n gt FSK DEViation REFerence VALue lt FSKRefDevAbsResult gt This command sets the absolute reference value of the frequency deviation for FSK modulation Suffix lt n gt 1 4 Setting parameters lt FSKRefDevAbsResuhtumeric value Range The range depends on the symbol rate and has to be between 0 1 to 15 times the symbol rate RST 100e3 Default unit Hz Mode VSA Manual operation See FSK Ref Deviation on page 150 CALCulate lt n gt STATistics CCDF STATe lt AddEvaluation gt This command switches the calculation of the statistical distribution of magnitude phase or frequency values on or off Suffix lt n gt 1 4 Setting parameters lt AddEvaluation gt ON OFF RST OFF Example CALC STAT CCDF ON Switches the statistic measurements on Mode VSA Manual operation See Result Type Transformation on page 183 CALCulate lt n gt STATistics MODE lt StatisticMode gt This command defines whether only the symbol points or all points are considered for the statistical calculations Suffix lt n gt 1 4 Setting parameters lt StatisticMode gt SONLy INFinite SONLy Symbol points only INFinite All points are used RST SONLy CALCulate subsystem Example CALC1 STAT MODE SONL Mode VSA Manual operation See Oversampling on page 1
57. 270 833 kHz Att 10 dB Freq 15 0 GHz Bos Lon 148 Input SGL Count 200 200 M1 1 Ih i tt Start 0 0 sym EN im 0 E C Mag CapBuf KE VUN Sg Se Start 0 0 sym Fig 3 25 Coupled markers in screens A B and D Remote command CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt LINK on page 238 Link Mkr1 and Delta1 The delta marker 1 is linked to marker 1 so if the x axis value of the marker 1 is changed the delta marker 1 will follow on the same x position The link is off by default You can set the two markers on different traces to measure the difference e g between a max hold trace and a min hold trace or between a measurement and a ref erence trace Remote command CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt LINK on page 212 Marker to Trace Opens an edit dialog box to enter the number of the trace on which the marker is to be placed Remote command CALCulate n MARKer m TRACe on page 243 3 2 10 Softkeys and Menu Overview for Vector Signal Analysis R amp S FSV K70 All Marker Off Switches all markers off It also switches off all functions and displays that are associ ated with the markers delta markers Remote command CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt AOFF on page 226 Softkeys of the Marker To Menu R amp S FSV K70 The MARKER gt key displays the Marker To menu which contains the following soft keys Select 1 2 TE 136 Select Mkr and TEE 136 wi LEE 136 L Move
58. 3 125 MHz Using this sample rate the resulting UO data bandwidth can be determined from the figure Relation between maximum usable bandwidth and sample rate RF input in the base unit description section Working with UO data for RF input operation or the figure Bandwidths depending on sample rate for active digital input in the description of the Digital Baseband interface R amp S FSV option B17 The sample rate and the usable I Q bandwidth achieved for the current settings is dis played in the I Q Capture Settings dialog see Q Capture on page 157 2 2 20 Bandwidth Extension Option R amp S FSV B160 The bandwidth extension option R amp S FSV B160 provides additional hardware which makes a maximum usable UO bandwidth of 160 MHz possible As opposed to the R amp S FSV base unit the R amp S FSV K70 application uses a software resampler which allows for a maximum sample rate up to 1 28 GHz R amp S FSV K70 Brief Description of Vector Signal Analysis 2 2 2 1 2 2 3 d Usage of the optional hardware can be deactivated if necessary for example to reduce possible spurious effects Restrictions The optional bandwidth extension R amp S FSV B160 can not be activated if any of the fol lowing conditions apply e R amp S FSV firmware versions previous to 2 0 R amp S FSV models 1307 9002Kx e For center frequencies larger than 7 GHz e For sample rates lt 32 MHz e With any trigger except for
59. 5 Trace 6 Overwrite mode the trace is overwritten by each sweep This is the default setting Remote command DISP TRAC MODE WRIT see DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt MODE on page 259 Max Hold Trace 1 Trace 2 Trace 3 Trace 4 Trace 5 Trace 6 The maximum value is determined over several sweeps and displayed The R amp S FSV saves the sweep result in the trace memory only if the new value is greater than the previous one Softkeys and Menu Overview for Vector Signal Analysis R amp S FSV K70 This mode is especially useful with modulated or pulsed signals The signal spectrum is filled up upon each sweep until all signal components are detected in a kind of enve lope This mode is not available for statistics measurements Remote command DISP TRAC MODE MAXH see DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt MODE on page 259 Min Hold Trace 1 Trace 2 Trace 3 Trace 4 Trace 5 Trace 6 The minimum value is determined from several measurements and displayed The R amp S FSV saves the smallest of the previously stored currently measured values in the trace memory This mode is useful e g for making an unmodulated carrier in a composite signal visi ble Noise interference signals or modulated signals are suppressed whereas a CW signal is recognized by its constant level This mode is not available for statistics measurements Remote command DISP TRAC MODE MINH see DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt MO
60. 58 Table 3 2 Results calculated over the estimation range PSK MSK QAM FSK Carrier Frequency Error FSK Deviation Error UO Offset FSK Measurement Deviation UO Imbalance Carrier Frequency Error Gain Imbalance Carrier Frequency Drift Quadrature Error Amplitude Droop Current value In the Current column the value evaluation for the current evaluation is displayed For example the EVM Peak value in the current sweep corresponds to the peak of the trace values within the evaluation range for the current sweep as indicated by marker 1 in figure 3 18 Measurement Result Display Ref Level 10 00 dBm Std GSM_NormalBurst SR 270 833 kHz Att 10 dB Freq 1 0GHz Res Len 148 Input RF SGL BURST PATTERN 1 12 E 0 21 Peak 0 60 E 28 82 Rho 0 999983 0 999983 0 000000 iQ Offset 95 68 95 68 95 0 00 i 0 01 0 01 0 00 0 03 0 03 0 00 0 000428 0 000428 0 000428 0 000000 31 13 31 13 31 13 0 00 e 1 Cirw M1 1 1 119 60 500 sy Stop 148 sym Fig 3 18 Example for result summary with current EVM peak value marked If you want to compare the trace values to the results of the Result Summary make sure to match the displayed points per symbol of the trace and of the Result Summary Refer to Display Points Sym on page 184 for details Mean value In the Mean column the linear mean of the values that are in the Current colum
61. AEE TT 133 Demos Measure xe cet o dee xo ee ec ge eee dod 133 Display eoi 134 Settings Overview Displays the main settings overview that visualizes the data flow of the Vector Signal Analyzer and summarizes the current settings In addition the Settings Overview dia log box provides access to the individual settings dialog boxes and allows you to restore default values For details on configuring the measurement and a description of the individual dialog boxes see chapter 3 3 1 Settings Overview on page 146 Modulation Signal Description Opens the Modulation Signal Description dialog box The signal description of the expected input signal determines the available configura tion settings and the available burst or pattern settings You can define a pattern to which the result range can be aligned see Pattern on page 152 A schematic preview of the current signal description is displayed in the preview area at the bottom of the dialog box The preview area is not editable directly The Modulation tab contains modulation and Transmit filter settings A live preview of the Constellation UO trace using the currently defined settings is displayed at the bot tom of the dialog box to visualize the changes to the settings For details on the available settings see Modulation on page 148 and Signal Description on page 151 Frontend Displays the Frontend tab of the Frontend A I Q Captu
62. Analysis R amp S FSV K70 3 2 6 Softkeys of the Trace Menu R amp S FSV K70 The TRACE key displays the Trace menu which contains the following softkeys Context sensitive menus for traces Traces have context sensitive menus If you right click on a trace in the display or a trace setting in the information channel bar or touch it for about 1 second a menu is displayed which corresponds to the softkey functions available for traces Trace 1 Trace Zifrace ifraceAifracebhilracep 126 BS EE 126 L Max Hold 126 US ood EE 127 t oco MR 127 Mr TEE 127 ED NON NK 127 L Evaluation deefe iesse eieiei 128 Tace VVIZ ONO EE 128 Meee Ek acacia ir eto ortu Gr nS en 128 L E EE 129 L Preset All Trace 129 L Select LAE AU TE 129 L Select Max ClrWrite Mim 129 ASCI Trace EE 129 Trace 1 Trace 2 Trace 3 Trace 4 Trace 5 Trace 6 Selects the active trace 1 2 3 4 5 6 and opens the Trace Mode submenu for the selected trace The default setting is trace 1 in the overwrite mode the other traces are switched off Blank mode Not all measurement functions support all 6 traces For details see chapter 3 4 1 Trace Mode Overview on page 205 Tip To configure several traces in one step press the Trace Wizard softkey to open a trace configuration dialog See also Trace Wizard on page 128 Remote command DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt STATe on page 260 Clear Write Trace 1 Trace 2 Trace 3 Trace 4 Trace
63. B17 Remote command INPut COUPling on page 272 Digital IQ Info Displays a dialog box with information on the digital UO input and output connection via the optional R amp S Digital UO Interface R amp S FSV B17 if available The information includes e Device identification Used port e Maximum digital input output sample rates and maximum digital input output transfer rates e Status of the connection protocol Status of the PRBS descewing test Digital Baseband Info Digital IQ Input Connected Device SMU200A Serial Number 103634 Port Out A Digital Input Sample Rate 100 MHz Max Digital Input Transfer Rate 100 MHz Connection Protocol Passed PRBS Test Descewing Passed Digital IQ Output Connected Device ExBox Serial Number 100064 Port IQ IN Max Digital Output Transfer Rate 110 MHz Connection Protocol Passed PRBS Test Descewing Done For details see Interface Status Information in Instrument Functions R amp S Digital UO Interface Option R amp S FSV B17 in the description of the base unit Remote command INPut DIQ CDEVice on page 272 3 2 13 Softkeys of the Save Recall Menu R amp S FSV K70 The Save Recall menu contains the same functions as for the base unit except for the Export submenu 3 2 14 Softkeys and Menu Overview for Vector Signal Analysis R amp S FSV K70 hr 145 M EEN 145 L RES SUPPO eet ere 145 Export Opens a dialog box to configure e
64. CAL Culate nzM Abkercm MAXimumf PDEAK nnne 240 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MINim mM LEET 241 CAL Culate nz M Abkermz MiNimumNENT esent nn nn nnn aas s nnns 241 CALOCulate n MARKer m MlNimum PEAK eee 241 CAL Culate nz M bker mmz MiNimum RI 242 CAL Gulate lt ne MARKerem SEARGH tii teneri ccna reste veccdsveteccadeease tected Ki a adna EiS 242 CALCulate n MARKer m STATe essent nh nene en nens 242 CAL Culate nz M bkercmz TR ACe esten tsssasssst ii asse sitis sa sense ins 243 e DEL e E 243 CAL Culate nzM Abkercm XS lMitslGTaATel sse 244 CAL Culate nz M Abkercmz XZ SGLIMeLEFT eene nn senten 244 GAL Culatesn MARKersm X SLIMits RIGFIT 1 rdc e ceruice ex one at ENN 245 CAL Culate nz M AbkercmzX GL lMits Z0O0OM nenne ennt nasse ense 245 GALOulate n MARKersmo Y EE 245 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt AOFF This command all markers off including delta markers and marker measurement func tions Suffix lt n gt Selects the measurement window lt m gt depends on mode irrelevant Example CALC MARK AOFF Switches off all markers Usage Event Manual operation See All Marker Off on page 136 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion DDEMod STATistic ADRoop lt type gt This command queries the results of the amplitude droop error measurement per formed for digital demodulation The output values are the same as
65. CDEVice This command queries the current configuration and the status of the digital baseband output to the optional R amp S Digital UO Interface option R amp S FSV B17 For details see the R amp S Digital UO Interface description for the base unit Return values lt ConnState gt lt DeviceName gt lt SerialNumber gt lt PortName gt lt NotUsed gt lt MaxTransferRate gt lt ConnProtState gt lt PRBSTestState gt lt NotUsed gt lt Placeholder gt Example Mode Defines whether a device is connected or not 0 No device is connected 1 A device is connected Device ID of the connected device Serial number of the connected device Port name used by the connected device to be ignored Maximum data transfer rate of the connected device in Hz State of the connection protocol which is used to identify the connected device Not Started Has to be Started Started Passed Failed Done State of the PRBS test Not Started Has to be Started Started Passed Failed Done to be ignored for future use currently 0 OUTP DIQ CDEV Result 1 SMU200A 103634 0Out A 70000000 100000000 Passed Not Started 0 0 IQ VSA SENSe subsystem 4 11 SENSe subsystem SENSe ADJust CONFiguration HYSTeresis LOWer sess 283 SENSe ADJust CONFiguration HYSTeresis UPPer cies 283 SENSe ADJustCONFigure LEVel DUIR amp HOR cuia oc ett rtr nter ener anaia 283
66. Constellation diagram for 4AFSK NATURAL including the logical symbol mapping Symbol Numbers hee 1 3 1 3 Fig 2 25 Constellation diagram for 4FSK GRAY including the logical symbol mapping Symbol Numbers he 1 3 Fig 2 26 Constellation diagram for 4FSK for APCO C4FM and APCO Phase 2 including the logical symbol mapping Symbol Mapping 8FSK NATURAL Symbol Numbers Fig 2 27 Constellation diagram for 8FSK NATURAL including the logical symbol mapping 2 3 7 Minimum Shift Keying MSK MSK modulation causes modulation dependent phase shifts of 90 which can be shown in an Constellation UO diagram As with PSK demodulation is performed by evaluation of the phase positions Table 2 14 MSK NATURAL Logical symbol mapping Modulation symbol binary indication MSB LSB 0 1 Phase shift 90 90 Table 2 15 MSK GSM Logical symbol mapping Modulation symbol binary indication MSB LSB 0 1 Phase shift 90 90 2 3 8 d Symbol Mapping Fig 2 28 MSK for GSM and NATURAL and DMSK Constellation Diagram including the symbol map ping Similar to PSK differential coding can also be used with MSK In this case too the information is represented by the transition of two consecutive symbols The block dia gram of the coder is shown below Fig 2 29 DMSK differential encoder in the transmitter d input symbol 0 1 of dif
67. DBPSK NATURAL Logical symbol mapping Modulation symbol binary indica 000 001 010 011 100 101 110 111 tion MSB LSB Phase shift 0 45 90 135 180 225 270 315 Table 2 7 D8PSK GRAY Logical symbol mapping Modulation symbol binary indica 000 001 010 011 100 101 110 111 tion MSB LSB Phase shift 0 45 135 90 270 315 225 180 Table 2 8 D8PSK VDL Logical symbol mapping Modulation symbol binary indica 000 001 010 011 100 101 110 111 tion MSB LSB Phase shift 0 45 135 90 315 270 180 225 Rotating Differential PSK Modulation Phase differential modulation is frequently combined with an additional phase shift e g 1 4 DQPSK id phase shift modulation differential modulated 4PSK The logical mapping diagram corresponds to the diagram for DPSK The physical constellation diagram shows the symbol decision points obtained after ISI free demodulation Symbol Mapping Fig 2 21 Constellation diagram for 77 4 DQPSK including the symbol mapping for APCO25 Phase 2 NADC NATURAL PDC PHS TETRA and TFTS the 77 4 rotation is already compensa ted for Table 2 9 7 4 DQPSK NADC PDC PHS TETRA Logical symbol mapping Modulation symbol binary indication MSB LSB 00 01 10 11 Phase shift 0 45 90 45 90 45 18
68. Duration This command defines the duration of the level measurement used to determine the optimal reference level automatically for SENS ADJ LEV ON Parameters Duration numeric value in seconds Range 0 001 to 16000 0 RST 0 001 Default unit s Example ADJ CONF LEV DUR 5 Manual operation See Meas Time Manual on page 123 SENSe subsystem SENSe ADJust CONFigure LEVel DURation MODE Mode This command selects the way the R amp S FSV determines the length of the measure ment that is performed while determining the ideal reference level Parameters Mode AUTO Automatically determines the measurement length MANual Manual definition of the measurement length RST AUTO Example ADJ CONF LEV DUR MODE MAN Specifies manual definition of the measurement duration ADJ CONF LEV DUR 5 Specifies the duration manually SENSe ADJust LEVel This command initiates automatic setting of the RF attenuation to the level of the applied signal Note The following command must be synchronized to the end of the autorange proc ess using WAI OPC oder OPC because otherwise the autorange process will be stopped Example ADJ LEV Adjusts the reference level to the current measurement Usage Event Mode VSA Manual operation See Auto Level on page 122 SENSe DDEMod ECALc OFFSet lt EVMOffsetState gt The command activates and deactivates an offset for the calculation of
69. EVENt sees 319 STATus QUEStionable MODulation n CONDition sees ener 318 STATus QUEStionable MODulation n ENABle eicere eene eene nnne nennt EENEN 318 STATus QUESti nable MOD lationsn gt NTRANS ON enne 319 STATus QUEStionable MODulation n PTRansition iaaiiai 319 STATus QUEStionable MODulation lt n gt EVENt STATus QUEStionable SYNG CONDIIOFST atur erro e E dee rennen E nas 322 GEM el TEE SYNC TEE 322 STATus QUEStionable SYNO NT Ransition urat npe tnter rede bx Pes pues keep E de pee peg 322 STATus QUEStionable S YNC P TRaltisitiOh caer ona yere potete cen p pc eto gel dee 323 STAT s QUEStionable S deM CU KEE 323 STATUS QUEStonable EVE ING RE 317 SYSTem DISPlay UPDate dE e e EIER KEEN Re e TE E TRAGesnP DATA EE TRIGger lt n gt SEQuence BBPower HOLDoft TRiGger lt n gt SEQuence HOLDOoff TIME TRIGger n SEQuence IFPower HODLBoft e ttti ntt t trennen e eene eee TRIGger n SEQuerice IFPower HYS Teresis 1t tri tnter t etnia 328 TRiGger n gt ESEQuence MEV el E E 326 TRiGgersn SEQuence LEVel IF POWs icc pao hne eph nonet eo ee p abe eh PERS 327 RTE EE ele Re E TRIGger lt n gt SEQuence SOURce Index A Activating the OptlOM E 73 Adjust Settings SOTKOV irse quee E Rl ve Ua 119 Alignment IseSult range iuseccscosci eec draps epu eg Eee iis 172 Alpha BT
70. Evaluation Range x Evaluation Range Evaluation Range E Entire Result Range O sym 148 sym Start Stop 89 75 sym Length 87 0 sym 321 231 us Visualization Entire Result Range If enabled the entire result range is evaluated Remote command CALCulate lt n gt ELIN lt startstop gt STATe on page 248 Start Defines the symbol in the result range at which evaluation is started The start symbol itself is included in the evaluation range Note Note that the start value is defined with respect to the x axis including an optional offset defined via the Symbol Number at Reference start parameter Remote command CALCulate lt n gt ELIN lt startstop gt VALue on page 248 R amp S FSV K70 Instrument Functions for Vector Signal Analysis 3 3 1 5 Stop Defines the symbol in the result range at which evaluation is stopped The stop symbol itself is included in the evaluation range Note Note that the stop value is defined with respect to the x axis including an optional offset defined via the Symbol Number at Reference start parameter Remote command CALCulate lt n gt ELIN lt startstop gt VALue on page 248 Demodulation and Measurement Filter Settings You configure the demodulation and measurement filter settings in the Demodulation amp Measurement Filter dialog box This dialog box contains the following tabs e Demodulation on page 174 e Measurement Filter on
71. MSK demodulation on DDEM MSK FORM TYPE2 Switches DMSK demodulation on Mode VSA Manual operation See Modulation Order on page 149 SENSe DDEMod NORMalize ADRoop lt CompAmptDroop gt This command switches the compensation of the amplitude droop on or off Setting parameters lt CompAmptDroop gt ON OFF RST ON Example DDEM NORM ADR ON Switches the compensation on Mode VSA Manual operation See Compensate for on page 175 SENSe subsystem SENSe DDEMod NORMalize CFDRift lt CarrierFreqDrift gt This command activates or deactivates compensation of the carrier frequency drift Setting parameters lt CarrierFreqDrift gt ON OFF RST OFF Mode VSA Manual operation See Compensate for on page 175 SENSe DDEMod NORMalize FDERror lt RefDevCompensation gt This command selects the method for calculating the frequency error if you are using FSK modulation Setting parameters lt RefDevCompensatioiON OFF ON Scales the reference signal to the current deviation of the mea surement signal OFF Uses the nominal deviation you have set for the reference signal RST ON Mode VSA Manual operation See Compensate for on page 175 SENSe DDEMod NORMalize IQIMbalance lt ComplQImbalance gt This command switches the compensation of the IQ imbalance on or off Setting parameters lt ComplQImbalance gt ON OFF RST OFF Example DDEM NORM IQIM OFF Switches the com
72. Marker e 136 el UR E 137 L Search Direchon entente netten tens 137 L Marker Real Marker Immens dott e x etd b dd 137 L Search Limits tette tette ntn 137 os i AAE AAEE AAN NTC RE 137 Next GE 137 Max Peak REMIS 137 ue MTM 138 Mar em 138 Select 1 2 3 4 A Selects the normal marker or the delta marker and activates the marker A stands for delta marker 1 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt STATe on page 242 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt X on page 243 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt Y on page 245 Select Mkr and Trace Opens the Select Marker and Trace tab of the Marker To Settings dialog box Marker Select Mkr and Trace Enables and defines the setting for the individual markers The marker value is defined in the x axis unit The selected marker can be moved to a specific trace using the Move Marker to Trace function Remote command CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt STATe on page 242 Move Marker to Trace Select Mkr and Trace Moves the marker selected under Marker to the trace selected here The marker changes to the selected trace but remains on the previous symbol Remote command CALCulate n MARKer m TRACe on page 243 Softkeys and Menu Overview for Vector Signal Analysis R amp S FSV K70 Search Settings Opens the Search Settings tab of the Marker To Settings dialog box Search Direction Search Settings Defines whether the absolute values are searche
73. R amp S FSV K70 on page 113 SCPI command 1NSTrument SELect on page 277 Menu and Softkey Description Apart from the Span Bandwidth and Marker Functions menus which are not available in the VSA mode all menus not mentioned below are provided as descri bed for the base unit The MEAS key opens a submenu identical to the VSA menu and additionally dis plays the chapter 3 3 1 6 Display Configuration on page 180 dialog box when pressed Measurement Result Display Various different result displays for VSA measurements are available The different dis play types are described in chapter 3 1 Measurement Result Display on page 74 Importing and Exporting UO Data As of firmware version 1 60 UO data can be imported from a file for processing in R amp S FSV K70 and captured UO data can be stored to a file IQ Import IQ Export softkeys in the Save Rcl menu For details see the base unit description Further Information chapter 3 4 1 Trace Mode Overview on page 205 chapter 3 4 2 ASCII File Export Format for VSA Data on page 206 3 1 Measurement Result Display eeesseeeeeeeeeneenen nnne nnne nnns 74 dE TRESUIETY POS i 76 3 1 2 Normal Time Symbol Dieplavs nnns 102 3 1 3 Spectral Display 103 3 1 4 Statistical Displavs ennemi n nennen nnns 106 3 1 5 Displayed Measurement Gettings 108 3 1 6 3 1 7 3 2 3 2 1
74. RST 3 dB Example TRIG SOUR IFP Sets the IF power trigger source TRIG IFP HYST 10DB Sets the hysteresis limit value Manual operation See Trigger Hysteresis on page 162 TRIGger lt n gt SEQuence HOLDoff TIME Delay This command defines the length of the trigger delay A negative delay time pretrigger can be set in zero span only Suffix n irrelevant Parameters Delay Range zero span sweeptime see data sheet to 30 s span 0 to 30 s RST 0s Example TRIG HOLD 500us Manual operation See Trigger Offset on page 131 TRIGger lt n gt SEQuence SLOPe Type This command selects the slope of the trigger signal The selected trigger slope applies to all trigger signal sources Suffix n irrelevant Parameters Type POSitive NEGative RST POSitive TRIGger subsystem Example TRIG SLOP NEG Manual operation See Trigger Polarity on page 131 ee TRIGger lt n gt SEQuence SOURce Source This command selects the trigger source IF power and RF power triggers are not available together with the bandwidth exten sion option R amp S FSV B160 For details on trigger modes refer to the Trg Gate Source softkey in the base unit description Suffix lt n gt irrelevant Parameters lt Source gt IMMediate Free Run EXTern External trigger IFPower Power trigger at the second intermediate frequency BBPower
75. aha LA im ty ly Ver itch cata Yt WT UU E AMI A pp ee l Start O sym Stop 148 sym Fig 3 30 Statistics measurement Screen C measured signal symbols highlighted Screen A sta tistics for all trace points Screen B statistics for symbol instants only Symbols only Statistics are calculated for symbol instants only See screen B in Statistics measurement Screen C measured signal symbols highlighted Screen A statistics for all trace points Screen B statistics for symbol instants only Infinite Statistics are calculated for all trace points symbol instants and inter mediate times See screen A in Statistics measurement Screen C measured signal symbols highlighted Screen A statistics for all trace points Screen B statistics for symbol instants only auto currently not used Remote command CALCulate lt n gt STATistics MODE on page 252 Predefined You can store and load predefined screen configurations All available configurations are displayed in the Predefined tab The current screen configuration is indicated under Current at the top of the list Configuring VSA measurements Display Configuration x A MagRel Meas amp Ref B Result Summary C Mag CapBuf D Symbol Table FSK typical configuration A Freq Error Rel B Result Summary C Mag CapBuf D FreqCons Meas amp Ref MSK typical configuration A Phase Error B Result Summary C Mag CapBuf D Freq Error Rel PSK QAM typical
76. all Manual operation See RF Atten Manual Mech Att Manual on page 120 See RF Attenuation on page 156 INPut ATTenuation AUTO State This command automatically couples the input attenuation to the reference level state ON or switches the input attenuation to manual entry state OFF This function is not available if the R amp S Digital I Q Interface R amp S FSV B17 is active INPut Subsystem Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST ON Example INP ATT AUTO ON Couples the attenuation set on the attenuator to the reference level Manual operation See RF Atten Auto Mech Att Auto on page 121 See Attenuation Mode on page 156 INPut COUPling lt CouplingType gt Toggles the RF input of the R amp S FSV between AC and DC coupling This function is not available if the R amp S Digital UO Interface R amp S FSV B17 is active Parameters lt CouplingType gt AC DC RST AC Example INP COUP DC Manual operation See Input AC DC on page 122 See Input Coupling on page 156 INPut DIQ CDEVice This command queries the current configuration and the status of the digital baseband input from the optional R amp S Digital UO Interface option R amp S FSV B17 For details see the section Interface Status Information for the R amp S Digital UO Inter face R amp S FSV B17 in the description of the base unit Return values lt ConnState gt Defines whether a device is connected or not 0 No device is connected
77. an external trigger Demodulation Bandwidth Measurement Bandwidth Some modulation systems do not use a receive filter In these cases special care should be taken that no interference or adjacent channels occur within the demodula tion bandwidth The Capture Oversampling parameter should be set to a low value see Capture Oversampling on page 159 Typical communication systems demand special receive or measurement filters e g root raised cosine receive filter or EDGE measurement filter If no such filtering is performed care should be taken that neither interfering signals nor adjacent channels fall within the demodulation bandwidth 2 2 4 Operating Manual 1176 7578 02 05 15 Modulation and Demodulation Filters Sample points are required for demodulation in the analyzer where only information of the current symbol and none of neighbouring symbols is present symbol points These points are also called ISI free points ISI intersymbol interference If the trans mitter does not provide an ISI free signal after the transmit filter TX filter this condi tion can be fulfilled by signal specific filtering of the analyzer input signal receive filter or Rx filter If an RRC root raised cosine filter is used in the transmitter an RRC fil ter is also required in the analyzer to obtain ISI free points In many PSK systems RRC filters are used as transmit ISI and measurement filters To determine the I Q modulation
78. analyzer EDGE Wide Pulse Shape EDGE HSR Wide standard specific filter filter combina Pulse tion with ISI User Low ISI Meas Filter filter combination with low ISI Typical combinations of Tx and Meas filters are shown in the table above they can be set in the R amp S FSV using Meas filter AUTO see Auto on page 179 If RC raised cosine RRC root raised cosine and Gaussian filters are used the Alpha RC RRC filters or BT Gaussian filters parameters must be set in addition to the fil ter characteristic roll off factor Typically the Alpha BT value of the measurement filter should be the same as that of the transmission filter For FSK the measurement filter filters the instantaneous frequency of the signal not the UO signal For MSK the measurement filter filters the and Q parts of the measurement signal and the reference signal i e not the instantaneous frequency or magnitude of the MSK signal Transmit filters The transmit filters required for common standards are provided by the R amp S FSV K70 Table 2 3 Overview of predefined Transmit filters RC Raised cosine RRC Root raised cosine Gauss Gauss filter GMSK Gauss filter convolved with a rectangular filter typically used for MSK Linearized GMSK Standard specific filter for GSM EDGE 3GPP TS 45 004 normal symbol rate EDGE Narrow Pulse Shape Standard specific filter for GSM EDGE higher symbol
79. and Settings on page 42 To load predefined settings files 1 In the VSA gt Digital Standards menu select Load Standard 2 In the file selection dialog box select the standard whose settings you want to load To change the path press the arrow icons at the right end of the Path field and select the required folder from the file system 3 Configuring VSA measurements Press the Select button The dialog box is closed and the instrument is adjusted to the stored settings for the selected standard To store settings as a standard file This task can also be performed by remote control see SENSe DDEMod STANdard SAVE on page 311 Configure the measurement as required See Settings Overview for help In the VSA gt Digital Standards menu select Save As Standard In the File Name field enter the name of the standard for which you want to store settings To change the path press the arrow icons at the right end of the Path field and select the required folder from the file system To insert a new folder click the New Folder softkey and enter a name in the New Folder dialog box Press the Save button The dialog box is closed and the current measurement settings are stored ina standard file To delete standard files 1 In the Digital Standards file selection dialog box select the standard whose set tings file you want to delete Standards predefined by Rohde amp Schwar
80. configuration NEM LD Result Summary D 1 Q Const Meas amp Ref B Spec RealImag CapBuf C Result Summary D I Q Const Meas amp Ref Add Opens an edit dialog box to enter a name for the current screen configuration The configuration is then stored and added to the list Apply Applies the currently selected configuration from the list to the current display Remove Removes the currently selected configuration from the list Restore Restores the default Display Configuration Existing settings with the default names are replaced 3 3 2 Defining the Result Range You can define which part of the source signal is analyzed Result Range with refer ence to the captured data a found burst or a found pattern You configure the result range and evaluation range settings in the Result Range and Evaluation Range dialog box in the Settings Overview see also chapter 3 3 1 4 Result Range and Evaluation Range Settings on page 170 Configuring VSA measurements 1 Define the Result Length i e the number of symbols from the result that are to be analyzed see Result Length on page 171 Note that when you use Known Data files as a reference the Result Length specified here must be identical to the length of the specified symbol sequences in the xml file lt ResultLength gt element See chapter 3 3 7 1 Dependencies and Restrictions when Using Known Data on page 199 2 Define the Reference for the
81. considered for the following display types eye diagrams constellation diagrams modulation accuracy e statistic displays spectrum displays Suffix lt n gt 1 4 lt startstop gt 1 2 Irrelevant Setting parameters lt Auto gt ON OFF ON The evaluation range extends from the start value defined by CALC ELIN1 VAL to the stop value defined by CALC ELIN2 VAL see CALCulate lt n gt ELIN lt startstop gt VALue on page 248 OFF The complete result area is evaluated RST OFF Mode VSA Manual operation See Entire Result Range on page 173 CALCulate lt n gt ELIN lt startstop gt VALue lt LeftDisp gt Defines the start and stop values for the evaluation range see CALCulate lt n gt ELIN startstop STATe on page 248 Suffix n 1 4 lt startstop gt 1 2 1 start value 2 stop value Setting parameters lt LeftDisp gt numeric value Range 0 to 1000000 RST 0 Default unit SYM CALCulate subsystem Mode VSA Manual operation See Start on page 173 See Stop on page 174 CALCulate lt n gt FEED lt Feed gt Selects the signal source to be displayed Suffix lt n gt 1 4 Setting parameters lt Feed gt XTIM DDEM MEAS XTIM DDEM REF XTIM DDEM ERR MPH XTIM DDEM ERR VECT XTIM DDEM MACC XTIM DDEM SYMB TCAP XTIM DDEM MEAS Measured signal XTIM DDEM REF Reference signal XTIM DDEM ERR VECT Error vecto
82. current value Usage Event Manual operation See Search Direction on page 137 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MAXimum PEAK This command positions the marker on the current trace maximum The corresponding marker is activated first or switched to the marker mode If no maximum value is found on the trace level spacing to adjacent values lt peak excursion an execution error error code 200 is produced Suffix lt n gt Selects the measurement window lt m gt depends on mode Selects the marker Example CALC MARK2 MAX Positions marker 2 to the maximum value of the trace Usage Event Manual operation See Search Direction on page 137 See Peak on page 137 CALCulate subsystem CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MINimum LEFT This command positions a marker to the next higher trace minimum on the left of the current value i e in descending X direction If no next higher minimum value is found on the trace level spacing to adjacent values lt peak excursion an execution error error code 200 is produced Suffix lt n gt Selects the measurement window lt m gt Selects the marker Example CALC MARK2 MIN Positions marker 2 to the minimum value of the trace CALC MARK2 MIN LEFT Positions marker 2 to the next higher minimum value to the left of the current value Usage Event CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MINimum NEXT This command positions ae marker to the next higher trace m
83. displayed when you press the Config ModAcc Limits softkey in the Lines menu see Config ModAcc Limits on page 138 To define a limit check 1 Configure a measurement with Modulation Accuracy as the Source in the Dis play Config dialog box 2 Press the LINES key on the front panel 3 Press the Config ModAcc Limits softkey in the Limits menu 4 n the Current tab define limits that the current value should not exceed for any or all of the result types Note the limits for the current value are automatically also defined for the peak value and vice versa However the limit check can be activated individually for cur rent or peak values 5 Select the Check option for each result type to be included in the limit check 6 If necessary define limits and activate the limit check for the mean values of the different result types on the Mean tab 7 f necessary activate the limit check for the peak values of the different result types on the Peak tab 8 Toreset the limits to their default values press Set to Default E EE OO Q Operating Manual 1176 7578 02 05 204 Further Information 9 Select the Limit Checking On option or press the ModAcc Limits On softkey in the Limits menu The limit check is performed immediately on the current modulation accuracy mea surement results and fo
84. e Result Range on page 170 Evaluation Range on page 173 Result Range The Result Range tab contains the settings for the result range The result range determines which part of the capture buffer burst or pattern is displayed For more information see chapter 3 3 2 Defining the Result Range on page 186 Configuring VSA measurements A preview of the result display with the current settings is displayed in the visualization area at the bottom of the dialog box The Result Range tab is also displayed when you select the Range Settings softkey in the Meas Config menu see Range Settings on page 133 Result Range Length Result Length 601 846 us Result Range Alignment Reference C Capture CH Burst E Pattern Alignment C Left Center C Right Offset Symbol No Reference Visualization Fig 3 28 Result Range Alignment Rasuk Longi eec 171 EEE E 172 a re DT 172 HEEN geet ageseent Se 172 Symbol Number at lt Reference gt start 172 Result Length Defines the number of symbols that are to be demodulated All traces over time are displayed over the result range For example if you have a burst of 100 symbols and you define the result length as 200 symbols you can examine the burst ramps in detail by selecting the alignment Burst Center The maximum result length depends on the CPU board indicated in SETUP gt Sys
85. error values over several sweeps TPE Maximum frequency error over all symbols over several sweeps PSD Standard deviation of maximum frequency error values over several sweeps PPCT 95 percentile of maximum RMS values over several sweeps RST PEAK Query only VSA CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion DDEMod STATistic FSK MDEViation lt type gt This command queries the results of the measurement deviation of FSK modulated signals Suffix lt n gt lt m gt 1 4 screen number 1 4 irrelevant CALCulate subsystem Query parameters lt type gt lt none gt Measurement deviation for current sweep AVG Average FSK measurement deviation RPE Peak FSK measurement deviation SDEV Standard deviation of FSK measurement deviation PCTL 95 percentile value of FSK measurement deviation RST PEAK Usage Query only Mode VSA CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion DDEMod STATistic FSK RDEViation lt type gt This command queries the results of the reference deviation of FSK modulated signals Suffix lt n gt 1 4 screen number lt m gt 1 4 irrelevant Query parameters lt type gt lt none gt Measurement deviation for current sweep AVG Average FSK measurement deviation RPE Peak FSK measurement deviation SDEV Standard deviation of FSK measurement deviation PCTL 95 percentile value of FSK m
86. essere 300 SENSe DDEMod SEARch BURSt GLENgth MINimum e ecce 301 SENSe DDEMod SEARch BURStLENGth MAXimum 1 cesses enne enne 301 SENSe DDEMod SEARch BURSEtLENGth MINimum essere 301 SENSe E DDEMod SEARGB BURSENMOPBE 12 2 22 2230 EE eara T EEA ENN 302 ISENSe E DDEMod SEARCh BURSESKIPIEADBEIBG iat SE ES 302 SENSe DDEMod SEARGh BURSESKIP RISIng 122p cetur erue tea ettet cu Reni Re 302 SENSeE DBEMod SEARGhBURSESTATO eege EEN de iore ee ERE Spr de EPI PP ege 303 SENS6 DDEMod SGEARch BURGCTOLerance nennen nnne nnne 303 IGENSGel DDE Mod GEARch MBUIRSCCAL C A 303 ISENZGelt DDEMod SGEARch DAT Term CONPioure AUTO 304 SENSe DDEMod SEARch PATTern SYNC STATe ences 304 SENSe DDEMod SEARch PATTern SYNC AUTO 02 cceccceeceeee cee ceee tees eren h eher 304 SENSe DDEMod SEARGH SYNGIAUTO uinneanan aiandid iaiia 304 SENS6e DDEMOd SEARCMSYNGC CA TAO EE 305 SENSe DDE Mod SEAR ck SYNC COMMEN AAA 305 SENSe DDEMod SEARCMSYNC COPY veini oce zi cserees ta tea ia aiaiaaeo 306 SENSe DDEMOd SEARCM SYNC DATA EE 306 SENSe DDEMOdJ SEAR CM SYNC DE ete aiiiar 2 2 naa a Ea SN a ar ai 306 SENSe DDEMod SEARch SYNC IQCThreshold esses 307 I SENSe FDDEMod SEARch SYNG MQOBJE cappa citare putei e ripa cone capt Ee a hadaii anarai 307 SENSE DDEMOd SEARCM SYNC NAME icre rn eseu EENS 308
87. filter filters the real part and imaginary part of these signals For FSK the measurement filter filters the instantane ous frequency of these signals The R amp S FSV K70 defines the error signal as the difference between the reference signal and the measurement signal Thus the measurement filter also shapes the spectrum of the error signal which is used to calculate the EVM for example In many applications the measurement filter is the same as the RX filter However unlike the measurement filter the RX filter is not relevant for the measurement but is only required to create the reference signal optimally The RX filter and the Transmit filter are usually chosen such that their combination results in an Inter Symbol Interference ISI free system see figure 2 4 and figure 2 5 Set by user 71 Symbols 4 DUT Transmitter Filters and Bandwidths During Signal Processing Auto Auto Function of TX Filter fct CaptureOV sph oe j symbol rate Symbols bits e Demodulation filter of IQ capture amp symbol with Dp decision IQ Signal REF Signal S H I Correction Parameters w Signal 2 processing correction of t Analyzer estimated as errors Z5 T I Fig 2 4 Measurement filter in the block diagram MSK PSK QAM and UserQAM TX Filter Any QAM Any PSK bits UO perd Map bits to TX Filter instantaneous
88. for the Constel lation UO result display The Constellation Frequency and Vector Frequency result display return one value for each trace point on the y axis e Symbols For the symbol table result diagrams the command returns one value for each number in the table The command always returns the values in the decimal for mat The number of returned values depends on the modulation scheme you have selected e Eye diagram For eye diagrams the command returns one value for each sample The number of returned values is the product of evaluation range length and points per symbol e Result Summary TRACe subsystem For the Result Summary the command returns all values listed in the result table from top to bottom The order of the results is as follows lt result1_current gt lt result1_mean gt lt result1_peak gt lt result1_stddev gt lt result1_95 ile gt result2 current lt result2_mean gt Empty cells in the table return nothing The number of returned values depends on the modulation scheme you have selected PSK MSK and QAM modulation returns 53 values FSK modulation returns 42 values The unit of each value depends on the particular result Suffix lt n gt 1 4 screen number Setting parameters lt Trace gt TRACe1 TRACe2 TRACe3 TRACe4 TRACe5 TRACe6 TRACe1R TRACe1 TRACe2R TRACe21 TRACe3R TRACe3l TRACelQCX TRACelQCY TRACe1 2 3 4 5 6 The complete data from the correspondi
89. for this model is 3 125 MHz capture oversampling 4 lt 1 5625 MHz capture oversampling 8 0 78125 MHz capture oversampling 16 and 0 390625 MHz capture oversam pling 32 A live preview of the signal in the capture buffer with the current settings is displayed in the preview area at the bottom of the dialog box The preview area is not editable directly R amp S FSV K70 Instrument Functions for Vector Signal Analysis BE Frontend amp UO Capture mx I Q Capture Data Capture Settings Capture Ov Sample Rate 15 36 MHz Usable I Q Bandwidth 12 288 MHz Maximum Bandwidth 8 Auto C 40MHz 160 MHz Swap I Q On e off Trigger Settings Trigger Offset 0 0 sym Trigger Level E SENE Trigger Polarity Pos Neg 9 Trigger Hysteresis Trigger Holdoff Trace Mag CapBuf L Start 0 sym Stop 8000 sym Capture leg PN ME 158 Capire le ps S 159 Capture CUversamplmg eene nennen tnnt nenene ene 159 SAMPE MMC ETE 159 Usable VO sr e HT 159 EK s n let Li A DEE 160 A EE 160 Togar Oe GE 160 Tigger e 161 WING GSP EE 162 AVAGO SR POLAT TEE 162 Trigger e KEE 162 WAG GSE TOMA E 162 Capture Length Auto Defines the Capture Length automatically according to the burst and pattern length set tings and the statistics count see Signal Description on page 151 Thus a minimal Capture Length is used which improves performance Remote command SENSe
90. gt Origin offset error for current sweep AVG Average origin offset error over several sweeps RPE Peak origin offset error over several sweeps SDEV Standard deviation of origin offset error PCTL 95 percentile value of origin offset error RST PEAK Usage Query only Mode CALCulate subsystem VSA CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion DDEMod STATistic PERRor lt type gt This command queries the results of the phase error measurement performed for digi tal demodulation Suffix lt n gt lt m gt Query parameters lt type gt Usage Mode 1 4 screen number 1 4 irrelevant lt none gt Phase error in degree AVG RMS phase error value over several sweeps RPE Peak value of phase error over several sweeps SDEV Standard deviation of phase error values over several sweeps PCTL 95 percentile of RMS value over several sweeps PEAK Maximum phase error of current sweep PAVG Average of maximum phase error values over several sweeps TPE Maximum phase error over several sweeps PSD Standard deviation of maximum phase error values over several sweeps PPCT 95 percentile of maximum RMS values over several sweeps RST PEAK Query only VSA CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion DDEMod STATistic QERRor lt type gt This command queries the results of the Quadratur error measurement performed for digital demodulation CALCulate subsystem Suffix lt n gt
91. gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion DDEMod STATistic MERRor type This command queries the results of the magnitude error measurement of digital demodulation Suffix n m Query parameters type Usage Mode 1 4 screen number 1 4 irrelevant lt none gt magnitude error for current sweep AVG Average magnitude error over several sweeps RPE Peak magnitude error over several sweeps SDEV Standard deviation of magnitude error PCTL 95 percentile value of magnitude error RST PEAK Query only VSA CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion DDEMod STATistic MPOWer lt type gt This command queries the results of the power measurement of digital demodulation CALCulate subsystem Suffix lt n gt 1 4 screen number lt m gt 1 4 irrelevant Query parameters lt type gt lt none gt power measurement for current sweep AVG Average of power measurement over several sweeps RPE Peak of power measurement over several sweeps SDEV Standard deviation of power measurement PCTL 95 percentile value of power measurement RST PEAK Usage Query only Mode VSA CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion DDEMod STATistic OOFFset lt type gt This command queries the results of the UO offset measurement performed for digital demodulation Suffix n 1 4 screen number lt m gt 1 4 irrelevant Query parameters lt type gt lt none
92. has failed If burst and pattern search are active the application looks for patterns only within the found bursts Hence in case the burst search fails the pattern search will also fail Solution Try one of the following Make sure the burst search is successful Deactivate the burst search but keep the pattern search active For more information see Message Burst Not Found on page 337 Burst Search on page 163 The offset of the pattern within the burst is incorrectly set It is possible to set a pattern offset to speed up the pattern search The offset of the pattern would be the offset of the pattern start with respect to the start of the useful part of the burst However if the entered offset is not correct within about 4 sym bols of tolerance the pattern will not be found Operating Manual 1176 7578 02 05 340 R amp S FSV K70 Support Spectrun VSA Ref Level 22 00 dim Mod Modulation amp Signal Description m el Att 10 0 op Freq 1 0GHz Cap Ler SGL TRG EXT BURST PATTERN Modulation Signal Description A EVM Signal Type Continuous Signal Burst Signal Burst Min Length 148 sym 546 462 Max Length 148 sym 546 462 Run In B sym 11 077 Run Out 3 sym 711 077 Start 3 sym Stop 151 sym C Magq CapBuf 1 Cirw w Pattern Name DGE TSct Pattern S Start 0 sym Stop 1500 sym Fig 6 7 GSM EDGE burst Pattern is actually located in the middle o
93. have several discrete result ranges at the bursts with intervals during the noise periods which should not be inclu ded in the results C Mag CapBuf 20 dBm 40 denh Fig 3 22 Result ranges for a burst signal Continuous signals on the other hand have result ranges that cover the entire or a specific part of the capture buffer without intervals C Mag CapBuf E Ea 211 FHT 40 dBm 60 dBm 80 dBm Fig 3 23 Result ranges for a continuous signal Result displays whose source is not the capture buffer are based on a single result range such as the EVM vs Time display or the data in the Current column of the Result Summary In this case you can use the capture buffer display to navigate through the available result ranges Select Result Rng softkey and analyze the indi vidual result ranges in another window The currently displayed result range is indica ted by a blue bar in the capture buffer display Evaluation ranges The result range in turn may contain more data than is necessary to calculate charac teristic values For example while you may want to display the ramps of a burst and thus include them in the result range they do not contribute to the error vectors or power levels Thus you would not include them in the evaluation range In all displays over time except for capture buffer displays the evaluation range is indi cated by red lines Operating Manual 1176 7578 02 05 110
94. if the following two conditions are fullfilled a pattern is detected e the modulation is a non differential non rotating QAM or PSK Otherwise only the measurement parameter IQ Imbalance which is a combination of the gain imbalance and the quadrature error is significant Quadrature Error Quadrature Inphase Fig 2 52 Effect of Quadrature Error The quadrature error is another modulation error which is shown in figure figure 2 52 In this diagram the and Q components of the modulated carrier are of identical ampli tude but the phase between the two components deviates from 90 This error also distorts the coordinates In the example in figure figure 2 52 the Q axis is shifted Note that the quadrature error is not estimated and cannot be compensated for in a BPSK signal UO Imbalance The effect of quadrature error and gain imbalance are combined to form the error parameter UO imbalance 8 e 8o eil Buin g eq e Signal Model Estimation and Modulation Errors where g and gq are the gain of the inphase and the quadrature component and 0 rep resents the quadrature error The I Q imbalance can be compensated for if the corresponding option is selected in the demodulation settings In this case the I Q imbalance does not affect the EVM Note that the UO imbalance is not estimated and cannot be compensated for in a BPSK signal Amplitude Droop The decrease of the signal power over time i
95. in Formulae CDMA2000 1X Reverse D T4 2 2 D Ee e mm 1 NEEN DH DH H H H H r DH H H H DH DH L H H DH DH H H wd H DH DH H H 20 e mm zm mm zm mm d a mm zm mm mm mm e mm zm sl mm mm zm mm zm mm e zm mm mm mm mm Jes wm slk o wm wm zm mm zm d a mm mm zm mm zm ss zm wm zm wm zm zw a mm ml i T4 DEER R 4 2 4 ETC EE gp apnyiubeyy 4 fsymbol Frequency in EDGE Narrow Pulse Shape D T3 1 D 1 KEEN ebd uiu egen denken eet aiden abc eigtl x Verbe H ZE H H zt H H L D 1 D np wn a E mm mm H mm mm mm D D 20 DC EN A a mr mm mm bm mm mm errs eee a e o b al Lass mm dl mm eee ba lb gp apnyubepy 04 06 08 12 14 16 18 Frequency in fsymbol 0 2 60 80 100 EDGE Wide Pulse Shape T2 4 TEE CEET CEET EEN gp T4 2 2 DEEN D H D r D D 1 f D 1 D D D L A mm mm ail mm mm mr mm mm J 4 amp Q4 KAN e 60 F 1 D 1 D EE EE 1 D D apnyubeyy T p T 4 0 6 0 4 0 2 100 feymbol Frequency in Abbreviations Half Sine D D D 1 D D D See eee ee eee eee ee eee ee ee 20 DH 1 D r 1 D D D 1 DH D D D DH 1 D r D D D D D D r DH DH 1
96. is not displayed in the logarithmic domain Problem The Vector UO result display and the Constellation UO result display look dif ferent Problem The Constellation UO measurement result display has a different number of constellation points in the R amp S FSQ K70 and the R amp S FSV K70 351 Frequently Asked Questions Problem the MSK FSK signal demodulates on the R amp S FSQ K70 but not on the R amp S FSV K70 or Why do have to choose different transmit filters in the R amp S FSQ K70 and Bi EE KE 352 Problem The EVM trace looks okay but the EVM in the result summary is significantly fo TRITT E E E 1000 E E E E E 352 Question Why isn t the FSK Deviation Error in R amp S FSV K70 identical to the FSK DEV ERROR im R amp S e KE 354 Problem The PSK QAM Signal shows spikes in the Frequency Error result display 355 Question The y axis unit for the spectrum of the measurement signal can be chosen to be dB What level is this relative toi 355 Question How can get the demodulated symbols of all my GSM bursts in the capture Pm mro EE 355 Question Why do the EVM results for my FSK modulated signal look wrong 356 Problem The trace is not entirely visible within the measurement screen Solution e 1 Press the key to select the measurement screen e 2 Press the AUTO key e 3 Press the Y Axis Auto Range softkey Problem The trace of the measurement signal is visible in the measurement screen the trace of the referen
97. it Note that this stage is only active if the pattern search is switched on Reference Signal Generation The ideal reference signal is generated based on the detected symbols and the specifi cations of the signal model i e the modulation scheme and the transmit filter Tx filter Measurement Filtering Both the measurement signal and the reference signal are filtered with the specified measurement filter Synchronization In this stage the measurement signal and the reference signal are correlated For PSK QAM and MSK modulated signals an estimation algorithm is used in order to obtain estimates for the signal amplitude signal timing carrier frequency error phase error IQ offset gain imbalance quadrature error and the amplitude droop Alterna tively it is possible to disable the estimation algorithm For FSK modulated signals estimates for the signal amplitude signal timing carrier frequency error FSK deviation error and the carrier frequency drift are calculated The measurement signal is subsequently corrected with these estimates Compensation for FSK deviation error and carrier frequency drift can be enabled or disabled For more information on synchronization see chapter 2 6 1 2 Estimation on page 58 e Demodulation on page 174 Result Display The selected measurement results are displayed on the screen s Configuration of the Screens can be performed via the Display Configuration dialog see chap
98. k Att 10 dB Freq 15 0 GHz Res Len 148 Input SGL Editing settings in the channel bar Some settings that are displayed in the channel bar can easily be edited by touching the setting in the display with a finger or mouse pointer The corresponding edit dia log box is displayed in which you can edit the setting For some settings a context sensitive menu is also available see chapter 3 2 14 Available Context Menus on page 145 Operating Manual 1176 7578 02 05 108 3 1 6 Measurement Result Display Label Description Ref Level Reference level see Reference Level on page 117 Offset Reference level offset if defined see Ref Level Offset on page 122 Att Attenuation see chapter 3 2 3 SoftkeySoftkeys of the Amplitude Menu R amp S FSV K70 on page 116 Freq Frequency see Center on page 116 Std Digital standard see Digital Standards on page 114 Mod Modulation type if no standard is active or default standard is changed see Modulation Type on page 148 Res Len Result Length see Result Length on page 171 Cap Len Capture Length instead of result length for capture buffer display see Capture Length on page 159 SR Symbol Rate see Symbol Rate on page 150 Input Input type of the signal source see chapter 3 2 12 Softkeys of the Input Output menu R amp S FSV K70 on page 141 SGL Single sweep mode cannot be edited directly Burst Bur
99. linearity by avoiding zero cross ings A distinction is made in the analyzer display In the Vector I Q result display of the measurement or reference signal the time delay is not compensated for The display corresponds to the physical diagram shown in table 2 13 In the Constellation UO result display of the measurement or reference signal the time delay is compensated for The display corresponds to the logical mapping as in figure 2 22 p eee Operating Manual 1176 7578 02 05 31 2 3 6 Symbol Mapping OQPSK Fig 2 22 Constellation diagram for OQSK GRAY including the symbol mapping Frequency Shift Keying FSK To illustrate symbol mappings for FSK modulations the symbol numbers are marked in the logical mapping diagram versus the instantaneous frequency An instantaneous frequency of zero in the baseband corresponds to the input frequency of the analyzer 2FSK NATURAL With 2FSK the symbol decision is made by a simple frequency discriminator Symbol Numbers Fig 2 23 Constellation diagram for 2FSK NATURAL including the logical symbol mapping 4FSK With 4FSK the symbol decision is made by a frequency discriminator with 3 decision thresholds 2 3 0 2 3 normalized to the FSK reference deviation Symbol Mapping 1 3 1 3 Fig 2 24
100. lt AddPattern gt This command adds a pattern to the current standard Using the DDEM SEAR SYNC SEL command only those patterns can be selected which belong to the current standard see SENSe DDEMod SEARch SYNC SELect on page 309 Setting parameters lt AddPattern gt string Example DDEM PRES TETRA NCDOWN Selects the standard TETRA_NCDOWN DDEM SEAR SYNC PATT ADD TETRA Gi Adds the pattern TETRA S1 to the standard Usage Setting only SENSe subsystem Mode VSA Manual operation See Add to Standard on page 168 SENSe DDEMod SEARch SYNC PATTern REMove This command deletes one or all patterns from the current standard Example DDEM PRES TETRA NCDOWN Selects the digital standard Tetra DDEM SEAR SYNC PATT REM pattern Removes the pattern pattern from the Tetra standard Usage Setting only Mode VSA Manual operation See Remove from Standard on page 168 SENSe DDEMod SEARch SYNC SELect Select This command selects a predefined sync pattern file Setting parameters Select string Example DDEM SEAR SYNC SEL GSM TSCO Mode VSA Manual operation See Select Pattern for Search on page 167 SENSe DDEMod SEARch SYNC STATe lt PatternSearch gt This command switches the search for a sync sequence on or off Setting parameters lt PatternSearch gt ON OFF RST OF
101. lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt STATe lt State gt This command turns delta markers on and off If the corresponding marker was a normal marker it is turned into a delta marker No suffix at DELTamarker turns on delta marker 1 Suffix lt n gt Selects the measurement window lt m gt Selects the marker Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Example CALC DELT1 ON Switches marker 1 to delta marker mode Manual operation See Marker 1 2 3 4 on page 134 See Marker Norm Delta on page 134 CALCulate subsystem CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt TRACe lt TraceNumber gt This command selects the trace a delta marker is positioned on The corresponding trace must have a trace mode other than Blank Suffix lt n gt Selects the measurement window lt m gt Selects the marker Parameters lt TraceNumber gt 1 6 Trace number the marker is positioned on Example CALC DELT3 TRAC 2 Assigns delta marker 3 to trace 2 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt X Position This command positions a delta marker on a particular coordinate on the x axis The position is an absolute value Suffix lt n gt Selects the measurement window lt m gt Selects the marker Parameters lt Position gt Depends on the measurement and scale of the horizontal axis Example CALC DELT X Outputs the absolute frequency time of delta marker 1 Manual operation See Marker 1 2 3 4 on page 134 CALCula
102. manual R amp S9FSV is abbreviated as R amp S FSV R amp S FSV K70 Contents Contents E a eee ee eee eee 5 1 4 Documentation Overview eeeeeeeeeeenen nennen nennen ennt nn nnne nnn nnn nnne n n nnns 5 1 2 Conventions Used in the Documentation eene enn 7 1 3 How to Use the Help System eeeeeeeeeeeeene enne nennen nnns 8 1 4 Notes for Users of R amp S FSV 1307 9002Kxx Models eene 9 2 Brief Description of Vector Signal Analysis 11 2 14 Block Diagram of Digital Signal Processing Hardware for UO Data 11 2 2 Filters and Bandwidths During Signal Processing eene 12 2 3 Symbol Mapping rione enne nascentia nana E Lunam Ras kung ENEE NEEE 22 2 4 Predefined Standards and Settings eene 42 2 5 Demodulation Overview rna nne ceceenteed ccesented cceeestte RR RA n RE ERR Rana RR RR ces 48 2 6 Signal Model Estimation and Modulation Errors esuuusss 56 3 Instrument Functions for Vector Signal Analysis 73 3 1 Measurement Result Display cese nnne nnn nennen nnns 74 3 2 Softkeys and Menu Overview for Vector Signal Analysis R amp S FSV K70 113 3 3 Configuring VSA measurements eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenee nennen
103. mzMiNimum LEET CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MINimumINEX iacu teoria nap ENEE dE ell cian aus GALCulate n MARKer m MINim rmiRIGLEH iieri otio dE ee eae arva Ce EOM LER CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MINimum PEAK CAL e e ET E Te EE e E Tee RIG E CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt X SLIMits ZOOM GALCulate n MARKer m X SLIMits S TATe ien oen t nnt tn etn thin nin es revised 245 GALGulatesn MARKer m STAT6 eot rne kr rtt rent rrt tnn tr net pre re ton 242 GALGulate n STATistics CODF S TATe inttr eren ner eene enr tiec 252 CAL Culate n gt STATIStCS MOD c GALGulate n S l ATistics PIRESeL trennen rrr ere rrt tee a nene en e ne Eon CALCulate lt n gt STATistics SCALe AUTO 2 ee E EEN Elei 253 GALGulate sn S TATistics SCALe Y LOW E 254 VE Ale ER Mee Ra ei RRE 254 CALCulat n gt S TA MisticS SCALE E el 254 CALCulate lt n gt TRACe lt t gt ADJust ALIGnment OFF Get 255 CALOCulate n TRACe t ADJust ALIGnment DEF au 255 CALCulate lt n gt TRACe lt t gt ADJust VALue GALGulatesns IRAGest VALUS rrr tee nr rep erri tet nep sre erratis GALGulatesn UNIT ANGLS rne o nere rer reb re ient Rh E Rene FER ERR ECKER CALC latesi gt espace DISPlayEWINDowsri PRATe AUTO noit eere rnnt rn tp cue terere teh inae BISPlay WINDowsn PRATe
104. nal with known symbol rate and modulation index Calculation examples 2 6 2 1 Signal Model Estimation and Modulation Errors The GSM standard describes the transmission of binary data using MSK i e 2FSK modulation with a modulation index of h 1 2 at a symbol rate of 270 8333 KHz The reference deviation is therefore given by A per B 2 1 270 8333 kHz 67 7083 kHz The APCO Project 25 standard phase 2 defines a H CPM signal i e 4AFSK with a modulation index of h 1 3 and a symbol rate of 6 KHz The reference deviation is A B B 4 1 6kHz 3 kHz Error Model The FSK measurement model used assumes that signal distortions in both the magni tude and phase frequency are present as well as additive noise The measured signal model is expressed as MEAS Apis C e Oen with n t is a disturbing additive noise process of unknown power Apisr t is the distorted magnitude model and q 5T0 is the distorted phase model The magnitude model is given by Apisr Ke with K is a constant scaling factor which can be interpreted as the system gain and a is the amplitude droop in Nepers per second The phase model is given by Ppisr t B Qpeplt t C t V D with Bis ascaling factor which results in a reference deviation error Cis a carrier frequency offset in radians per second Dis a frequency drift in radians per second per second Tis a timing offset in seconds and is a ph
105. number in the center indicates the sequential number of the currently selected symbol field To remove a symbol field select it and press Remove Example Defining a pattern A TETRA_SA Special Continuous Downlink Burst 4 Fig 3 34 Pattern definition Configuring VSA measurements This task can also be performed by remote control Example ENS DDEM SEAR SYNC NAME TETRA SA see SENSe DDEMod SEARch YNC NAME on page 308 n page 308 ENS DDEM SEAR SYNC DATA 00030001000000000003000200020001000300010001 see SENSe S S SENS DDEM SEAR SYNC NST 4 see SENSe DDEMod SEARch SYNC NSTate o S DEMod SEARch SYNC DATA on page 306 D SENS DDEM SEAR SYNC COMM see SENSe DDEMod SEARch SYNC COMMent on page 305 S ENS DDEM SEAR SYNC TEXT Special Continuous Downlink Burst see SENSe DDEMod SEARch SYNC TEXT on page 309 To edit a predefined pattern In the VSA Settings Overview dialog box select Signal Description 2 Press Pattern Settings 3 Select the pattern from the list of All Patterns 4 Press Edit Pattern 5 Change the settings as required as described in To create a new pattern on page 196 To delete a predefined pattern 1 In the VSA gt Settings Overview dialog box select Signal Description 2 Press Pattern Settings 3 Select the pattern from the list o
106. on page 196 Remote command SENSe DDEMod SEARch SYNC PATTern ADD on page 308 Remove from Standard Advanced Settings Removes the assignment of the selected patterns to the standard The patterns are removed from the Standard Patterns list but not deleted Remote command SENSe DDEMod SEARch SYNC PATTern REMove on page 309 Edit Advanced Settings Opens the Edit Pattern dialog box to edit the pattern definition See Pattern Defini tion on page 169 For details on defining a pattern see example Defining a pattern on page 197 Remote command SENSe DDEMod SEARch SYNC NAME on page 308 SENSe DDEMod SEARch SYNC COMMent on page 305 SENSe DDEMod SEARch SYNC DATA on page 306 SENSe DDEMod SEARch SYNC TEXT on page 309 New Advanced Settings Opens the Pattern dialog box to create a new pattern definition See Pattern Defini tion on page 169 Configuring VSA measurements For details on defining a pattern see example Defining a pattern on page 197 Remote command SENSe DDEMod SEARch SYNC NAME on page 308 SENSe DDEMod SEARch SYNC COMMent on page 305 SENSe DDEMod SEARch SYNC DATA on page 306 SENSe DDEMod SEARch SYNC TEXT on page 309 Delete Advanced Settings Deletes the selected patterns Any existing assignments to other standards are removed Remote command SENSe DDEMod SEARch SYNC DELete on page 306 Pattern De
107. on the trace level spacing to adjacent val ues lt peak excursion an execution error error code 200 is produced Suffix lt n gt Selects the measurement window lt m gt Selects the marker Example CALC MARK2 MAN LEFT Positions marker 2 to the next lower maximum value to the left of the current value Usage Event Manual operation See Search Direction on page 137 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MAXimum NEXT This command positions the marker to the next smaller trace maximum If no next smaller maximum value is found on the trace level spacing to adjacent val ues lt peak excursion an execution error error code 200 is produced CALCulate subsystem Suffix lt n gt Selects the measurement window lt m gt Selects the marker Example CALC MARK2 MAX NEXT Positions marker 2 to the next lower maximum value Usage Event Manual operation See Next Peak on page 137 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MAXimum RIGHt This command positions a marker to the next smaller trace maximum on the right of the current value i e in ascending X values If no next smaller maximum value is found on the trace level spacing to adjacent val ues lt peak excursion an execution error error code 200 is produced Suffix lt n gt Selects the measurement window lt m gt Selects the marker Example CALC MARK2 MAX RIGH Positions marker 2 to the next lower maximum value to the right of the
108. option R amp S FSV K8 this command defines the position of the reference value for all windows Suffix n Selects the measurement window t irrelevant Parameters lt Position gt Example Manual operation DISPlay subsystem 0 PCT corresponds to the lower display border 100 corre sponds to the upper display border Range 0 to 100 RST Spectrum mode 100 PCT with tracking generator or time display 50 PCT Default unit PCT DISP TRAC Y RPOS 50PCT See Y Axis Reference Position on page 118 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe RVALue Value The command defines the power value assigned to the reference position in the grid When using a tracking generator this command requires active normalization Suffix n lt t gt Parameters lt Value gt Example Manual operation irrelevant irrelevant RST 0 dB coupled to reference level DISP TRAC Y RVAL 20dBm Defines a reference position of 20 dBm See Y Axis Reference Value on page 118 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SPACing lt ScalingType gt This command selects the scaling of the y axis Suffix lt n gt lt t gt Parameters lt ScalingType gt Example Manual operation Selects the measurement window irrelevant LOGarithmic Logarithmic scaling LiNear Linear scaling in 96 LDB Linear scaling in dB RST LOGarithmic DISP TRAC Y SPAC LIN Select a linear s
109. orrori 151 180 Amplitude Droop elle Le E 175 ASCII Trace CX POM EE 206 ASCII Trace Export le 129 145 attenuation OPTION B25 cte aG 121 Attenuation OPTION E 121 Automatic ELTERE Option EE 120 Attenuation Mode RF SEt NJS erasa 156 Auto level IyStereSiS esee e endo o se Hb dai EE 123 Average trace mode sssssesee 127 206 B Bandwidth Extension Maximum Bandwidth extension Optom BIGO E 14 Restrictions for USE i ias reser cem dae 15 BER see Bit error Tate i c n ec tin 101 Binary UE 119 Bit error rate RRESUIL type i e trennen Blank trace mode Block diagram iem 11 B rst Search cuite erm rrr mer ER ER Peg 50 Activating remote control sesesssss 303 Auto configuration 164 Enabling 164 Falling edge remote control 302 Gap lengthier 164 Minimum gap remote control sollt Rising edge remote control 302 kc 133 Tolerance ainurin 164 Tolerance remote control 303 B rst Signal ssis niir e ree entren cct 152 Bursts Length remote control neissen 301 Useful l rigili cei nere rtr einen 152 C Capture Length eer 158 159 UO Capture remote Control 299 Capture E e lu ME 159 REMOlE COMO i c Eege Ed 294 Capture Unit SONKEY ege 120 Carrier Frequency Drift ell LTE 175 Cen
110. overview that visualizes the data flow of the Vector Signal Analyzer and summarizes the current settings In addition the Settings Overview dia log box provides access to the individual settings dialog boxes and allows you to restore default values For details on configuring the measurement and a description of the individual dialog boxes see chapter 3 3 1 Settings Overview on page 146 Digital Standards Opens a submenu and a file selection dialog to manage predefined measurement set tings for conventional mobile radio standards See Managing standard settings files for details For an overview of predefined standards and settings see chapter 2 4 Predefined Standards and Settings on page 42 Load Standard Digital Standards Opens a file selection dialog to load a measurement settings file for a specific stand ard See Managing standard settings files for details Note When you load a standard the usage of a known data file if available is auto matically deactivated Remote command SENSe DDEMod PRESet STANdard on page 295 Save As Standard Digital Standards Opens a file selection dialog to save the current measurement settings as a file for a specific standard Remote command SENSe DDEMod STANdard SAVE on page 311 Softkeys and Menu Overview for Vector Signal Analysis R amp S FSV K70 Delete Standard Digital Standards Deletes the selected standard Standards pred
111. page 286 Measurement filter SENSe DDEMod MFILter ALPHa on page 290 Signal Description The settings in the Signal Description tab of the Modulation amp Signal Description dialog box describe the expected input signal and determine which settings are availa ble for configuration You can define a Pattern to which the instrument can be synchronized thus adapting the result range A graphical preview of the current Signal Description configuration is displayed in the preview area at the bottom of the dialog box The preview area is not editable directly Modulation amp Signal Description f x 102 sym 1600 sym 3Burst Length Pattern M Offset Continuous Signal Burst Signal eter tette ene neta Raca 152 lup D 152 Fanem DAINOS dert ert rn cet aee hated tct dete ed Ev etd rcd E toad 152 erc reer ee 153 Configuring VSA measurements Continuous Signal Burst Signal Determines whether the signal is continuous or contains bursts For bursts further set tings are available Parameter Description Min Length Shortest expected burst length in symbols Max Length Longest expected burst length in symbols 15000 Run In The number of symbols before the signal is assumed to have valid modulated symbols Run Out The number of symbols before the falling edge
112. rate EDGE Wide Pulse Shape Standard specific filter for GSM EDGE higher symbol rate Half Sine Half Sine filter APCO25 C4FM Filter for the APCO25 C4FM standard APCO25 H CPM Filter for the APCO25 Phase 2 standard APCO25 H DQPSK Filter for the APCO25 Phase 2 standard APCO25 H D8PSK Narrow Filter for the APCO25 Phase 2 standard APCO25 H D8PSK Wide Filter for the APCO25 Phase 2 standard CDMA2000 1X Forward Filter for CDMA ONE forward link TIA EIA IS 95 A May 1995 and CDMA2000 1X forward link http www 3gpp2 org Public html specs C S0002 C_v1 0 pdf 28 05 2002 Filters and Bandwidths During Signal Processing CDMA2000 1X Reverse Filter for CDMA ONE forward link TIA EIA IS 95 A May 1995 and CDMA2000 1X reverse link http www 3gpp2 org Public_html specs C S0002 C v1 0 pdf 28 05 2002 Rectangular Rectangular filter in the time domain with a length of 1 symbol period None No filter is used USER User defined filter Define the filter using the SENSe DDEMod TFILter USER command 2 2 6 Measurement Filters The measurement filter can be used to filter the following two signals in the same way e the measurement signal after coarse frequency phase and timing synchronization have been achieved e the reference signal i e the UO symbols that have been determined in the demodu lator and have already been filtered with the Transmit filter For MSK PSK QAM and User QAM the measurement
113. read by the user Reading the register clears it Possible events limit violations are described in chapter 5 3 STATus QUEStiona ble MODulation lt n gt Register on page 333 Suffix n 1 4 Usage Query only SCPI confirmed Mode VSA STATus QUEStionable Subsystem STATus QUEStionable MODulation lt n gt NTRansition lt NTransition gt This bit acts as a transition filter When a bit of the CONDition part of the STATus QUEStionable MODulation lt n gt register is changed from 1 to 0 the NTR bit decides whether the EVENt bit is set to 1 Suffix lt n gt 1 4 Setting parameters lt NTransition gt 0 the EVENt bit is not set 1 the EVENt bit is set Usage SCPI confirmed Mode VSA STATus QUEStionable MODulation lt n gt PTRansition lt PTransition gt This bit acts as a transition filter When a bit of the CONDition part of the STATus QUEStionable MODulation lt n gt register is changed from 0 to 1 the NTR bit decides whether the EVENt bit is set to 1 Suffix lt n gt 1 4 Setting parameters lt PTransition gt 0 the EVENt bit is not set 1 the EVENt bit is set Usage SCPI confirmed Mode VSA STATus QUEStionable MODulation lt n gt lt ResultType gt EVENt The EVEN part indicates whether an event has occurred in the evaluation of the selected result type since the last reading It only indicates events passed on by the transition filters It is permanently up
114. restarts a measurement that has been stopped in single sweep mode The measurement is restarted at the first sweep point As opposed to INI Tiate lt n gt IMMediate this command does not reset traces in maxhold minhold or average mode Therefore it can be used to continue measure ments using max hold or averaging functions In single sweep mode you can synchronize to the end of the measurement with OPC OPC or WAI In continuous sweep mode synchronization to the end of the mea surement is not possible Thus it is not recommended that you use continuous sweep mode in remote control as results like trace data or markers are only valid after a sin gle sweep end synchronization Suffix lt n gt irrelevant Example INIT CONT OFF Switches to single sweep mode DISP WIND TRAC MODE AVER Switches on trace averaging SWE COUN 20 Setting the sweep counter to 20 sweeps INIT WAI Starts the measurement and waits for the end of the 20 sweeps INIT CONM WAI Continues the measurement next 20 sequences and waits for the end Manual operation See Continue Single Sweep on page 124 INITiate lt n gt CONTinuous lt State gt This command determines whether the trigger system is continuously initiated contin uous or performs single measurements single The sweep is started immediately Suffix lt n gt irrelevant Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST ON INITiate Subsystem Examp
115. result ranges and averaging is performed on partially dupli cate values However a negative influence on the measurement results is not to be expected 6 2 Flow Chart for Troubleshooting If you experience a concrete measurement problem you might want to try solving it with the help of the flow chart Flow Chart for Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Overview GET Demodulation Failed in order to start from a known state Sync Failed Unstable Message in the Status Bar Y The measurement UO Constellation does not look at all like a constellation Check the following parameters at the DUT and the K70 Center frequency Reference Level overload Symbol rate Transmit filter Check the Modulation Type measurement Input RF Baseband Mag CapBuffer Sideband inversion Swap IQ SAT Y To make sure you realize once the problem is fixed e colored bar 7 Result Range switch on the EVM trace and keep an eye on it in a range where you expect the signal to o have the set modulation See sar Y part 2 Press the SWEEP Hardkey and set the statistic count to 1 Then press Single Sweep The FSV will stop capturing IQ data which makes it easier for you to debug es x Is your signal bursted Burst i 546 7 D GE Sg Sa D Try to increase Run In and 11 077 us Run Out in the Signal Daat 11
116. rre etienne te trait ho LESSER 271 4 8 INSTrument Subsystem orien NEESS SSES ua arae pO RR See ERR 277 4 9 MMEMory Subsystem tiere eere trennen s auae aod no rakada rua ae stava Dn RR seada 277 4 10 OUTPUt Subsystem e rere tnr ne bene cei pe ro ox Eel ENEE auda no 279 4 41 SENSe subsystem ene terret Eege ZENS ec guae tasa EEA 281 4 12 STATus QUEStionable Subsystem eeesseeseseseeeeeeenennenen nnne 317 4 13 SYSTem Subsystem entretenir ananas iaaa ainnean airaa Ca na gea RSEN RAD Ee 323 4 44 TRACO subsystem eereiicieeec eiiis eniti ne asenna nanana NAmE e iod dd unas ard asi asarana 324 4 15 TRIGger subsystoem enirn neenon inn EEEEEEEEEREEEEEEEEEREEEEEEEEEE EEEEE EES 326 4 1 Notation In the following sections all commands implemented in the instrument are first listed and then described in detail arranged according to the command subsystems The notation is adapted to the SCPI standard The SCPI conformity information is included in the individual description of the commands R amp S FSV K70 Remote Control Commands R amp S FSV K70 Individual Description The individual description contains the complete notation of the command An example for each command the RST value and the SCPI information are included as well The options and operating modes for which a command can be used are indicated by the followin
117. synchronization during the demodulation process see figure 2 41 and Demodulation on page 174 Calculation of the Bit Error Rate BER see chapter 3 1 1 23 Bit Error Rate BER on page 101 3 3 7 1 Dependencies and Restrictions when Using Known Data When you use Known Data files as a reference some dependencies to other settings and restrictions for other functions apply Modulation Order The Modulation Order selected in the Modulation settings in the R amp S FSV K70 application must correspond to the modulation order value specified in the xml file lt ModulationOrder gt element Demodulation Demodulation using synchronization to the Known Data may increase the measure ment duration as each detected symbol must be compared to each possible sequence in the data file Result Length The Result Length specified in the Result Range dialog box in the R amp S FSV K70 application must be identical to the length of the specified symbol sequences in the xml file lt ResultLength gt element Result Range Alignment e Bursted signals Configuring VSA measurements When you align the result range to a bursted signal due to the uncertainty of the burst search the determined result range might start up to 2 symbols before or after the actual burst However an offset of only one symbol has the effect that none of the predefined symbol sequences in the Known Data file will be found To avoid this try one of the
118. that do not necessarily need to have a valid modulation Note The burst excluding its Run In Out areas is sometimes referrred to as the useful part The minimum length of the useful part Min Length Run In Run Out must be 210 The parameter Run In Out can be used to influence the range over which the EVM is minimized The internal synchronization range is the overlapping area of the result range and the burst excluding its Run In Out areas Hence this parameter also allows for demodulation of bursts with mixed modulations e g Bluetooth because it can be used to explicitely exclude symbols from influencing the synchronization Remote command SENSe DDEMod SIGNal VALue on page 310 Pattern If enabled the instrument expects the signal to contain a pattern Note The pattern search itself must be enabled separately in the Pattern Search Set tings see Auto On Off on page 166 By default the pattern search is active if the signal description contains a pattern This function cannot be enabled if the signal description does not contain a pattern Select the pattern from the selection list To change the pattern settings press Advanced Settings on page 167 For details on working with pattern searches see chapter 3 3 5 Working with Pattern Searches on page 194 Further pattern settings are located in the Pattern Search on page 165 dialog box see chapter 3 3 1 3 Burst and Pattern Search
119. the Amplitude menu see chapter 3 2 3 Soft keySoftkeys of the Amplitude Menu R amp S FSV K70 on page 116 3 3 3 1 Scaling Time and Spectrum Diagrams The range of the displayed y axis for time and spectral diagrams can be defined in the following ways manually by defining the range size reference values and positions e automatically according to the current results To define the scaling manually using a reference point With this method you define a reference value and a position at which this value is to be displayed on the y axis 1 Focus the result screen 2 Select AMPT gt Ranges gt Y Axis Reference Value see Y Axis Reference Value on page 118 3 Enter a reference value for the y axis in the current unit 4 Select AMPT Ranges Y Axis Reference Position see Y Axis Reference Position on page 118 5 Enter the position at which this value is to be displayed on the y axis The position is a percentage of the entire length where 100 refers to the top edge 6 Select AMPT gt Ranges gt Y Axis Range see Y Axis Range on page 117 R amp S FSV K70 Instrument Functions for Vector Signal Analysis Example If you want the to analyze errors greater than 95 you can define the y axis range as 5 and position the y axis to start at 95 To do so enter the reference value 95 and the reference position 096 A EVM Error 1 Clrw 2 Clrw Start 151 0 sym Stop 299 0 sym
120. the Result Length setting in the Result Range dialog box i e the number of symbols to be demodulated the exact number also depends on available memory space Configuring VSA measurements Syntax lt Data gt lt Data gt Possible Values One character per symbol in the sequence Possible characters are 0 to n 1 where n is the lt ModulationOrder gt Spaces tabs and line breaks are ignored Description One possible sequence of symbols that can be demodulated from the input signal Up to 6000 different sequences i e lt Data gt elements can be defined in total lt RS_VSA_KNOWN_DATA_FILE gt as specified File End the exact number also depends on available memory space Sample xml file for known data lt RS_VSA KNOWN DATA FILE Version 01 00 gt Comment Base Standard EDGE 8PSK 16 lt ModulationOrder gt 8 lt ResultLength gt 148 lt Data gt lt Data gt lt Data gt lt Data gt 7 lt Data gt 77 777 511 727 242 206 Tq0 173 709 631 011 JI dob A dus uy 527 046 104 004 106 241 264 773 111 337 77 511 727 242 206 770 173 705 631 011 JI dog dob dup uy 527 046 104 004 106 241 264 773 111 337 727 242 206 705 631 011 AO dug ay 104 004 106 Tq3 211 3317 770 17 JI d 527 04 241 26 4 0 J U H 777 511 727 242 206 FTO 173 709 631 011 T Aug ds d 777 527 046 104 004 106 241 264 773 111 337 777
121. the delta marker to the next smaller trace maximum on the left of the current value i e descending X values The corresponding delta marker is acti vated first if necessary If no next higher minimum value is found on the trace level spacing to adjacent values lt peak excursion an execution error error code 200 is produced Suffix lt n gt Selects the measurement window lt m gt Selects the marker Example CALC DELT MAX LEFT Sets delta marker 1 to the next smaller maximum value to the left of the current value CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MAXimum NEXT This command positions the delta marker to the next smaller trace maximum The cor responding delta marker is activated first if necessary If no next higher minimum value is found on the trace level spacing to adjacent values lt peak excursion an execution error error code 200 is produced Suffix lt n gt Selects the measurement window lt m gt Selects the marker Example CALC DELT2 MAX NEXT Sets delta marker 2 to the next smaller maximum value Manual operation See Next Peak on page 137 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MAXimum PEAK This command positions the delta marker to the current trace maximum If necessary the corresponding delta marker is activated first Suffix lt n gt Selects the measurement window lt m gt Selects the marker Example CALC DELT3 MAX Sets delta marker 3 t
122. times Description of Parameters Due to the standardization the parameter section of SCPI commands consists always of the same syntactical elements SCPI has therefore specified a series of definitions which are used in the tables of commands In the tables these established definitions are indicated in angled brackets lt gt and is briefly explained in the following For details see the chapter SCPI Command Structure in the base unit description Boolean This keyword refers to parameters which can adopt two states on and off The off state may either be indicated by the keyword OFF or by the numeric value 0 the on state is indicated by ON or any numeric value other than zero Parameter queries are always returned the numeric value 0 or 1 numeric value num These keywords mark parameters which may be entered as numeric values or be set using specific keywords character data The following keywords given below are per mitted MAXimum This keyword sets the parameter to the largest possible value ABORt Subsystem MINimum This keyword sets the parameter to the smallest possible value DEFault This keyword is used to reset the parameter to its default value e UP This keyword increments the parameter value DOWN This keyword decrements the parameter value The numeric values associated to MAXimum MINimum DEFault can be queried by adding the corresponding keywords to the comma
123. tured UO data and the final measurement signal and reference signal Note however that several other filters are also involved in the DSP section but are not mentioned above e Receive filter to prevent ISI intersymbol interference e filters necessary for various estimators others Operating Manual 1176 7578 02 05 13 Filters and Bandwidths During Signal Processing 2 2 14 UO Bandwidth The bandwidth of the UO data used as input for the vector signal analysis is filtered as described in chapter 2 2 Filters and Bandwidths During Signal Processing on page 12 Its flat usable bandwidth no considerable amplitude or phase distortion depends on e the used sample rate which depends on the defined Symbol Rate see Symbol Rate on page 150 defined Capture Oversampling see Capture Oversampling on page 159 the type of input used digital baseband input RF input etc The sample rate of the I Q input data is Sample rate Symbol rate Capture Oversampling Table 2 1 Value range for sample rate and symbol rate Model option Max sample rate Min symbol rate Max symbol rate max sample rate capt oversam pling R amp S FSV without 45 MHz 25Hz 11 MHz bandwidth exten sion option R amp S FSV with 128 MHz 25Hz 32 MHz bandwidth exten sion option B70 R amp S FSV with 1 28 GHz 25Hz restricted to 160 MHz active bandwidth extension option B160 1307 9002K39 12 5 MHz 25Hz
124. unit PCT Mode VSA Manual operation See If SER lt on page 178 SENSe DDEMod FSYNc RESult This command queries whether a loaded Known Data file was used for fine synchroni zation or not If a maximum symbol error rate was specified using the SENSe DDEMod FSYNc LEVel command and exceeded the file is not used Return values lt Usage gt 0 1 0 The Known Data file was not used do to the exceeded SER 1 The Known Data file was used Usage Query only Mode VSA Manual operation See Fine Synchronization on page 178 SENSe DDEMod FSYNc MODE lt FineSync gt This command defines the fine synchronization mode used to calculate results e g the bit error rate Note You can define a maximum symbol error rate SER for the known data in refer ence to the analyzed data If the SER of the known data exceeds this limit the default synchronization using the detected data is performed See SENSe DDEMod FSYNc LEVel on page 288 SENSe subsystem Setting parameters lt FineSync gt KDATa PATTern DDATa KDATa The reference signal is defined as the data sequence from the loaded Known Data file that most closely matches the measured data PATTern The reference signal is estimated from the defined pattern This setting requires an activated pattern search see SENSe DDEMod SEARch SYNC STATe on page 309 DDATa Default The reference signal is estimated from the d
125. using the CALC TRAC ALIG commands the burst on the screen is shifted the x axis thus no longer begins on the left at 0 symbols but at a selectable value Suffix lt n gt 1 4 lt t gt 1 6 Example CALC TRAC ADJ BURS Defines the burst as the reference for the screen display CALC TRAC ADJ ALIG CENT Position the burst at the center of the screen DISP TRAC X STAR Queries the start value of the X axis Usage Query only Mode VSA DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt X SCALe VOFFset lt VOffset gt This command adds an offset to the symbols shown in the result display The offset is available for all result displays except the capture buffer Suffix lt n gt 1 4 lt t gt 1 6 DISPlay subsystem Setting parameters lt VOffset gt numeric value Range 100000 to 100000 RST 0 Default unit NONE Example DISP TRAC X VOFF 20 Adds an offset of 20 to the number of symbols Mode VSA Manual operation See Symbol Number at lt Reference gt start on page 172 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe Range This command defines the display range of the y axis with logarithmic scaling The command works only for a logarithmic scaling You can select the scaling with DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SPACing on page 266 Suffix lt n gt window For applications that do not have more than 1 measure ment window the suffix lt n gt is irrelevant lt t gt irrel
126. with correct evaluation range setting Make sure that the same samples are evaluated The EVM trace displays as default all sample instants e g if the Capture Oversampling is 4 the EVM trace shows 4 samples per symbol The Result Summary does not forcefully evaluate all Operating Manual 1176 7578 02 05 353 R amp S FSV K70 Support sample instants E g fora PSK modulation as default only symbol instants contrib ute to the EVM result Spectrum VSA Ref Level 0 00 dBm Mod Offset QPSK SR 1 0 MHz m el Att 20 0dB Freq 1 0GHz ResLen 100 iere SGL ResRange Count 0 Overview 1 Clrw B Result Summary a TT NETT Gain Imbalance Quadrature Err Biwer Start 3 syrri Stop ivy sym C Const I Q Meas amp Ref 1M Clrw D Vector I Q Error 1 Clrw Restore Factory Settings Start 2 535 Stop 2 535 Start 0 254 Stop 0 254 TT Gal 12 03 2010 l 09 44 29 Question Why isn t the FSK Deviation Error in R amp S FSV K70 identical to the FSK DEV ERROR in R amp S FSQ K70 Solution The FSK deviation error in the R amp S FSV K70 is calculated as the difference between the measured frequency deviation and the reference frequency deviation as entered by the user see FSK Ref Deviation on page 150 What is referred to as the FSK DEV ERROR in the R amp S FSQ K70 is calculated differently see the R amp S FSQ K70 Soft ware Manual and is comparable to the Freq Err RMS in the R amp S FSV K70 How ever while the FSK DEV E
127. 0 45 Table 2 10 7 4 DQPSK TFTS Logical symbol mapping Modulation symbol binary indication MSB LSB 00 01 10 11 Phase shift 180 45 90 45 90 45 0 45 Table 2 11 7 4 DQPSK Natural Logical symbol mapping Modulation symbol binary indication MSB LSB 00 01 10 11 Phase shift 0 45 90 45 180 45 90 45 Table 2 12 17 4 DQPSK APCO25 and APCO25Phase2 Logical symbol mapping Modulation symbol binary indication MSB LSB 00 01 10 11 Phase shift 0 45 90 45 90 45 180 45 2 3 5 Offset QPSK Offset QPSK differs from normal QPSK in the fact that the Q component is delayed by half a symbol period against the component in the time domain Hence the symbol time instants of the and the Q component do not coincide The concept of Offset QPSK is illustrated in the diagrams below R amp S FSV K70 Brief Description of Vector Signal Analysis IEN Derivation of OQPSK Table 2 13 I Q diagram and constellation diagram QPSK OQPSK delayed Q component Quadratu re Quadratur a time 6 amb symbols symbols PSK vector diagram with alpha 0 35 OQPSK vector diagram with alpha 0 35 2 Quadrature e Quadrature Inphase Inphase Offset QPSK reduces the dynamic range of the modulated signal with respect to nor mal QPSK and therefore the demands on amplifier
128. 0 833 kHz Att 30 dB 15 0 GHz Res Len 148 Start 0 0 sym Fig 3 12 Result display Error Vector Magnitude in normal mode Available for source types e Error Vector SCPI commands CALC FEED XTIM DDEM ERR VECT to define the required source type see CALCulate lt n gt FEED on page 249 CALC FORM MAGN to define the result type see CALCulate lt n gt FORMat on page 249 TRAC DATA TRACE1 to query the trace results see TRACe n DATA on page 324 3 1 1 18 Magnitude Error Displays the magnitude error of the measurement signal with respect to the reference signal as a function of symbols over time MAG ERR MAG yeas MAG gee t with tzn Tp and Tp the duration of one sampling period at the sample rate defined by the display points per symbol parameter see Display Points Sym on page 184 Measurement Result Display Ref Level 10 00 dBm Std EDGE_NormalBurst SR 270 833 kHz 30 dB Freq 15 0 GHz ResLen Fig 3 13 Result display Magnitude Error in normal mode Available for source types e Modulation Errors SCPI commands CALC FEED XTIM DDEM ERR MPH to define the required source type see CALCulate lt n gt FEED on page 249 CALC FORM MAGN to define the result type see CALCulate lt n gt FORMat on page 249 TRAC DATA TRACE1 to query the trace results see TRACe lt n gt DATA on page 324 3 1 1 19 Phase Error
129. 0 Hz Example FREQ CENT 100 MHz Manual operation See Center on page 116 See Frequency on page 155 SENSe FREQuency CENTer STEP lt StepSize gt This command defines the center frequency step size Parameters lt StepSize gt Range 1 to fmax RST 0 1 x lt span value gt Default unit Hz Example FREQ CENT STEP 120 MHz Manual operation See CF Stepsize on page 116 SENSe FREQuency CENTer STEP AUTO lt State gt This command links the step width to the current standard ON or sets the step width entered using the FREQ CENT STEP command OFF see SENSe FREQuency CENTer STEP on page 315 Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST ON Example FREQ CENT STEP AUTO ON Activates the coupling of the step size to the span Manual operation See Stepsize Auto Man on page 116 SENSe FREQuency OFFSet lt Offset gt This command defines the frequency offset Parameters lt Offset gt Range 100 GHz to 100 GHz RST 0 Hz Default unit Hz Example FREQ OFFS 1GHZ Manual operation See Frequency Offset on page 116 SENSe subsystem SENSe SWEep COUNt VALue lt SweepCount gt This command sets the statistics count Entering 0 as a parameter activates Auto mode Entering a number greater than 0 activates Manual mode and sets the statis tics count to the corresponding number For more information see e Statistics Count on pag
130. 077 us Description dialog sync prefers more validsymbols Do you see a Sync prefers more valid symbols Message yes Advanced Use Pattern forSync Auto on of Do you transmit uncor related random bits on the physical level This can be problematic If you have a pattern you can try to use it for synchronization i e use the setting Coarse Synchronization Pattern an you increase the length of your Result Range E g is our burst actually larger s your Result Range large than 8xModulation Order e g 8x4 32 for QPSK no Increase the Result Range to at least 8xModulation Order Hard to find the origin of the problem It might be that Your DUT suffers from massive impairments Your DUT suffers from a severe symbol rate error The adjacent channel power is very high Go back to DO From 1 Frequently Asked Questions Is your yes no signal bursted Does your signal contain a pattern Does this pattern matter to you E g do you want to align your result to the pattern or check whether the pattern is transmitted correctly Does your signal consist of ranges with different modulation types no v Make sure your Signal Type in the Signal Description dialog is a Burst Signal Make sure the pattern is
131. 1 Softkeys and Menu Overview for Vector Signal Analysis R amp S FSV K70 To re open the edit dialog box for manual value definition select the Man mode again If the defined reference level cannot be set for the given RF attenuation the reference level is adjusted accordingly and the warning Limit reached is output Remote command INPut EATT AUTO on page 275 INPut EATT on page 275 Ref Level Offset Opens an edit dialog box to enter the arithmetic level offset This offset is added to the measured level irrespective of the selected unit The setting range is 200 dB in 0 1 dB steps Remote command DISPlay WINDowcn TRACe t Y SCALe RLEVel OFFSet on page 265 Input AC DC Toggles the RF input of the R amp S FSV between AC and DC coupling This function is not available for input from the R amp S Digital UO Interface option R amp S FSV B17 Remote command INPut COUPling on page 272 3 2 4 Softkeys of the Auto Set Menu R amp S FSV K70 The AUTO SET displays the Auto Set menu which contains the following softkeys PRTG SVN 122 iip e 122 L Meas Time Mantal i c cdita anal odit Rd R 123 L Meas Time P NIE D mM 123 L Upper Level Hvsteresls E 123 L Lower Level Hvsteresls E 123 Y AXIS ers 123 Y Axis Auto Range All Gcreens sse enne 123 Auto Level Defines the optimal reference level for the current measurement
132. 1 Export remote control AA 278 Export format remote control Import remote control A 277 SAVING EE 111 UO Imbalance Belle le 175 UO Offset Belle TE 175 IQ pattern seare inosan aa a 52 IEC IEEE bus Command description i c saesae aia 208 IF Power SONKEY enee iti o Pe enee 130 IF WIDE OUTPUT GOMMCCION c net rrt en rre exei nts 160 Importing l GQ data remote 2 einen ettet 277 Input Coupling RF Settings TEE 156 Input sample rate Digital lQsis Intersymbol interference IQ Export e 145 ISI PING te eege sie i P aen 16 Intersymbol interference isisisi 15 K Known data Creating files 200 File syntax 15 202 Recording tool i5 ot teret adn 201 Known Data lee 199 WOEKIDIgUWIE aic ciere rrt to ER ER creen 199 L Level Unit Digital UO Interface remote control 274 Digital IQ niet rtt vee 142 Limits COMMQUTING ERR ere E ENRE 204 Modulation Accuragy seseeeeeeee 138 204 Lines nr 138 Load Standard EU E 114 Low ISI filters Frequency TESPONSE xe retenti ten eto iia 367 Lower Level Hysteresis SOftKey cuidar mex bun n e Pon Reed 123 Lower case commands ssesee 209 M Magnitude Absolute Result type iecit rere eres 76 Magnitude Error ISesult type i rt rr c rr ene 92 Magnitude Relative Result type eite rm rcr t ia nee 77 Mapping e
133. 1 e Signal is bursted but bursts have not been captured completely Operating Manual 1176 7578 02 05 337 R amp S FSV K70 Support The burst search can only find bursts that start and end within the capture buffer It ignores bursts that are cut off Cc Man CapBuf i li dl Lh ha ia o i dc d i laa dra MR Start 0 sym Stop 1250 sym O n Fig 6 2 Example for incomplete burst capture Solution Change the trigger settings and or enlarge the capture length For more information see UO Capture on page 157 The current measurement is being performed on a burst that has not been captured completely 1Clrw ron 01 04 2010 COD Dd sem Tag Start 0 sym Stop 3000 sym XT 01 04 2010 des Seil 14 43 12 Fig 6 4 Example for measurement on complete burst capture Solution Change the trigger settings or increase the result length Note however that in this case the results are actually correct and the message can be ignored e The settings do not match the signal Operating Manual 1176 7578 02 05 338 R amp S FSV K70 Support In order to allow you to select certain bursts the burst search only searches for bursts that have a length between Min Length and Max Length plus a tolerance that you can set in the Burst Search Dialog In case the burst is e g shorter than the Burst Min Length the burst search fails Mag CapBuf 1Cirw L Modulation amp Signal Description S
134. 1 7 2 SYSTem Subsystem 2 ccccisssceccecesscccceeesssceceecevescceneeveessaaecevesceceecvsscccencevesstenesveeaseeeest 323 TRACe subsystem eniin setae srra NANNAN seed seen SYETAN NANNE ANTARES 324 TRIG ger subsystem 5 cerei ic cecea ssecnavees seeanenesdseaeeetessansecteesseaeeatesd 326 Status Reporting System Option R amp S FSV K70 330 STATus QUEStionable Register ccssccccscccsseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeseeeseesneeeeeeeeeeeeceneneees 332 STATus QUEStionable SYNC lt n gt ReGister ccccseeecessseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeesseennees 333 STATus QUEStionable MODulation lt n gt Register eee 333 STATus QUESTionable MODulation lt n gt EVM Register ee 334 STATus QUESTionable MODulation lt n gt PHASe Register 334 STATus QUESTionable MODulation lt n gt MAGnitude Register 335 STATus QUESTionable MODulation lt n gt CFRequency Register 335 STATus QUESTionable MODulation lt n gt IQRHO Register 335 STATus QUESTionable MODulation lt n gt FSK Register 336 SUPPO MN Ycr 337 Explanation of Error Messages eeeeeeeeeeeeneneee nennen nnne nennen 337 Flow Chart for Troubleshooting esee nennen nnn nnn 346 Fr
135. 1321 3008K04 model has a maximum frequency of 4 GHz The bandwidth extension option R amp S FSV B160 1311 2015 xx is not available for the R amp S FSV 1307 9002Kxx models The maximum usable IO analysis bandwidth for these models is 28 MHz or with option R amp S FSV B70 40 MHz Block Diagram of Digital Signal Processing Hardware for UO Data 2 Brief Description of Vector Signal Analysis The Vector Signal Analysis software option R amp S FSV K70 performs vector and scalar measurements on digitally modulated single carrier signals To perform the measure ments it converts RF signals into the complex baseband It can also use the optional Digital Baseband interface R amp S FSV B17 option to analyze UO signals already deliv ered to the complex baseband For details on the Digital Baseband interface R amp S FSV B17 option see the base unit description The following sections describe the digital signal processing hardware the interplay of analog and digital filters for bandwidth limiting modulation and demodulation filters as well as the algorithms used by the measurement demodulator The implemented mod ulation modes and the associated predefined symbol mappings are also listed The last part of this chapter deals with vector and scalar modulation errors 2 1 Block Diagram of Digital Signal Processing Hardware for UO Data The following sections describe the digital hardware used to capture UO data for vector signal analysis
136. 21 Ref Level OffSet eet eciee sae ce Edge See 122 hot epe E 122 Reference Level Defines the reference level in dBm The reference level value is the maximum value the AD converter can handle without distortion of the measured value Signal levels above this value will not be measured correctly which is indicated by the IFOVL status display To get an ideal reference level use Auto Level function For more information see e Auto Level on page 122 Remote command DISPlay WINDowcn TRACe t Y SCALe RLEVel on page 265 Ranges Opens a submenu to define the display range for normal or spectral displays see Result Type Transformation on page 183 For details on scaling see chapter 3 3 3 Changing the Display Scaling on page 189 Y Axis Range Ranges Opens an edit dialog field to define the y axis range Remote command DISPlay WINDowcn TRACe t Y SCALe on page 263 Softkeys and Menu Overview for Vector Signal Analysis R amp S FSV K70 Y Axis Reference Value Ranges Opens an edit dialog field to define a reference value for the y axis in the current unit The y axis is adapted so that the reference value is displayed at the Y Axis Reference Position Note The y axis reference value is maintained even if the Y Axis Range is changed For details see chapter 3 3 3 Changing the Display Scaling on page 189 Remote command DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe RVALue on page 2
137. 3 dB and 50 dB with a step width of 1 dB Remote command TRIGger n SEQuence IFPower HYSTeresis on page 328 Trigger Holdoff Defines the value for the trigger holdoff The holdoff value in s is the time which must pass before triggering in case another trigger event happens This softkey is only available if IFPower RF Power or BBPower is the selected trigger source Remote command TRIGger cn SEQuence IFPower HOLDoff on page 327 For digital input via the R amp S Digital UO Interface R amp S FSV B17 TRIGger lt n gt SEQuence BBPower HOLDoff on page 327 R amp S FSV K70 Instrument Functions for Vector Signal Analysis Ich 3 3 1 3 Burst and Pattern Search Settings You configure burst and pattern searches in the Burst amp Pattern Settings dialog This dialog box contains the following tabs Burst Search e Pattern Search Burst Search The Burst Search tab contains the settings for burst searches In addition it contains a link to the Signal Description settings see Signal Description on page 151 A live preview of the capture buffer with the current settings is displayed in the preview area at the bottom of the dialog box The green bar below the trace indicates the defined evaluation range see Evaluation Range on page 173 The preview area is not editable directly The Burst Search tab is also displayed when you select the Burst Search softkey in the Meas Config menu see Bu
138. 4 INPut Subsystem 4 7 INPut Subsystem INPUBAT TENUA naa a N E EE EEE 271 INPUtATTenuatiom AUTO nieee penans E SESRNE ERAN EE EN En Enean ri NEO EAER EE EE ee 271 Ei OS PUG DEE 272 INP UDIO CODEVI CE A EE ERTER 272 INPUtDIOQ RANGe COUPIMO EE 273 INPut DID RANOGSDLUPPSE ecd eete ie utuntur iate e rete xara era ecu vat 274 INPut DIQ ANGe UPPer UNIT 22232 reir tto prez AEE EENEN E Ea TENi 274 INPUL e Mee EE 274 INEU EA E 275 INPUREBA RE A DEE 275 ell Ga TESTA KE 276 INPUEGAIN STA RE 276 lee EE 276 INPut ATTenuation lt Value gt This command programs the input attenuator To protect the input mixer against dam age from overloads the setting 0 dB can be obtained by entering numerals not by using the DOWN command The attenuation can be set in 5 dB steps with option R amp S FSV B25 1 dB steps If the defined reference level cannot be set for the set RF attenuation the reference level is adjusted accordingly In the default state with Spectrum mode the attenuation set on the step attenuator is coupled to the reference level of the instrument If the attenuation is programmed directly the coupling to the reference level is switched off This function is not available if the R amp S Digital UO Interface R amp S FSV B17 is active Parameters lt Value gt RST 10 dB AUTO is set to ON Example INP ATT 30dB Sets the attenuation on the attenuator to 30 dB and switches off the coupling to the reference level Mode
139. 4 esind epiM C MSH 3904 esindepiM jeje me Wope adeus esind 4003 usu wv GLZLL v o waned ALICE HSH 3933 p m 3903 ZH Sze WWOZE P L OZE 3903 Jax epeo abuey u16ue UuJ9jjed sung Jet 9je1 Bug dem uonenj e 3 yuawu iy ynsoy ulayed 10 youeag 104 youeasg lg eudiv ywsuelL JoquiAs uonenpow piepue s Japjo4 Predefined Standards and Settings M DOE W898 19 ue2 PHON DIEN sad 33g o usng 0001 OL Ou ZH 00 xSd8 9IZ EES MSd ue OW O cS gn EE eunjde 5 06 Geo OW ZHW OZ MSdO O ZS GAG ve ASdY ze cS GAG yor Sed amp eze wsdvz aunjdeo DIS S Geo OW ZHIN OZ INvOJesn cS gud ve ASdY 9L ZS GAG ye EH amp eg Sdv E eundeo OSL Geo OW ZHW OZ INvOJesn 9L ZS gAG XS Ven OW dg ZS 8AG Mey eunde5 06 Geo OW ZHIN OZ xSd8 8 cS SAC cS HAG Old D e euo eJnje Hed ye1 d dd 1930 N Jeney ejqepod amydeg ver dd 193a gO MSWO ZHI SLL YSZ zed LOAG peBuo Ven Old dd 1030 SUON IEIMEN ue pen 8 664 0 andeo ver dd 1930 gO MSWD ZHN ZSL MSdZ zed 193A 1930 KBjou3 Ettel SUON IEN MOT Y O0 GL Lye 09 0 sung 9 gO SND ZHN L ERR enig 1ejue2 ZER lEIMEN GH noo GL 1987 Z 011sung 0482 sO SW ZHN L ERR enig 19 U29 Suoy IN uc yoo GL6LOL Z 0 ysung ZZ9L P Ee ASNS ZHN L MSJc enig Jays see abuey u16ue UuJ9jjed sung Jet 9je1 Bug dem uonenjeA3 jueuiuBiv ynsey ulayed 10 Q24e9S J
140. 4 usN 39d3 dayuey 8 7 YSWO 3904 7 y GLivvl e o uengd Srl OOSL 3903 pezueeur zHWeege04z MSd8 8 LE Sd8 3933 cav WS Juge C ANON ZH NSO jsungss G8 g o uengd 98 08v WS 0 MSWD 80 2 MSW 299V WSO sang 191092 Logs WSO ANON ZH ws Ka enb vvL Oopuened Srl og4 WSO 7 0 MSWD e c8 0 2 ASWA 914 WSS cas WS9 m ysunquol Ja C HNON ZHM Ws eziuoJu2 vvL Oorueped 8v4 ogs WS9 Ps 0 MSND t c90 c MSING UAS Weg ZOSL WSS Jejuo E ANON ZH WSO jsungrew GZ LZvL GO o Wweped Srl 0OSL WSS 0 MSWD 80 2 ASNA JON WSS Weg J93 Spam abuey u16ue UJ9jjed sang Jet 9je1 Budden uonenj eA3 juswublyiy ynsey ulayed 10 YOURS 104 YOIeAS l1g eudiv juusueJ Joquis uone npolN puepuejs Jopjo4 sbuijes pue spsepuejs pauljapasd Jo S17 6L Z o qe Predefined Standards and Settings Z asind LOSL WVvOcC MOJEN ue 3903 JSH T903 m C edeus MOJEN mue me Weg esind mou 3903 uen wv S Z4i v op weHed 11 E ue 36a3 ueN3Oq3 zM sze WvozE v u oce 3903 LOSI Weg L HSH a903 UNITY g C MSH 3903 BEEN 49 U99 00S1 Weg edeug esind YSH We GLZLL v or uened LL U ue 3633 j epw3oqd3 zum gege Weg 09173903 eege esing bOSL WV09 MOLEN ue 39q3 ee C edeus MOJEN euer me Wvo9 asind wo 4903 usH wv GLZLL v o ruemed LL V ue 3533 ueN3oq3 zHWSze Weg 09173903 LU LOS
141. 500 kHz 40 MHz nominal e RBW s 500 kHz 6 MHz nominal FFT mode e RBW gt 20 kHz 40 MHz nominal e RBW s 20 kHz 6 MHz nominal Note Be aware that in auto sweep type mode due to a possible change in sweep types the bandwidth may vary considerably for the same RBW setting The R amp S FSV is triggered as soon as the trigger level is exceeded around the selected frequency start frequency in the frequency sweep The start of a sweep is not triggered Once a measurement is com pleted another is started immediately Remote command TRIGger lt n gt SEQuence SOURce on page 329 TRIGger lt n gt SEQuence LEVel IFPower on page 327 For digital input TRIGger lt n gt SEQuence LEVe1 BBPower on page 326 Trigger Offset Opens an edit dialog box to enter the time offset between the trigger signal and the start of the sweep The time may be entered in s or in symbols offset 0 Start of the sweep is delayed offset 0 Sweep starts earlier pre trigger Only possible for span 0 e g UO Analyzer mode and gated trigger Switched off Maximum allowed range limited by the sweep time pretrigger max sweep time When using the R amp S Digital UO Interface R amp S FSV B17 with UO Ana lyzer mode the maximum range is limited by the number of pretrigger samples See the R amp S Digital UO Interface R amp S FSV B17 description in the base unit Configuring VSA measurements
142. 511 727 242 206 FTO 173 105 631 011 Jg dg Au du a a 527 046 104 004 106 lt Comment gt lt Base gt lt ModulationOrder gt lt ResultLength gt 341 366 632 073 607 235 507 476 330 522 Ju Et ALG LLL 635 047 125 415 723 344 446 514 600 677 7 lt Data gt 341 366 632 073 607 235 507 476 330 522 JI ACER LLL 635 047 125 415 723 344 446 514 600 677 7 7 Data 341 366 632 073 607 235 507 476 330 522 Ju ACER XY 63435 047 125 415 723 344 446 514 600 677 7 77 Data 341 366 632 073 607 235 507 476 330 522 rt ACER E 635 047 125 415 723 344 446 514 600 677 Data 341 366 632 073 607 235 507 476 330 522 Tu ALE FLY XXX 35 047 125 415 723 344 R amp S FSV K70 Instrument Functions for Vector Signal Analysis ap EEE EE EE EE ee ee ee el 241 264 773 111 337 446 514 600 67 lt Data gt lt RS_VSA KNOWN DATA FILE 3 3 8 Working with Limits for Modulation Accuracy Measurements The results of a modulation accuracy measurement can be checked for violation of defined limits automatically If limit check is activated and the measured values exceed the limits those values are indicated in red in the result summary table If limit check is activated and no values exceed the limits the checked values are indicated in green B Result Summary l 0 00 0 00 0 00 Gain Imbalance Quadrature Error Amplitude Droop Limits and the limit check are configured in the Limits dialog box that is
143. 6 Pi 4 16QAM 32 32QAM 32 Pi 4 32QAM 64 64QAM 128 128QAM 256 256QAM Setting parameters lt QAMNState gt numeric value RST 16 Example DDEM FORM QAM Switches QAM demodulation on DDEM QAM NST 64 Switches 64QAM demodulation on Mode VSA SENSe DDEMod QPSK FORMat lt Name gt This command defines the demodulation order for QPSK FORMat Order NORMal QPSK DIFFerential DQPSK SENSe subsystem FORMat Order OFFSet OQPSK DPI4 Pl 4 DQPSK Setting parameters lt Name gt NORMal DIFFerential DPI4 OFFSet RST NORMal Example DDEM FORM QPSK Switches QPSK demodulation on DDEM QPSK FORM DPI4 Switches pi 4 DQPSK demodulation on Mode VSA Manual operation See Modulation Order on page 149 SENSe DDEMod RLENgth AUTO lt RecLengthAuto gt This command switches the automatic adaptation of the capture length on or off The automatic adaptation is performed so that a sufficient capture length is set as a func tion of result length burst and pattern search and network specific characteristics e g burst and frame structure Setting parameters lt RecLengthAuto gt ON OFF RST ON Example DDEM RLEN AUTO OFF Does not set RLENgth automatically Mode VSA Manual operation See Capture Length Auto on page 158 SENSe DDEMod RLENgth VALue lt RecordLength gt This command defines the capture length for further processing e g
144. 66 Y Axis Reference Position Ranges Opens an edit dialog field to define a reference position for the y axis as a percentage value where 0 refers to the bottom edge 100 refers to the top edge of the Screen The y axis is adapted so that the Y Axis Reference Value is displayed at the reference position For details see chapter 3 3 3 Changing the Display Scaling on page 189 Remote command DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe RPOSition on page 265 Y Axis Autorange Ranges Adapts the y axis to the current measurement results only once not dynamically in the focussed window To adapt the range of all screens together use the Y Axis Auto Range All Screens function For more information see e Y Axis Auto Range All Screens on page 123 Remote command DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe AUTO VALue on page 263 Ranges statistic measurements Opens a submenu to define the display range for statistic displays see Result Type Transformation on page 183 X Axis Quantize Ranges statistic measurements Defines the number of bars to be displayed in the graph i e the granularity of classifi cations Remote command CALCulate lt n gt STATistics SCALe X BCOunt on page 253 X Axis Reference Value Ranges statistic measurements Opens an edit dialog field to define a reference value for the x axis in the current unit Remote command DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe
145. 84 CALCulate lt n gt STATistics PRESet This command sets both axis of the statistics measurement to measurement depend ent default values Suffix lt n gt 1 4 Example CALC STAT PRES Usage Event Mode VSA Manual operation See Default Settings on page 119 CALCulate lt n gt STATistics SCALe AUTO lt AutoMode gt Sets the x axis of the statistics measurement depending on the measured values Suffix lt n gt 1 4 Setting parameters lt AutoMode gt ONCE Example CALC3 STAT SCAL AUTO ONCE Usage Setting only Mode VSA Manual operation See Adjust Settings on page 119 CALCulate lt n gt STATistics SCALe X BCOunt lt StatisticsNofColumns gt This command defines the number of columns for the statistical distribution Suffix lt n gt 1 4 Setting parameters StatisticsNofColumnssumeric value Range 2 to 1024 RST 101 Default unit NONE Example CALC STAT SCAL X BCO 10 Sets the number of columns to 10 Mode VSA CALCulate subsystem Manual operation See X Axis Quantize on page 118 CALCulate lt n gt STATistics SCALe Y LOWer Value This command defines the lower limit for the y axis of the diagram in statistical mea surements Since probabilities are specified on the y axis the entered numeric values are dimensionless Suffix lt n gt selects the screen Parameters lt Value gt 1E 9 to 0 1 RST 1E 6 Example CALC STAT SCAL Y LOW 0 001 Manual operation See
146. AC CuracvOOFFsercMEAN MAL ue nennen ennt enne CAlCulate cnz LUlMrMACCuracvOOFFserPEAkKVAL ue CALOulate n LIMit MACCuracy PERRor PCURrent VALue essent ener CALOCulate n LIMit MACCuracy PERRor PMEan VALue essen eene rennen CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy PERRor PPEak VALue CALOulate n LIMit MACCuracy PERRor RCURrent VALue CALOCulate n LIMit MACCuracy PERRor RMEan VALue esses CALOulate n LIMit MACCuracy PERRor RPEak VALue esee nennen eren rennen CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy RHO CURRent VALue a CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy RHO MEAN VALue essent rennen rennes senes CALOCulate n LIMit MACCuracy RHO PEAK VALue essere nnne rennen nennen CAL Culate lt n gt LIMit dee Een KE GALGulatesn MARKersmc AOFEF tort rr tirer rene rege oa XR Ee sets cova sabauesed NENEA F EATER iS CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion DDEMod STATistic ADRoop CAlCulate nzMAbker mzFUNGionDDEMod STATS ALL CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion DDEMod STATistic CFERror essen 227 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion DDEMod STATistic EVM essen 228 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion DDEMod STATistic FDERror 5229 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion DDEMod STATistic FSK CFDRIft eese 230 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion DDEMod STATistic FSK DER
147. ALIGnment DEFault Alignment This command defines where the relevant event reference point is to appear in the result range Suffix n 1 4 irrelevant lt t gt 1 6 irrelevant Setting parameters lt Alignment gt LEFT CENTer RIGHt LEFT The reference point is displayed at the left edge of the result range CENTer The reference point is displayed in the middle of the result range RIGHt The reference point is displayed at the right edge of the result range RST LEFT Example CALC TRAC ADJ ALIG LEFT The reference point is displayed at the left edge CALCulate subsystem Mode VSA Manual operation See Alignment on page 172 CALCulate lt n gt TRACe lt t gt ADJust VALue Reference This command defines the reference point for the display Suffix lt n gt 1 4 irrelevant lt t gt 1 6 irrelevant Setting parameters Reference TRIGger BURSt PATTern TRIGger The reference point is the start of the capture buffer BURSt The reference point is the burst PATTern The instrument selects the reference point and the alignment RST TRIGger Example CALC TRAC ADJ BURS Defines the reference point as the burst Mode VSA Manual operation See Reference on page 172 CALCulate lt n gt TRACe lt t gt VALue lt TrRefType gt This commands selects the meas or the ref signal for a trace Suffix lt n gt 1 4 lt t gt 1 6 Setting parameters lt TrRefType gt MEAS REF
148. ATTern CONFigure AUTO lt AutoConfigure gt This command sets the IQ correlation threshold to its default value Setting parameters lt AutoConfigure gt ON OFF RST ON Example SENS DDEM SEAR PATT CONF AUTO ON Mode VSA Manual operation See Auto Configuration on page 166 SENSe DDEMod SEARch PATTern SYNC STATe lt FastSync gt Switches fast synchronization on and off if you manually synchronize with a waveform pattern Setting parameters lt FastSync gt ON OFF RST OFF Mode VSA Manual operation See Coarse Synchronization on page 177 SENSe DDEMod SEARch PATTern SYNC AUTO lt UseWfmForSync gt This command selects manual or automatic synchronization with a pattern waveform to speed up measurements Setting parameters lt UseWfmForSync gt AUTO MANual RST AUTO Mode VSA Manual operation See Coarse Synchronization on page 177 SENSe DDEMod SEARch SYNC AUTO lt AutoPatternSearch gt This command links the pattern search to the type of signal When a signal is marked as patterned pattern search is switched on automatically Setting parameters lt AutoPatternSearch gt AUTO MANual RST AUTO Example DDEM SEAR SYNC AUTO Enables auto pattern search SENSe subsystem Mode VSA Manual operation See Auto On Off on page 166 SENSe DDEMod SEARch SYNC CATalog lt Patterns gt This command reads the names of all patterns stored on the hard disk
149. After the IF Filter only for RF input operation bandwidth 40 MHz e After the digital hardware section The phase and amplitude distortions of the IF filter have been compensated for Usually the I Q data has a usable bandwidth of about 0 8 sample rate 0 8 symbol rate Capture Oversampling For details refer to chapter 2 2 1 I D Bandwidth on page 14 The I Q data s sample rate and bandwidth automatically scale themselves with the set symbol rate For most modulated signals even the smallest allowed value for Capture Oversampling leads to a sufficient UO data bandwidth The whole spec trum of the input signal is captured but most adjacent channels and interferers are effectively suppressed Only for very wide signals FSK no TX filter used it can be necessary to try higher values for Capture Oversampling see Capture Oversam pling on page 159 increasing the UO bandwidth The UO data delivered to the DSP section has no considerable amplitude or phase distortion and a suitable bandwidth usable UO bandwidth achieved for the current settings see IO Capture o The UO Capture dialog of the vector signal analysis shows the sample rate and the on page 157 e After the optional measurement filter The measurement signal and the reference signal can be filtered by various mea surement filters which have different bandwidths The filters described above are the ones that directly affect the bandwidth of the cap
150. Average FSK deviation error RPE Peak FSK deviation error SDEV Standard deviation of FSK deviation error PCTL 95 percentile value of FSK deviation error RST PEAK Query only VSA CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion DDEMod STATistic FSK CFDRift lt type gt This command queries the results of the carrier frequency drift for FSK modulated sig nals Suffix lt n gt lt m gt Query parameters lt type gt Usage Mode 1 4 screen number 1 4 irrelevant lt none gt Carrier frequency drift for current sweep AVG Average FSK carrier frequency drift RPE Peak FSK carrier frequency drift SDEV Standard deviation of FSK carrier frequency drift PCTL 95 percentile value of FSK carrier frequency drift RST PEAK Query only VSA CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion DDEMod STATistic FSK DERRor type This command queries the results of the frequency error of FSK modulated signals Suffix lt n gt lt m gt Query parameters lt type gt Usage Mode CALCulate subsystem 1 4 screen number 1 4 irrelevant lt none gt Frequency error for current sweep AVG Average frequency error over several sweeps RPE Frequency error over several sweeps SDEV Standard deviation of frequency error PCTL 95 percentile value of frequency error PEAK Maximum frequency error over all symbols of current sweep PAVG Average of maximum frequency
151. CURRent STB s TIO STAT QUES MOD 1Q DEER CFRequency STAT QUES MOD CFR MAGNitude STAT QUES MOD MAGN PHASe STAT QUES MOD PHAS EVM STAT QUES MOD EVM STATus QUEStionable MODulation lt 1 2 3 4 gt Fig 5 1 Overview of VSA specific status registers 5 4 STATus QUEStionable Register eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenenennennnnnn nnne nennen 332 5 2 STATus QUEStionable SYNC lt n gt ReQiSter ccccccceseeccceeeeseeeeeeeseneeeseeeesneeseeeesenes 333 5 3 STATus QUEStionable MODulation lt n gt Register eene 333 5 4 STATus QUESTionable MODulation lt n gt EVM Register eee 334 5 5 STATus QUESTionable MODulation lt n gt PHASe Register 334 5 6 STATus QUESTionable MODulation lt n gt MAGnitude Register 335 Operating Manual 1176 7578 02 05 331 5 7 5 8 5 9 5 1 STATus QUEStionable Register STATus QUESTionable MODulation lt n gt CFRequency Register 335 STATus QUESTionable MODulation lt n gt IQRHO Register 335 STATus QUESTionable MODulation lt n gt FSK Register 336 STATus QUEStionable Register This register contains information about indefinite states which may occur if the instru ment is operated without meeting the specifications or defined limits It can be read using the commands STATus QUEStionable CO
152. Carrier Frequency Error EVM Error Vector Magnitude FDERror Frequency deviation error FSK only FERRor Frequency error FSK only MERRor Magnitude Error OOFFset UO Offset PERRor Phase Error RHO Rho lt LimitType gt CURRent MEAN PEAK PCURRent PMEan PPEak RCURRent RMEan RPEak For CFERor OOFFset RHO CURRent MEAN PEAK For EVM FDERror FERRor MERRor PERRor PCURRent Peak current value PMEan Peak mean value PPEak Peak peak value RCURRent RMS current value RMEan RMS mean value RPEak RMS peak value Query parameters lt LimitResult gt Example Usage Mode CALCulate subsystem NONE PASS FAIL MARGIN NONE No limit check result available yet PASS All values have passed the limit check FAIL At least one value has exceeded the limit MARGIN currently not used RST NONE CALC2 FEED XTIM DDEM MACC Switch on result summary in screen 2 CALC2 LIM MACC CFER CURR VAL 100 Hz define a limit of 100 100 CALC2 LIM MACC CFER CURR STAT ON Switch limit check ON INIT IMM WAI do single measurement CALC2 LIM MACC CFER CURR RESULT query result Query only VSA CALCulate n LIMit MACCuracy CFERror CURRent VALue lt LimitValue gt CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy CFERror MEAN VALue lt LimitValue gt CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy CFERror PEAK VALue lt LimitValue gt This command defines the limit for the current
153. Constellation I Q Rotated l i Constellation Frequency Vector Frequency Result Type Transformation for Screen A Normal C Spectrum C Statistics Display Points Sym lV auto Sore E 181 elle Ill EESE C 181 cop i MP 181 icc 182 Result Type E E le BE 183 Display le DE 184 OVERSAIDNN ME 184 Screen X active If enabled the screen the tab corresponds to is displayed If fewer than 4 screens are enabled the remaining screens are enlarged to make best use of the available display Remote command DISPlay WINDow lt n gt STATe on page 259 Highlight Symbols If enabled the symbol instants are highlighted as squares in the screen for measured and reference signals in time normal display as well as error displays Not all measurements support this function Remote command DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe t SYMBol on page 260 Source You can choose which signal source is to be displayed from the following options Configuring VSA measurements Source Description Capture Buffer The captured UO data Meas amp Ref The measurement signal or the ideal reference signal or both Symbols The detected symbols i e the detected bits Error Vector Modulation Errors The difference between the complex measurement signal and the complex reference signal Modulation measu
154. DE on page 259 Average lt Trace 1 Trace 2 Trace 3 Trace 4 Trace 5 Trace 6 The average is formed over several sweeps The Statistics Count determines the num ber of averaging procedures This mode is not available for statistics measurements Remote command DISP TRAC MODE AVER see DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt MODE on page 259 View Trace 1 Trace 2 Trace 3 Trace 4 Trace 5 Trace 6 The current contents of the trace memory are frozen and displayed Note If a trace is frozen the instrument settings apart from level range and reference level see below can be changed without impact on the displayed trace The fact that the displayed trace no longer matches the current instrument setting is indicated by the icon on the tab label If the level range or reference level is changed the R amp S FSV automatically adapts the measured data to the changed display range This allows an amplitude zoom to be made after the measurement in order to show details of the trace Remote command DISP TRAC MODE VIEW see DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt MODE on page 259 Blank Trace 1 Trace 2 Trace 3 Trace 4 Trace 5 Trace 6 Hides the selected trace Remote command DISP TRAC OFF see DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt STATe on page 260 Softkeys and Menu Overview for Vector Signal Analysis R amp S FSV K70 Evaluation Meas Ref Trace 1 Trace 2 Trace 3 Trace 4 Trace 5 T
155. Digital UO device specific This bit is set if a connection error occurs at the R amp S Digital UO Interface R amp S FSV B17 option see STATus QUEStionable DIQ register 15 This bit is always 0 5 2 STATus QUEStionable SYNC lt n gt Register 5 3 This register contains application specific information about synchronization errors or errors during burst detection for each window in each VSA channel It can be queried with commands STATus QUEStionable SYNC CONDition on page 322 and STATus QUI EStionable SYNC EVENt on page 323 Table 5 2 Status error bits in STATus QUEStionable SYNC register for R amp S FSV K70 Bit Definition 0 Burst not found This bit is set if a burst could not be detected 1 Sync not found This bit is set if the sync sequence pattern of the midamble could not be detected 2to 14 Not used 15 This bit is always O STATus QUEStionable MODulation lt n gt Register This register comprises information about any limit violations that may occur after demodulation in any of the four windows It can be queried with commands STATus QUEStionable MODulation lt n gt CONDition on page 318 and STATus QUEStionable MODulation lt n gt EVENt on page 318 Bit No Meaning 0 Error in EVM evaluation 1 Error in Phase Error evaluation 2 Error in Magnitude Error evaluation 3 Error in Carrier Frequency evaluation 4 Erro
156. EAR SYNC NAME GSM TSCO Selects the pattern DDEM SEAR SYNC COPY GSM PATT Copies GSM TSCO to GSM PATT Usage Setting only Mode VSA SENSe DDEMod SEARch SYNC DATA Data This command defines the sync sequence of a sync pattern The pattern must have been selected before using the DDEM SEARch SYNC NAME command see SENSe DDEMod SEARch SYNC NAME on page 308 Important The value range of a symbol depends on the degree of modulation e g for an 8PSK modulation the value range is from 0 to 7 The degree of modulation belongs to the pattern and is set using the DDEM SEAR SYNC NST command see SENSe DDEMod SEARch SYNC NSTate on page 308 For details on defining patterns see To create a new pattern on page 196 Setting parameters Data string Four values represent a symbol hexadecimal format The value range of a symbol depends on the degree of modulation With a degree of modulation of 4 all symbols have a value range of 0000 0001 0002 0003 with a degree of modulation of 8 0000 0001 0002 0003 0004 0005 0006 0007 Mode VSA Manual operation See Edit on page 168 See New on page 168 See Symbols on page 170 SENSe DDEMod SEARch SYNC DELete This command deletes a sync sequence The sync sequence to be deleted must have been selected before using the DDEM SEARch SYNC NAME command see SENSe DDEMod SEARch SYNC NAME on p
157. EDDEMOd QAM NST le 1 2 Ett ot Da t edad dete Rd t rtp S SENSeE DDEMOd QPSK FORMal ere ele cuo itae SEENEN SENSE EDDEMOG REENGUNEA E uicti tectae ee Eed eeneg SENSe DDEMod RLENgth VALue SENSeEDDEMOGQG SBANG 1 rrr niri ee i recevra e te evi Era aie EE E CROP EE ain evo eua ud SENSe DDEMod SEARCh BURSUAUT O c ccsccccrsecsecsecscesesnsesseuacaeseceateatarcntsnateecannentsaceamarnetaesseeacssenteniees 300 IEN Gel DDE Mod GEAbRch BURG CGONoure AUTO 200 IEN Gel DDE Mod GEAbRch BURG GL ENobt MiNtmmum AA 301 IGENZGel DDE Mod GEARch BURGCLENGhMANImum eene nnne nnne 301 IEN Gel DDE Mod GEAbRch BURG ENG MiNimum AAA 301 SENSe DDEMod SEARch BURSt MODE SENS DDE Mod GEARch BURG GKID FEAL mg 302 SENSeEDDEMOQG SEARCh BURSESKIP RISIFIg cotton edocs ce etna oue ge d 302 SENSe DDEMod SEARCH BURSES TAT sz niii tte Eet edd Bd EES 303 IEN Gel DDE Mod GEAbRch BURG TOL erance A 303 SENSeEDDEMOQG SEARCIEMBURSEGALOC 5 1 1 pert cete cpi trece eget cer ee et dede deg 303 IEN Gel DDE Mod GEAbRch PDATTerm CONFioure AUTO 304 SENSe DDEMod SEARch PATTern SYNC AUTO Se IEN Gel DDEMod GEAbRchPDATTemSvNCTSTATel E SENSe DDEMod SEARCH SY NG AU TO DEE SENSe DDEMod SEARch SYNG CATAlOQ 0 cc senccsececeaesoiscnseseenesneeseeanesenivnateneqannensatenerencenessueatsseceanises SENSe DDEMod SEARch SYNC COMMeN caer c bna epp receta cur nd gp ducc eda Pe VT vH YR c SENSeEDDEMOG SEARCGIESYNGO GOPB
158. ENSe ADJust CONFigure LEVel DURatiOn 1o eer terrent hin rrr eim t erred 283 SENSe ADJust CONFigure LEVel DURation MODE eee cece cence anii nnenne 284 SEN ele REENEN SENSe FREQuency CENTer STEP SENSe FREQuency CENTer STEP AUTO i irte b tt cb ta RE e dE 315 SENSe FREQUuency OFF E 315 SENSe ADJUSELEV EE 284 SENSeEDDEMod ECALG OEFEF S6t tette rte e meret eet Eden e Eee Pe ee fardin nieda ins Trenne aS 284 SENSeEDDEMod ECADG MODEL tides cort p atre eco decode a A ep Verre RIS dE ELA E 284 SENSeEDDEMod EPRalte AUTO rto tr eret rte rrr iere kr re ER ELE KR SERERE EE EHE Rd 285 SENSeEDDBEMod EPRate VALUe iti trn et tre Re terne er Riu red RR RERO e 285 SENSeEDDEMod FAGToryE VALUS F ssec voten oca teet rs a 286 SENSeEDDBDEMOGQ FIETOrt E s riae erro rer Cir ctr era E ineat eie RR ORE ecce a eoa REPRE Ye 286 SENSeEDDEMod FIETet S FAT eto erai ade tarn Le tree ta ee ep puente tha ed ENEE 286 SENSe DDEMod FORMat SENSe DDEMod FSK NSTate SENSe DDEMOd iF SYNGAU TO tt neret e trc po reel n ener cae Fe Fee Feo ota dts e Ee audet 287 SENSeEDDEMOG E de 288 SENSe DDEMod FF SYNGIRESUI EE 288 SENSeEDBEMod FSYNC MODBE t n treni rh ce rb tn e ra er Feat ea e rera ENEE 288 SENSeEDDEMOQG KBATASTATO iiit tai echte UR c car rud ep RE Ee lS caer eine D EUR EE uS dE du E Res a e Lud SENSe DDEMod KDATa NAME SENSe DDEMod MAPPING CA Talog ueteri t
159. ER error bits number of analyzed bits As a prerequisite for this measurement the R amp S FSV K70 application must know which bit sequences are correct i e which bit sequences may occur This knowledge must be provided as a list of possible data sequences in xml format which is loaded in the R amp S FSV K70 see chapter 3 3 7 Working With Known Data Files on page 199 If such a file is loaded in the application the BER result display is available Available for source types Modulation Accuracy Note that this measurement may take some time as each symbol decision must be compared to the possible data sequences one by one The BER measurement is an indicator for the quality of the demodulated signal High BER values indicate problems such as inadequate demodulation settings poor quality in the source data e false or missing sequences in the Known Data file result range alignment leads to a mismatch of the input data with the defined sequences A BER value of 0 5 means that for at least one measurement no matching sequence was found See also chapter 3 3 7 1 Dependencies and Restrictions when Using Known Data on page 199 3 1 2 B Bit Error Rate Bit Error Rate Total of Errors Total of Bits Measurement Result Display 0 003 577 107 216 59940 The following information is provided in the BER result display in full view e Bit Error Rate error bit
160. ER_GSM on Mode VSA Manual operation See Load Standard on page 114 For predefined standards the following short forms can be used 3G_WCDMA_FWD 3G_WCDMA 3G_WCDMA_REV 3G_WCDMA APCO25_C4FM APCO25 CQPSK Bluetooth DH1 Bluetooth DH3 Bluetooth DH5 CDMA2K 1X FWD F1CD SENSe subsystem CDMA2K_1X_REV R1CD DECT_P32_FixedPart DECT_FP DECT_P32_PortablePart DVB_S2_16APSK DVB_S2_32APSK DVB_S2_8PSK DVB_S2_QPSK EDGE_NB EDGE_8PSK EDGE_NormalBurst EDGE_8PSK EDGE_16QAM EDGE_32QAM F1CD CDMA2K 1X FWD GSM AB GSM AccessBurst GSM FB GSM FrequencyBurst GSM GSM NormalBurst GSM AB GSM AccessBurst GSM FB GSM FrequencyBurst GSM NB GSM NormalBurst GSM SB GSM SynchronisationBurst TETRA NCDOWN TETRA ContinousDownlink TETRA NDDOWN TETRA DiscontinuousDownlink ZIGBEE BPSK 868M 300K ZIGBEE BPSK 915M 600K ZIGBEE OQPSK 2450M 1M SENSe DDEMod PSK FORMat Name Together with DDEMod PSK NST this command defines the demodulation order for PSK see also SENSe DDEMod PSK NSTate on page 297 Depending on the demodulation format and state the following orders are available NSTATe Format Order 2 any BPSK 8 NORMal 8PSK 8 DIFFerential D8PSK SENSe subsystem NSTATe Format Order 8 N3Pi8 3pi 8 8PSK EDGE 8 PI8D8PSK Pi 8 D8PSK Setting parameters Name NORMal DIFFerential N3Pi8 PI8BD8PSK RST QPSK Ex
161. Ee e 268 FORMat DEXPort DSEParator lt Separator gt This command defines which decimal separator decimal point or comma is to be used for outputting measurement data to the file in ASCII format Different languages of evaluation programs e g MS Excel can thus be supported Parameters lt Separator gt POINt COMMA RST factory setting is POINt RST does not affect set ting Example FORM DEXP DSEP POIN Sets the decimal point as separator Manual operation See ASCII Trace Export on page 129 FORMat DEXPort HEADer lt Header gt This command defines if an extended file header including start frequency sweep time detector etc is created or not A short header with the instrument model the version and the date is always transferred Setting parameters lt Header gt ON OFF RST OFF Example FORM DEXP HEAD OFF Only a short file header is transferred Mode VSA Manual operation See ASCII Trace Export on page 129 FORMat DEXPort MODE lt Mode gt This command defines whether raw UO data or trace data is transferred Setting parameters lt Mode gt RAW TRACe RST TRACe Example FORM DEXP MODE RAW Raw measurement data is transferred Mode VSA Manual operation See ASCII Trace Export on page 129 INITiate Subsystem 4 6 INITiate Subsystem lu el 269 Natie IC hie TEEN 269 EINEN ER OT EE 270 INITiate EE 270 INITiate lt n gt CONMeas This command
162. F Example DDEM SEAR SYNC ON Switches the sync search on Mode VSA Manual operation See Pattern Search On on page 168 SENSe DDEMod SEARch SYNC TEXT lt Text gt This command defines a text to explain the pattern The text is displayed only in the selection menu manual control This text should be short and concise Detailed infor mation about the pattern is given in the comment see SENSe DDEMod SEARch SYNC COMMent on page 305 SENSe subsystem Setting parameters lt Text gt string Example SENS DDEM SEAR SYNC NAME GSM 1 Selects the GSM 1 pattern DDEM SEAR SYNC DATA 1001 Enter pattern 1001 DDEM SEAR SYNC TEXT TEST S25 Enter text for the GSM 1 pattern Mode VSA Manual operation See Edit on page 168 See New on page 168 See Description on page 170 SENSe DDEMod SIGNal PATTern lt PatternedSignal gt This command specifies whether the signal contains a pattern or not Setting parameters PatternedSignal ON OFF RST OFF Mode VSA Manual operation See Pattern on page 152 SENSe DDEMod SIGNal VALue lt SignalType gt This command specifies whether the signal is bursted or continuous Setting parameters lt SignalType gt CONTinuous BURSted RST CONTinuous Mode VSA Manual operation See Continuous Signal Burst Signal on page 152 SENSe DDEMod SRATe lt SymbolRate gt This command defines the symb
163. Hz Res Len 148 SGL ResRange Count 109 BURST PATTERN B Result Summary Urren Me an m ci Phase Error Peak Magnitude Error RMS Carrier Frequency Error IQ Imbalance Gain Imbalance Quadrature Error Amplitude Droop Fig 3 17 Result summary display for Modulation Accuracy If the result summary display is not given the entire screen width or height only the o information indicated by an below is displayed see also chapter 3 3 1 6 Display Configuration on page 180 If the result summary is queried using remote com mands all available information is provided For more information see chapter 7 1 2 1 PSK QAM and MSK Modulation on page 360 The following results are displayed e EVM Error Vector Magnitude RMS Peak SCPI command CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion DDEMod STATistic EVM on page 228 e MER Modulation Error Ratio RMS Peak SCPI command CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion DDEMod STATistic SNR on page 238 e Phase Error RMS Peak SCPI command CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion DDEMod STATistic PERRor on page 236 e Magnitude Error RMS Peak SCPI command CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion DDEMod STATistic MERRor on page 234 e Carrier Frequency Error SCPI command CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion DDEMod STATistic CFERror on page 227 Operating Manual 1176 7578 02 05 96 Measu
164. IVision Range This remote command determines the grid spacing on the Y axis for all diagrams where possible Suffix n 1 4 lt t gt 1 6 irrelevant Setting parameters lt Range gt numeric value Range 1 to 1000000 RST 100 Default unit NONE Example DISP TRAC1 Y PDIV 2 dB Mode VSA DISPlay subsystem DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe RLEVel lt ReferenceLevel gt This command defines the reference level With the reference level offset 0 the value range of the reference level is modified by the offset Suffix lt n gt irrelevant lt t gt irrelevant Parameters lt ReferenceLevel gt The unit is variable Range see datasheet RST 10dBm Example DISP TRAC Y RLEV 60dBm Manual operation See Reference Level on page 117 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe RLEVel OFFSet Value This command defines a reference level offset Suffix lt n gt irrelevant lt t gt irrelevant Parameters lt Value gt Range 200 to 200 RST 0 Default unit dB Example DISP TRAC Y RLEV OFFS 10dB Manual operation See Ref Level Offset on page 122 See Ref Level Offset on page 156 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe RPOSition Position This command defines the position of the reference level on the display grid When using a tracking generator only with option R amp S FSV B9 or B10 requires active normalization and in Bluetooth mode
165. If Auto is selected pattern search is enabled automatically if Pattern is selected in the Signal Description tab of the Modulation amp Signal Description dialog box see Pattern on page 152 Remote command SENSe DDEMod SEARch SYNC MODE on page 307 SENSe DDEMod SEARch SYNC AUTO on page 304 Meas only if pattern symbols correct If enabled measurement results are only displayed and averaged if a valid pattern has been found For measurements of signals with patterns that are averaged over several sweeps this option should be enabled so that erroneous measurements do not affect the result of averaging Remote command SENSe DDEMod SEARch SYNC MODE on page 307 Auto Configuration Configures the pattern search automatically If enabled the 1 Q Correlation Threshold setting is not available Remote command SENSe DDEMod SEARch PATTern CONFigure AUTO on page 304 UO Correlation Threshold Auto Configuration The UO correlation threshold decides whether a match is accepted or not during a pat tern search see also chapter 3 3 5 Working with Pattern Searches on page 194 If the parameter is set to 100 only UO patterns that match totally with the input signal are found This is only the case for infinite SNR The default value is 9096 As long as the pattern is found there is no need to change this parameter However if the pattern is very short approxi
166. Inter face Module R amp SGDiglConf Software Operating Manual Note If you close the R amp S DiglConf window using the Close icon the window is minimized not closed If you select the File gt Exit menu item in the R amp S DiglConf window the application is closed Note that in this case the settings are lost and the EX IQ BOX functionality is no longer available until you restart the application using the DiglConf softkey in the R amp S FSV once again Remote command Remote commands for the R amp S DiglConf software always begin with SOURce EBOX Such commands are passed on from the R amp S FSV to the R amp S DiglConf automatically which then configures the R amp S EX IQ BOX via the USB connection All remote commands available for configuration via the R amp S DiglConf software are described in the R amp SGEX IQ BOX Digital Interface Module R amp SGDiglConf Software Operating Manual Example 1 SOURCe EBOX RST SOURCe EBOX IDN Result Rohde amp Schwarz DiglIConf 02 05 436 Build 47 Example 2 SOURCe EBOX USER CLOCk REFerence FREQuency 5MHZ Defines the frequency value of the reference clock Input AC DC Toggles the RF input of the R amp S FSV between AC and DC coupling Operating Manual 1176 7578 02 05 143 Softkeys and Menu Overview for Vector Signal Analysis R amp S FSV K70 This function is not available for input from the R amp S Digital UO Interface option R amp S FSV
167. K70 Instrument Functions for Vector Signal Analysis gt ESE EE ee ay Note As of firmware version 1 61 the maximum mixer level allowed is 0 dBm Mixer levels above this value may lead to incorrect measurement results which are indicated by the OVLD status display The increased mixer level allows for an improved signal but also increases the risk of overloading the instrument Remote command INPut ATTenuation on page 271 RF Atten Auto Mech Att Auto Sets the RF attenuation automatically as a function of the selected reference level This ensures that the optimum RF attenuation is always used It is the default setting This function is not available for input from the R amp S Digital UO Interface option R amp S FSV B17 Remote command INPut ATTenuation AUTO on page 271 El Atten On Off This softkey switches the electronic attenuator on or off This softkey is only available with option R amp S FSV B25 When the electronic attenuator is activated the mechanical and electronic attenuation can be defined separately Note however that both parts must be defined in the same mode i e either both manually or both automatically This function is not available for input from the R amp S Digital UO Interface option R amp S FSV B17 To define the mechanical attenuation use the RF Atten Manual Mech Att Manual or RF Atten Auto Mech Att Auto softkeys To define the electronic attenuation use the El Atten Mode Auto Man so
168. L Culate nz M Abker mzFUNGCHonDDEMod STATispcF DEbror 229 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion DDEMod STATistic FSK CFDRift ccceeeeeee 230 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion DDEMod STATisticcFSK DERROr 230 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion DDEMod STATistic FSK MDEViation 231 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion DDEMod STATistic FSK RDEViation 232 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion DDEMod STATistic GIMBalance 233 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion DDEMod STATistic IQIMbalance 233 CAL Culate nz M Abker mzEUNGCHonDDEMod STATispcMERbor 234 CAL Culate nz M Abker mzEUNGCHonDDEMod STATlspc MOwWer 234 CAL Culate nz M Abker mzFUNGCHonDDEMod STATispc OOFteset 235 CAL Culate nz M bkermmzFUNGCHonDDEMod STATisptcPERor 236 CAL Culate nz M Abker mzEUNGCHonDDEMod STATispc OERor 236 CAL Culate nz M Abker mzFUNGCHonDDEMod STATiepchRHO 237 CALCulate subsystem CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion DDEMod STATistic NR 238 GALGCulate n MARKersSm LINK 22 12 terr nean norit SSES EES anaa Enen aa 238 CAL Culate nz M bker mz M ANimum APtak senes nass nnns nnn snas 239 CALCulate sn MARKersm MAXImum EEF T tn deco dance tan x irm idu n ann rR Da RAT ma ddan 239 CAL Culate nz M AbkercmzMAximumNENT sensn sentarse snis 239 CAL Culate nz M Abker mzM Aximum Richt 240
169. MALUue utiachoon t rerit rrr rent snes n eere t eren ee EE KE DISPlayEWINDBowsri7 STAT6 ett repe tt nt ne ete nh ne tre nerit DISPlay WINDowsn TRAGe st de RTE DISPlay WINDowsn TRACES SYMBOL hera here E ir pee pex ngo tenen ege pue ek oer inan DISPlay WINDow n TRACe t X SCALe PDlVision esses DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt X SCALe RPOSition DISPlay WINDow n TRACe st X SCALe RVALue esses nennen nnnm eren nnnnnnene DlSblavt WiNDow nzTRACect XI SGCALelGTARtd nennen rennen nennt enne 262 DilSblavfWiNDow nzTRACectSTSGCALelVOFtset nennen DISPlay WINDowsn TRAGest Re DEE DISPlayEWINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt d Re E DISPlay WINDow n TRACe t Y SCALe AUTO ALL essent siaaa ia DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe AUTO VALue DISPlay WINDow n TRACe t Y SCALe MODE essent nennen eren rennen DISPlay WINDow n TRACe t Y SCALe RLEVVel essent DISPlay WINDow n TRACe t Y SCALe RLEVel OFFSet essere enne DISPlay WINDow n TRACe t Y SCALe RPOSition eeesesssseeeeeeeneeeenee nenne DISPlay WINDow n TRACe t Y SCALe RVALue sess radican DISPlay WINDow n TRACe t Y SCALe PDlVision essent DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt STATe DISPlay WINDowsn g
170. MMEMory STORe IQ STATe on page 278 Mode A CDMA EVDO IQ TDS VSA WCDMA MMEMory STORe lt n gt TRACe Trace Path This command stores the selected trace in the specified window in a file with ASCII for mat The file format is described in chapter 3 4 2 ASCII File Export Format for VSA Data on page 206 The decimal separator decimal point or comma for floating point numerals contained in the file is defined with the FORMat DEXPort DSEParator command see FORMat DEXPort DSEParator on page 268 Suffix n window For applications that do not have more than 1 measure ment window the suffix lt n gt is irrelevant Setting parameters Trace 1to6 selected measurement trace Path DOS file name The file name includes indication of the path and the drive name Indication of the path complies with DOS conventions Example MMEM STOR TRAC 3 TEST ASC Stores trace 3 in the file TEST ASC Usage Setting only Mode VSA Manual operation See ASCII Trace Export on page 129 OUTPut Subsystem OUTPut DIQ lt State gt If enabled the captured IQ data is output to the R amp S Digital UO Interface in a continu ous stream This function requires the LVDS interface option R amp S FSV B17 Digital input and digital output cannot be used simultaneously Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Example OUTP DIQ ON Mode ADEMOD IQ VSA OUTPut Subsystem OUTPut DIQ
171. MS 1 error Log rant Ty Peak max MAG_ ERR n Tp Phase error RMS 1 X PHASE _ ERR n T5 Peak max PHASE ERR n T RHO correla tion coeffi 2 ESCH Y REF n meast E KKF MEAS REF S REF n V wEAsQ AKF REF AKF MEAS A122 Formulae IQ Offset C 2 2 H E H Si So i71 REF k TY Lime C 10 log Cin faB IQ Imbalance j B je o e B in l el lg 1 8o B 20 logig Brin faB Gain Imbal Zo ance G j Ghin g G 20 10810 Gin dB Quadrature Error Min ve 180 0 On deg Amplitud Droop A K A 20 10810 pin JdB Sym FSK Modulation For FSK modulation the estimation model is described in detail in section chap ter 2 6 2 FSK Modulation on page 66 The parameters of the FSK specific result summary table can be related to the distortion model parameters as follows Table 7 2 Evaluation of results in the FSK result summary Frequency Error RMS i EE FREQ _ ERR T Peak max FREQ ERR n T Magnitude Error RMS 1 MAG_ERR a Tp Y Peak max MAG_ERR n T Formulae FSK Deviation Error A rrr A yeas x A per B 1 i A per A ERR SC Estimated FSK deviation error Hz FSK Measurement Deviation A uras B Agee A ugAS Estimated FSK deviation of the meas signal Hz FSK Reference Deviation FSK reference deviation as entered by
172. Merv Start 0 0 sym B Spectrum EVM Error e1cirw z c ct ka c lt 3 LL ul Li e Start 0 0 Hz Stop 541 66666 kHz Fig 3 19 Spectrum diagram Single sided display for real input signals Measurement Result Display Ref Level 10 00 dBm Std EDGE_NormalBurst SR 270 833 kHz Att 30 dB Freq 1 8056 GHz Res Len 148 Input RF pe 1M Cirw Clrw Mbt A te oll Aach My pe EY S A A Imag Meas Ref ei cw GO EIE JL LC LL yr VS Start 0 0 sym Stop 148 0 sym B Spectrum Reallmag Meas amp Ref 1M Clrw Stop 541 66666 kHz Fig 3 20 Spectrum diagram Two sided display for complex input signals 3 1 4 Statistical Displays Statistical evaluations can be carried out for all result displays that show the time or symbols on the x axis They show the distribution i e probabilities of occurrence of the values as a set of bars o Note that only samples within the evaluation range contribute to the statistic measure ment In all statistical displays a vertical line shows the value of the 95 percentile Table 3 5 Available statistical displays depending on source type Source Type Result Type Capture Buffer Magnitude Absolute Real Imag I Q Meas amp Ref Signal Magnitude Absolute Magnitude Relative Phase Wrap Measurement Result Display Source Type Result Type Phase Unwrap Frequency Absolute Frequency Relative Real Imag l Q Error Ve
173. Message Pattern Not Entirely Within Result Range A pattern can only be found if it is entirely within the result range Therefore this error message always occurs with a Pattern Not Found error Solution Choose the pattern as reference of your result range alignment Then the pattern will be forcefully part of your result range and the pattern search can succeed For more information see e Result Range on page 170 e chapter 3 3 2 Defining the Result Range on page 186 Message Short Pattern Pattern Search Might Fail The R amp S FSV performs the pattern search in two stages e Stage 1 involves the generation of an UO pattern waveform by modulating the pat tern symbol sequence The l Q pattern is then correlated with the measured signal Operating Manual 1176 7578 02 05 343 Explanation of Error Messages At positions where the correlation metric exceeds the I Q Correlation Threshold the UO pattern is found e Stage 2 demodulates the measured signal at the I Q pattern location and the trans mitted symbols are checked for correctness against the pattern symbol sequence In case of a very short pattern i e a pattern length in the order of the inter symbol interference ISI duration a number of issues can arise False positive The UO pattern is found at positions where the transmitted symbols differ from the pattern symbols Solution Try one of the following Activate Meas only if Pattern Symbols Correct
174. NDition and STATus QUEStionable EVENt Table 5 1 Meaning of the bits used in the STATus QUEStionable register Bit No Meaning 0to2 These bits are not used 3 POWer This bit is set if a questionable power occurs see STATus QUEStionable POWer register 4 TEMPerature This bit is set if a questionable temperature occurs 5 FREQuency The bit is set if a frequency is questionable see STATus QUEStionable FREQuency regis ter 6 Not used 7 MODuUulation The bit is set if a limit violation occurs after demodulation see STATus QUEStionable MODula tion lt n gt Register 8 CALibration The bit is set if a measurement is performed unaligned UNCAL display 9 LIMit device specific This bit is set if a limit value is violated see STATus QUEStionable LIMit register 10 LMARgin device specific This bit is set if a margin is violated see STATus QUEStionable LMARgin register 11 SYNC device specific This bit is set if in measurements or pre measurements synchronization to midamble fails or no burst is found This bit is also set if in pre measurements mode the result differs too strongly from the expected value 12 ACPLimit device specific This bit is set if a limit for the adjacent channel power measurement is violated see STATus QUEStionable ACPLimit register 13 Not used STATus QUEStionable SYNC lt n gt Register Bit No Meaning 14
175. O uouees l1g eudiv juusueJ joquiAs uone npoIN puepuejs Jopjo4 Predefined Standards and Settings WL 219 waerd yis 49ju82 MSdO dOO 338 o sung 000L S E S euis JIEH ZHIN L J SHO SIZ M 009 INSL6 Jee SUON PEN veag Sam 0j 1sung 000L x KR J DL oY ZH 009 MSd8 SIZ 4931 Seo abuey u16ue uled sang Jet 9je1 Bug dem uonenjeag jueuiuBiv Unsen ulayed 10 youeas 104 yYoseas L igudiv MuISUEIL joquiAs uonejnpo pyepuejs Jeopjo4 Demodulation Overview 2 5 Demodulation Overview K70 Kernel Settings IQ Capture Buffer Burst Search BRESEEEEEEEEEEED optional Burst Search Settings ata Position Demodulation amp Femme Ll Symbol Decisions ptional Reference Signal Generation Ref Signal Measurement Measurement Filter Filtering optional Settings Demodulation Settings Display Configuration Fine Estimates Modulation amp Signal Ref Signal Result Display Fig 2 41 Demodulation stages of the vector signal analysis option R amp S FSV K70 Brief Description of Vector Signal Analysis The figure 2 41 provides an overview of the demodulation stages of the vector signal analysis option The function blocks of the signal processing kernel can be found at the left in grey and their appropriate settings at the right in blue
176. O AUTO Enables auto burst search Mode VSA Manual operation See Auto On Off on page 164 SENSe DDEMod SEARch BURSt CONFigure AUTO lt AutoConfigure gt This command sets the search tolerance and the min gap length to their default values SENSe subsystem Setting parameters lt AutoConfigure gt ON OFF RST ON Example SENS DDEM SEAR BURS CONF AUTO ON Mode VSA Manual operation See Auto Configuration on page 164 SENSe DDEMod SEARch BURSt GLENgth MINimum lt MinGapLength gt This command defines the minimum time between two bursts A minimum time with decreased level must occur between two bursts The default unit is a symbol The value can also be given in seconds Setting parameters lt MinGapLength gt numeric value Range 1 to 15000 RST 1 Default unit SYM Example DDEM SEAR BURS GLEN 3US Mode VSA Manual operation See Min Gap Length on page 164 SENSe DDEMod SEARch BURSt LENGth MAXimum lt MaxLength gt This command defines the maximum length of a burst Only those bursts will be recog nized that fall below this length The default unit is symbols The value can also be given in seconds Setting parameters lt MaxLength gt numeric value Range 0 to 15000 RST 1600 Default unit SYM Example DDEM SEAR BURS LENG MAX 156 us The maximum burst length is 156 us Mode VSA SENSe DDEMod SEARch BURSt LENGth MINimum lt UsefulLength g
177. O lt t lt 4T for 4T lt t lt 8T l 3237 2 T fin Formulae O t a f e2dr C t is the impulse response of the EDGE transmit filter 7 1 6 2 Measurement Filter EDGE Measurement filters RC filter Alpha 7 0 25 single side band 6 dB bandwith 90 kHz Windowing by multi plying the impulse response according to the following equation l 0x 1 57 w t 40 50 cosfr 1 57 225r 1 57 3757 0 Saa The following figure shows the frequency response of the standard specific measure ment filters EDGE HSR Narrow Pulse Magnitude dB 1 D DH DH D D DN D 1 1 D D 1 L i 02 04 06 08 1 12 14 16 1B 2 Frequency in feymbol Formulae EDGE HSR Wide Pulse 20 gp epniuBej Am mm mm mm ale E 100 0 8 0 6 0 4 0 2 Frequency in feymbol EDGE NSR 20 em mm e e elle aaa e e be e me e ms de e em ms mm e eck ms n e e e A em e e e nodu nacho mm em e dm mm em nnn VI gp apnyubepy 100 feymbol Frequency in w Narro Low Pass 20 X e be e mm mm mm mr d e mm cht CTTI mr e mm mm zm mr A a mm mr mm mm le e mm mm mm sc ba mm e mm mm dm e mm mm ms ei D AE Aesmeme ale eseseebeseemedeeesee sali eoo DEET EE EEN Bi MER gp apnyiubeyy eee eee eee eee eee eee eee eee ee BD L D 4 056 08 1 2 1 4 1 5 1 8 feymbol 0 2 100 Frequency in Formulae Low Pass Wide 20 OA
178. OCulate n LIMit MACCuracy OOFFset PEAK VALue esses 224 CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy PERRor PCURrent VALUG ecceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeaeaeeeaes 224 CALOulate n LIMit MACCuracy PERRor PMEan VALue eese 224 CALOCulate n LIMit MACCuracy PERRor PPEak VALue eseseseseneeee enne 224 CALOCulate n LIMit MACCuracy PERRor RCURrent VALue ees eene 224 CALOCulate n LIMit MACCuracy PERRor RMEan VALue seseseseseeeeeee eren 224 CALOCulate n LIMit MACCuracy PERRor RPEak VALue essen 224 CAL Culate nzLIMirMACCuracvRHO CURRentvVAl ue 225 CAL Culate nzLIMIrMACCuracvRHOMEAN VAL ue 225 CAL Culate nzLIMIrMACCuracvRHODEAK VAL ue 225 CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy DEFault Restores the default limits and deactivates all checks in all windows Suffix lt n gt 1 4 irrelevant Usage Event Mode VSA Manual operation See Set to Default on page 139 CALCulate subsystem CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy STATe lt LimitState gt Suffix lt n gt Setting parameters lt LimitState gt Mode Manual operation 1 4 ON OFF RST OFF VSA See ModAcc Limits on page 138 See Limit Checking on page 139 CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy lt ResultType gt lt LimitType gt STATe lt LimitState gt This command switches the limit check for the selected result type and limit type on or off Suffix
179. ONDition section of the status register The command does not delete the contents of the EVENt section Query parameters lt ChannelName gt String containing the name of the channel The parameter is optional If you omit it the command works for the currently active channel Usage Query only STATus QUEStionable SYNC ENABle lt SumBit gt lt ChannelName gt This command controls the ENABle part of a register The ENABle part allows true conditions in the EVENt part of the status register to be reported in the summary bit If a bitis 1 in the enable register and its associated event bit transitions to true a positive transition will occur in the summary bit reported to the next higher level Parameters lt SumBit gt Range 0 to 65535 lt ChannelName gt String containing the name of the channel The parameter is optional If you omit it the command works for the currently active channel STATus QUEStionable SYNC NTRansition lt SumBit gt lt ChannelName gt This command controls the Negative TRansition part of a register 4 13 SYSTem Subsystem Setting a bit causes a 1 to 0 transition in the corresponding bit of the associated regis ter The transition also writes a 1 into the associated bit of the corresponding EVENt register Parameters lt SumBit gt Range 0 to 65535 lt ChannelName gt String containing the name of the channel The parameter is optional If you omit it the command works for the currently
180. PACing on page 266 Capture Unit Units Defines the unit in which the data is captured seconds or signals The unit is also applied to the trigger offset and the grids of all active measurements Remote command CALCulate lt n gt X UNIT TIME on page 257 Preamp On Off Switches the preamplifier on and off If option R amp S FSV B22 is installed the preamplifier is only active below 7 GHz If option R amp S FSV B24 is installed the preamplifier is active for all frequencies This function is not available for input from the R amp S Digital UO Interface option R amp S FSV B17 Remote command INPut GAIN STATe on page 276 RF Atten Manual Mech Att Manual Opens an edit dialog box to enter the attenuation irrespective of the reference level If electronic attenuation is activated option R amp S FSV B25 only El Atten Mode Auto softkey this setting defines the mechanical attenuation The mechanical attenuation can be set in 10 dB steps The RF attenuation can be set in 5 dB steps with option R amp S FSV B25 1 dB steps The range is specified in the data sheet If the current reference level cannot be set for the set RF attenuation the reference level is adjusted accordingly This function is not available for input from the R amp S Digital UO Interface option R amp S FSV B17 The RF attenuation defines the level at the input mixer according to the formula levelmixer level RF attenuation R amp S FSV
181. QAM modulation the information can be represented by the sig nal amplitude and or the signal phase 16APSK Fig 2 37 Constellation diagram for 16APSK including the logical symbol mapping for DVB S2 For DVB S2 16APSK mappings the ratio of the outer circle radius to the inner circle radius y R2 R1 depends on the utilized code rate and complies with table 2 17 Table 2 17 Optimum constellation radius ratio y linear channel for 146APSK Code Rate Modulation coding spectral Y efficiency 2 3 2 66 3 15 3 4 2 99 2 85 4 5 3 19 2 75 5 6 3 32 2 70 8 9 3 55 2 60 9 10 3 59 2 57 Symbol Mapping 32APSK Fig 2 38 Constellation diagram for 32APSK including the logical symbol mapping for DVB S2 For DVB S2 32APSK mappings the ratio of the middle circle radius to the inner circle radius y4 R2 R1 and the ratio of the outer circle radius to the inner circle radius y depend on the utilized code rate and comply with table 2 18 Table 2 18 Optimum constellation radius ratios y and y linear channel for 32APSK Code Rate Modulation coding Yi Y2 spectral efficiency 2 3 3 74 2 84 5 27 3 4 3 99 2 72 4 87 4 5 4 15 2 64 4 64 5 6 4 43 2 54 4 33 8 9 4 49 2 53 4 30 OOK OOK stands for On Off Keying and is often also referred to as binary Amplitude Shift Keying ASK With this type of modulation the information is solely represented by the absolute am
182. R pear ott d v erred eorr age o t ee te ttt eaten 292 SENSeE DBEMGOIG MSKFORMoal ses edite ates d eese et ue toc ee eres Pede tke ed Ey vea eue 292 SENSe DDEMOod NORMalize ADROOD terrere tente Reti aE nomero aa 292 SENSe DDEMod NORMalize CFDRIift ecaieecee ccena puce dean e canna mp pn NEEN ENEE 293 SENSerDDEMod NOIRMalize FDE RIO toto ee reete a en enne aea 293 SENSe DDEMod NORMalize IQIMbalance ener nnns 293 SENSe DDEMod NORMalize IQOFfset eese nennen neni 293 I SENSerDDEMod NORMalize VAL ucc tendi rete EA ain 294 SENSE DDEMOJ PRA TG 22 eege deeg Sea 294 TS Ree EIERE EE EES EE 294 SENSe DDEMed PRESGUREEV Gs cvieceese se2edicestegeaiadtasgeaarceessuiardaestapuicvesespaceteeesanuenees 295 SENSe DDEMod PRESet S TANdard cesses vesscavsesesevensteesanenseeasees 295 E ERT e Re E 296 SENSe DDEMod PSK NSTate ssssssssssssssssseseseseeneee nennen nne trennen r nh nennen 297 I SENSeEDDEMOd GQAM FORMAL E 297 E ENT e Ke Rer KEE 298 SENSe DDEMOd OPSK FORMAL eon ee geen eeu cab oet qe oae Se SEET 298 I SENSeEDDEMod REENgth AD TO utr czei aana iaa dane Ie cake sre p EES ERAN 299 SENSe DDEMod RLENgth VALue eceecencent ttes 299 ERT EMOGS BANG E 200 SENSe DBEMod SEARcCh BURSEAUNTOL 1 pnecice torpe rte Da Putent pma haue EeE dee 300 SENSe subsystem SENSe DDEMod SEARCh BURSt CONFigure AUTO
183. R amp S FSV K70 Vector Signal Analysis Operating Manual Settin gs a Demod Meas Filter Display Start Deum Stop 200 E NN a D Done 1176 7578 02 05 Test amp Measurement Operating Manual This manual describes the following R amp S FSV options e R amp S FSV K70 1310 8455 02 This manual describes the following R amp S FSV models with firmware version 2 30 SP2 and higher R amp S FSV A 1321 3008K04 R amp S FSV 7 1321 3008K07 R amp S FSV 13 1321 3008K13 R amp S FSV 30 1321 3008K30 R amp S FSV 40 1321 3008K39 R amp S FSV 40 1321 3008K40 It also applies to the following R amp S9FSV models However note the differences described in chapter 1 4 Notes for Users of R amp S FSV 1307 9002Kxx Models on page 9 R amp S FSV 3 1307 9002K03 R amp S FSV 7 1307 9002K07 R amp S FSV 13 1307 9002K13 R amp S FSV 30 1307 9002K30 R amp S FSV 40 1307 9002K39 R amp S FSV 40 1307 9002K40 2015 Rohde amp Schwarz GmbH amp Co KG M hldorfstr 15 81671 M nchen Germany Phone 49 89 41 29 0 Fax 49 89 41 29 12 164 Email info rohde schwarz com Internet www rohde schwarz com Subject to change Data without tolerance limits is not binding R amp S is a registered trademark of Rohde amp Schwarz GmbH amp Co KG Trade names are trademarks of the owners The following abbreviations are used throughout this
184. ROr see 230 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion DDEMod STATistic F SK MDEViation 0 0 0 0 eee cence 231 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion DDEMod STATistic FSK RDEViation 0 0 eee eee eee eeeee 232 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion DDEMod STATistic GIMBalance 2230 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion DDEMod STATistic QIMbalance 2 ccc cece eeeereneeeneeeee 233 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion DDEMod STATistic MERROr essen 234 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion DDEMod STATistic MPOWer seen 234 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion DDEMod STATistic OOFFset Se CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion DDEMod STATistic PERROr seen 236 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion DDEMod STATistic QERROr essen 236 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion DDEMod STATistic RHO 00 ec cece eee cece eceee tees eeseeeeeenneeenaes 237 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion DDEMod STATIistic SNR ee ec cece eee e cee tee eeeeeeeneeteeeteteeeee 238 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt LINK CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MAXimum APEak CAL Culatesn gt MARKer lt m gt MAXimum LEF T icono eei etc iE Etro beer vea eb AANER de CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MAXimum NEXT CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MAXimum RIGHt o CAL Culate nz MAbkercmz MAimum PDEART A 240 CAL Culate nz MAh ker
185. RROR in the R amp S FSQ K70 is given in Hz the Freq Err RMS in the R amp S FSV K70 is given in percent i e relative to the FSK Meas Devia tion Operating Manual 1176 7578 02 05 354 R amp S FSV K70 Support Problem The PSK QAM Signal shows spikes in the Frequency Error result dis play Spectrum VSA Ref Level 22 00 dBm Mod QPSK SR 270 833 kHz m el Att 10 0 dB Freq 1 0 GHz ResLen 200 SGL TRG EXT A Freq Error Abs 1Clrw B Phase Error Start 3 sym Stop 203 sym Start 3 sym Stop 203 sym D Yector I Q Meas amp Ref 1M Clrw a Sea B Stop 5 13 deeg 09 30 16 Solution These spikes are usually uncritical and are caused by zero transitions in the I Q Plane Question The y axis unit for the spectrum of the measurement signal can be chosen to be dB What level is this relative to Answer Spectrum Reallmag Meas amp Ref calculates the FFT of the result Reall mag Meas amp Ref Reallmag Meas amp Ref has the unit none In this case none means the measured signal has been scaled such that it matches the ideal corresponding ref erence signal as well as possible The reference signal in turn is scaled such that max abs at symbol instants 1 0 Question How can I get the demodulated symbols of all my GSM bursts in the capture buffer in remote control Answer Use the following remote commands SENSel DDEMod PRESet GSM NB Load the GSM standard SENSel1 DDEMod RLENgth 10000 SYM
186. Ref Signal SCPI commands CALC FEED XTIM DDEM MEAS to define the required source type see CALCulate lt n gt FEED on page 249 CALC FORM FEYE to define the result type see CALCulate lt n gt FORMat on page 249 TRAC DATA TRACE1 to query the trace results see TRACe lt n gt DATA on page 324 3 1 1 11 3 1 1 12 Measurement Result Display Constellation I Q The complex source signal without inter symbol interference as an X Y plot only the de rotated symbol decision instants are drawn and not connected Available for source types e Meas amp Ref Signal MSK QPSK A I Q Const Meas amp Ref 1M Clrw A IZQ Const Meas amp Ref 1M Clrw Start 2 43 Stop 2 43 Start 2 535 Stop 2 535 SCPI commands CALC FEED XTIM DDEM MEAS to define the required source type see CALCulate lt n gt FEED on page 249 CALC FORM CONS to define the result type see CALCulate lt n gt FORMat on page 249 TRAC DATA TRACEL to query the trace results see TRACe n DATA on page 324 Constellation UO Rotated The complex source signal as an X Y plot As opposed to the common Constellation UO display the symbol decision instants including the rotated ones are drawn and not connected Available for source types e Meas amp Ref Signal This result type is only available for signals with a rotating modu
187. Reference start Defines the number of the symbol which marks the beginning of the alignment refer ence source burst capture or pattern In effect this setting defines an offset of the x axis in addition to the one defined for the Signal Description see Offset on page 153 For example if you align the result to the center of the pattern and set the Symbol Number at amp lt Reference amp gt start to 0 you can easily find the pattern start in the EVM measurement simply by moving a marker to the symbol number O Note If you define an offset of the pattern with respect to the useful part of the burst in the signal description see Offset on page 153 and align the result to the pattern the Symbol Number at amp lt Reference amp gt start refers to the first symbol of the useful part of the burst not the first symbol of the pattern Remote command DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt X SCALe VOFFset on page 262 Configuring VSA measurements Evaluation Range In the Evaluation Range tab you define which range of the result is to be evaluated either the entire result range or only a specified part of it The calculated length of the specified range is indicated beneath the entries The selected evaluation range is dis played in the visualization area A preview of the result display with the current settings is displayed in the visualization area at the bottom of the dialog box Result Range Alignment and
188. SV B17 Suffix lt n gt irrelevant Parameters lt Value gt RST 150 ns Example TRIG SOUR BBP Sets the baseband power trigger source TRIG BBP HOLD 200 ns Sets the holding time to 200 ns Mode all Manual operation See Trigger Holdoff on page 162 TRIGger lt n gt SEQuence LEVel IFPower lt TriggerLevel gt This command defines the power level at the third intermediate frequency that must be exceeded to cause a trigger event Note that any RF attenuation or preamplification is considered when the trigger level is analyzed If defined a reference level offset is also considered Suffix lt n gt irrelevant Parameters lt TriggerLevel gt RST 20 dBm Example TRIG LEV IFP 30DBM Manual operation See Trigger Level on page 131 See Trigger Mode on page 160 TRIGger n SEQuence IFPower HOLDoff Value This command sets the holding time before the next IF power trigger event Suffix n irrelevant Parameters Value RST 150 ns TRIGger subsystem Example TRIG SOUR IFP Sets the IF power trigger source TRIG IFP HOLD 200 ns Sets the holding time to 200 ns Manual operation See Trigger Holdoff on page 162 TRIGger lt n gt SEQuence IFPower HYSTeresis Value This command sets the limit that the hysteresis value for the IF power trigger has to fall below in order to trigger the next measurement Suffix lt n gt irrelevant Parameters lt Value gt
189. SV K70 Burst amp Pattern Search burst Scorch mitad N Auto according to Signal Description Burst found on Off Meas only if Burst was found Auto Configuration Search Tolerance 4sym 14769 us Min Gep Length 3 692 ps Related Settings Signal Description Trace Mag CapBuf Support Burst amp Pattern Search burst Search BB w Auto according to Signal Description Burst found on Off Meas only if Burst was found Auto Configuration Search Tolerance 4 sym 14 769 us Min Gep Length dg emm gt 36 923us Related Settings Signal Description Mag CapBuf Stop 1500 sym Fig 6 6 Example for adjusting the minimum gap length For more information see Burst Search on page 163 e The pattern search is switched on fails and the alignment is with reference to the pattern In case the pattern search is switched on and the reference for the alignment is the pattern and not the burst a non detected pattern causes the result range to be positioned at the beginning of the capture buffer Hence if a the burst does not start right at the beginning of the capture buffer you will see a Burst Not Found Message Solution Refer to Message Pattern Not Found on page 340 Switch the pattern search off Choose Burst as the reference for the result range alignment Message Pattern Not Found The Pattern Not Found error message can have several causes e The burst search
190. Setting parameters lt Patterns gt CURRent ALL CURRent Only patterns that belong to the current standard ALL All patterns RST ALL Example DDEM PRES GSM AB Selects the digital standard GSM Access Burst DDEM SEAR SYNC PATT ADD GSM TSCI Adds GSM_TSC1 to standard DDEM SEAR SYNC CAT CURR Reads out all patterns that belong to the standard Mode VSA SENSe DDEMod SEARch SYNC COMMent lt Comment gt This command defines a comment to a sync pattern The pattern must have been selected before using the DDEM SEARch SYNC NAME command see SENSe DDEMod SEARch SYNC NAME on page 308 Setting parameters lt Comment gt string Example DDEM SEAR SYNC NAME GSM TSCO Name of pattern DDEM SEAR SYNC DATA 0001000000000001 Data of pattern DDEM SEAR SYNC COMM PATTERN FOR PPSK Comment Mode VSA Manual operation See Edit on page 168 See New on page 168 See Comment on page 170 SENSe subsystem SENSe DDEMod SEARch SYNC COPY lt Pattern gt This command copies a pattern file The pattern to be copied must have been selected before using the DDEM SEARch SYNC NAME command see SENSe DDEMod SEARch SYNC NAME on page 308 Tip In manual operation a pattern can be copied in the editor by storing it under a new name Setting parameters lt Pattern gt string Example DDEM S
191. Settings on page 163 Remote command SENSe DDEMod SIGNal PATTern on page 310 Pattern Settings Displays the Advanced Pattern Settings dialog box see Advanced Settings on page 167 Configuring VSA measurements Offset The offset of the pattern is defined with respect to the start of the useful part of the burst see also the note in Continuous Signal Burst Signal on page 152 If the posi tion of the pattern within the burst is known it is recommended that you define the off set That will accelerate the pattern search and enhance the accuracy of the burst search Remote command SENSe DDEMod STANdard SYNC OF FSet STATe on page 312 SENSe DDEMod STANdard SYNC OF FSet VALue on page 312 Known Data In the Known Data tab of the Modulation amp Signal Description dialog box you can load a file that describes the possible data sequences in the input signal see chap ter 3 3 7 Working With Known Data Files on page 199 Additional information provided by the loaded file is displayed at the bottom of the dia log box This information is not editable directly Modulation amp Signal Description Known LD te wins sees ette ree rei EE Edge AE 154 Load Data FIE iae rite eoo eoe E A E ATETEA 154 Configuring VSA measurements Known Data Activates or deactivates the use of the loaded data file if available When deactivated the additional information from the previo
192. TA TRACE1 to query the trace results see TRACe n DATA on page 324 3 1 1 14 Constellation Frequency The instantenous frequency of the source signal without inter symbol interference as an X Y plot only the symbol decision instants are drawn and not connected Available for source types e Meas amp Ref Signal C Const Freq Meas amp Ref 1M Clrw Mi 1 249 5108 kHz 9 000 sym E Start 727 5 kHz Stop 727 5 kHz SCPI commands CALC FEED XTIM DDEM MEAS 3 1 1 15 3 1 1 16 Measurement Result Display to define the required source type see CALCulate lt n gt FEED on page 249 CALC FORM CONF to define the result type see CALCulate lt n gt FORMat on page 249 TRAC DATA TRACE1 to query the trace results see TRACe lt n gt DATA on page 324 Vector Frequency The instantenous frequency of the source signal as an X Y plot all available samples as defined by the display points per symbol parameter see Display Points Sym on page 184 are drawn and connected Available for source types e Meas amp Ref Signal D Vector Freq Meas amp Ref iM Clrw EE un 4 Start 727 5 kHz Stop 727 5 kHz SCPI commands CALC FEED XTIM DDEM MEAS to define the required source type see CALCulate lt n gt FEED on page 249 CALC FORM COVF to define the result type see CALCulate lt n gt FORMat on page 249 TRAC DATA TRACE1 to que
193. UIING NER c N 129 Tiransmit ften sesse anisina e ede etta 16 Alpha BT aere 151 180 Deactivating remote control 2319 Predefined WEE 17 D ren wier Ae User defined rcnt aaia 150 trigger lem ded 131 162 Trigger OMG OFF i 162 y Steresis isc eain stereo ipe Sd dee 162 Level eg 131 162 Trigger Mode eiert 160 Trigger Offset Unit STEEN etre rente cs 132 TX Settings EXIJO BOX 142 U Units SOMKEY e EE 120 Upper Level Hysteresis ife e 123 Upper case commands A 209 Useful length sop See 152 Bursts remote control AAA 301 V Vector UO IReSulltyDG eersten tot ite o o tenete et oe 87 View trace mode ceci n aia acean eie 127 206 KT Nur 113 X X Axis Quantize Eid E M 118 X Axis Range SOPRKEY aeoaea e E E Meawwenened 118 191 X Axis Reference Value SOMKCY aii eet eer asar eTa 118 X Axis Unit SOMKCY 120 Y Y Axis Auto Range All Screens SOMKEY cierre hn nen rne 123 Y Axis Autorange Eoi 118 123 190 191 Y Axis Range SOfIKGy rarena a crc eed tr exe 117 192 Y Axis Reference Position loy E 118 189 191 Y Axis Reference Value SOflKGy EN 118 189 191 Y Axis Unit Ge 120 Z zoom area remote control sss 267 remote en ire MDC 267 Zoom ul LEE 127 206
194. V K70 Limit Value Current Mean Peak Config ModAcc Limits Define the limit with which the currently measured mean or peak value is to be com pared A different limit value can be defined for each result type Depending on the modulation type different result types are available Result type Remote command PSK MSK QAM Carr Freq Err on page 223 CALCulate lt n gt on page 221 Nit MACCuracy EVM RMS CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy EVM RCURrent VALue on page 222 EVM Peak CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy EVM PCURrent VALue on page 222 Phase Err Rms CALCulate n LIMit MACCuracy PERRor RCURrent VALue on page 224 Phase Err Peak CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy PERRor PCURrent VALue on page 224 Magnitude Err Rms CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy MERRor RCURrent VALue on page 223 Magnitude Err Peak CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy MERRor PCURrent VALue on page 223 Carr Freq Err CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy CFERror CURRent VALue on page 221 Rho CALCulate n LIMit MACCuracy RHO CURRent VALue on page 225 IQ Offset CALCulate n LIMit MACCuracy OOFFset CURRent VALue on page 224 FSK modulation only Freq Err Rms CALCulate n LIMit MACCuracy FERRor RCURrent VALue on page 223 Freq Err Peak CALCulate n LIMit MACCuracy FERRor PCURrent VALue on page 223 Magnitude Err Rm
195. W dBmV dBuV dBuA A RST Volt Example INP DIQ RANG UNIT A Mode IQ VSA EVDO CDMA WCDMA GSM ADEMOD TDS Manual operation See Level Unit on page 142 INPut DIQ SRATe lt SampleRate gt This command specifies or queries the sample rate of the input signal from the R amp S Digital UO Interface see Input Sample Rate on page 141 INPut Subsystem This command is only available if the optional R amp S Digital UO Interface option R amp S FSV B17 is installed For details see the R amp S Digital UO Interface R amp S FSV B17 description of the base unit Parameters lt SampleRate gt Range 1 Hz to 10 GHz RST 32 MHz Example INP DIQ SRAT 200 MHz Mode A IQ NF TDS VSA CDMA EVDO WCDMA ADEMOD GSM OFDM OFDMA WiBro WLAN Manual operation See Input Sample Rate on page 141 INPut EATT lt Attenuation gt This command defines the electronic attenuation If necessary the command also turns the electronic attenuator on This command is only available with option R amp S FSV B25 but not if R amp S FSV B17 is active The attenuation can be varied in 1 dB steps from 0 to 25 dB Other entries are rounded to the next lower integer value If the defined reference level cannot be set for the given RF attenuation the reference level is adjusted accordingly and the warning Limit reached is output Parameters lt Attenuation gt H RST 0 dB OFF Example INP1 EATT 10 dB Mode all Manual oper
196. Y citius pai cie e cerit pete river NE ATEU o epar ds SENSe DDEMod SEARCh SYNC DATA AE SENSeEDDEMOQG SEARCh SYNG DELelte 1 2 rrt rtt eva cere cb perc oe t eds SENSe DDEMod SEARCh SY NG lOCThreshold ss 4 3 2 12 1e i perrita kiere iia SENSeEDDEModS SEARGCh SYNG MOBDPBE icit ioi pott annuum SITE npe ee OE a nUSR Ra SAVE NE SENSeEDDEMOQ SEARGIESYNG NAME prt doa rape t eret pen eR Lr tt da cda se EEN SENSe DDEMod SEARch SYNC NSTate sis SENSe DDEMod SEARch SYNC PATTern ADD sssssssssssesese eene nennen tenere e nnns e nnns nnns nnne SENSe DDEMod SEARch SYNC PATTern REMove SENSeEDDEMoG SEARCGIESYNG SELQGGL E IEN Gel DDE Mod GEAbRch SYNC STATE ianen E na aN TER EAE ENTEOS ENEE E SERIES REECH d enn GE ISENSe RIETS e EE IR a RK EE SENSe DDEMod SIGNal VALue SENSeEDDEMOQ SBNATO e etit terrere e deett patr cen cad eco ddp e vete rd SENSeJE DDEMod STANdard COMMABriL eoo imet era D reete e D ice ra Dea ko X en nay SENSeEDDEMod STANdard DEEete onore nro onerat ee eo aE AENEA EDANE Ema SENSeEDDEMod STANdard PREset VALue iieri ort tetro ere te paene SENSeE DDEMoOG STANdatrd SAVE iei cor tei tee iere drain Eo sa doces i C RU e Eee Fo eo cute IGENZGel DDE Mod GTANdard SvhNC OFtGerGTATe enne nnen tenens nnne SENSe DDEMod STANdard SYNC OFFSet VALue SENSe EDDEMoG TFIEter ADDE titio Eegeregie asides SENS DDEMoQ TFILter ME
197. active channel STATus QUEStionable SYNC PTRansition lt SumBit gt lt ChannelName gt These commands control the Positive TRansition part of a register Setting a bit causes a 0 to 1 transition in the corresponding bit of the associated regis ter The transition also writes a 1 into the associated bit of the corresponding EVENt register Parameters lt SumBit gt Range 0 to 65535 lt ChannelName gt String containing the name of the channel The parameter is optional If you omit it the command works for the currently active channel STATus QUEStionable SYNC EVENt lt ChannelName gt This command reads out the EVENt section of the status register The command also deletes the contents of the EVENt section Query parameters lt ChannelName gt String containing the name of the channel The parameter is optional If you omit it the command works for the currently active channel Usage Query only SYSTem Subsystem SYSTem DISPlay UPDate lt State gt In remote control mode this command switches on or off the instrument display If switched on only the diagrams traces and display fields are displayed and updated The best performance is obtained if the display output is switched off during remote control Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF 4 14 TRACe subsystem Example SYST DISP UPD ON TRACe subsystem Di EE 324 TRAGSESmns GEBWIDI E 325 TRACCHOW BANGS TANG E 325 TRACe lt n gt DATA l
198. age 308 SENSe subsystem Example DDEM SEAR SYNC NAME GSM TSCO Selects the pattern DDEM SEAR SYNC DEL Deletes GSM TSCO pattern Usage Event Mode VSA Manual operation See Delete on page 169 SENSe DDEMod SEARch SYNC IQCThreshold lt CorrelationLev gt This command sets the IQ correlation threshold for pattern matching in percent A high level means stricter matching See I Q Correlation Threshold on page 166 for details Setting parameters lt CorrelationLev gt numeric value Range 10 0 to 100 0 RST 90 0 Default unit PCT Example SENS DDEM SEAR SYNC IQCT 85 5 Mode VSA Manual operation See Q Correlation Threshold on page 166 SENSe DDEMod SEARch SYNC MODE lt MeasOnlyOnPattern gt This command sets the vector analyzer so that the measurement is performed only if the measurement was synchronous to the selected sync pattern SYNC The mea sured values are displayed and considered in the error evaluation only if the set sync pattern was found Bursts with a wrong sync pattern sync not found are ignored If an invalid or no sync pattern is found the measurement waits and resumes running only when a valid sync pattern is found The command is available only if the sync sequence search is activated using the DDEM SEARch BURSt STATe ON com mand see SENSe DDEMod SEARch BURSt STATe on page 303 With MEAS selected the measur
199. ample DDEM FORM PSK Switches PSK demodulation on DDEMod PSK NST 8 DDEM PSK FORM DIFF Switches D8PSK demodulation on Mode VSA Manual operation See Modulation Order on page 149 SENSe DDEMod PSK NSTate lt PSKNstate gt Together with DDEMod PSK FORMat this command defines the demodulation order for PSK see also SENSe DDEMod PSK FORMat on page 296 Depending on the demodulation format and state the following orders are available NSTATe FORMat Order 2 any BPSK 8 NORMal 8PSK 8 DIFFerential D8PSK 8 N3Pi8 3pi 8 8PSK EDGE 8 PI8D8PSK Pi 8 D8PSK Setting parameters lt PSKNstate gt numeric value RST 2 Example DDEM FORM PSK Switches PSK demodulation on DDEMod PSK NST 8 DDEM PSK FORM DIFF Switches D8PSK demodulation on Mode VSA SENSe DDEMod QAM FORMat lt Name gt This command defines the specific demodulation mode for QAM SENSe subsystem The current firmware release of the R amp S FSV K70 does not support Differential QAM Setting parameters lt Name gt NORMal DIFFerential NPI4 MNPIA RST QPSK Example DDEM FORM QAM Switches QAM demodulation on DDEM QAM FORM NPI4 Switches Pi 4 16QAM demodulation on Mode VSA Manual operation See Modulation Order on page 149 SENSe DDEMod QAM NSTate lt QAMNState gt This command defines the demodulation order for QAM NSTate Order 16 16QAM 1
200. ands CALC FEED XTIM DDEM MEAS to define the required source type see CALCulate lt n gt FEED on page 249 CALC FORM PHASe to define the result type see CALCulate lt n gt FORMat on page 249 TRAC DATA TRACEL to query the trace results see TRACe n DATA on page 324 3 1 1 4 Phase Unwrap The phase of the signal the display is not limited to 180 180 Available for source types e Meas amp Ref Signal 3 1 1 5 Measurement Result Display Ref Level 10 00 dBm Std GSM_NormalBurst SR 270 833 kHz 30 dB Freq 15 0GHz Res Len 178 Input Start 15 0 sym Stop 163 0 sym Fig 3 4 Result display Phase Unwrap in normal mode SCPI commands CALC FEED XTIM DDEM MEAS to define the required source type see CALCulate lt n gt FEED on page 249 CALC FORM UPHase to define the result type see CALCulate lt n gt FORMat on page 249 TRAC DATA TRACE1 to query the trace results see TRACe lt n gt DATA on page 324 Frequency Absolute The instantaneous frequency of the signal source the absolute value is displayed in Hz Available for source types e Meas amp Ref Signal Capture Buffer Meas amp Ref signal d MEAS S 6 1 FREQ meast p with t n Tp and Tp the duration of one sampling period at the sample rate defined by the display points per symbol parameter see Display Points Sym on page 184 Capture buffer l d FREQ capr Gi S
201. ap ter 3 1 1 23 Bit Error Rate BER on page 101 Suffix n 1 4 Return values Format Specifies a particular BER result to be queried if no parameter is specified the current bit error rate is returned The parameters for these results are listed in table 4 1 Mode VSA Table 4 1 Parameters for BER result values Result Current Min Max Acc Bit Error Rate CURRent MIN MAX TOTal Total of Errors TECurrent TEMIN TEMAX TETotal Total of Bits TCURrent TMIN TMAX TTOTal CALCulate lt n gt DDEM SPECtrum STATe lt AddEvaluation gt This command switches the result display to spectrum mode Spectral evaluation is available for the following result parameters e MAGNitude e PHASe UPHase e FREQuency Real Imag RIMAG The result parameters are defined using the CALC FORM command see CALCulate lt n gt FORMat on page 249 Suffix lt n gt 1 4 Setting parameters lt AddEvaluation gt ON OFF RST Off Example CALC FEED XTIM DDEM MEAS Selects the measurement signal for display CALC FORM PHAS Selects the phase as the result parameter CALC DDEM SPEC STAT ON Selects spectral display of the phase CALCulate subsystem Mode VSA Manual operation See Result Type Transformation on page 183 EJ CALCulate lt n gt ELIN lt startstop gt STATe Auto This command restricts the evaluation range The evaluation range is
202. apter 3 4 1 Trace Mode Overview on page 205 Select Max Avg Min Trace Wizard Configures several traces to predefined display modes in one step Trace 1 Max Hold Trace 2 Average Trace 3 Min Hold Trace 4 6 Blank For details see chapter 3 4 1 Trace Mode Overview on page 205 Select Max CIrWrite Min Trace Wizard Configures several traces to predefined display modes in one step Trace 1 Max Hold Trace 2 Clear Write Trace 3 Min Hold Trace 4 6 Blank For details see chapter 3 4 1 Trace Mode Overview on page 205 ASCII Trace Export Opens the ASCII Trace Export dialog box and saves the active trace in ASCII format to the specified file and directory Various options are available to configure the stored data e Mode Stores raw UO data or trace data e Header Includes a header with scaling information etc e Decimal Separator Defines the separator for decimal values as point or comma Remote command FORMat DEXPort DSEParator on page 268 FORMat DEXPort HEADer on page 268 FORMat DEXPort MODE on page 268 MMEMory STORe lt n gt TRACe on page 279 Softkeys and Menu Overview for Vector Signal Analysis R amp S FSV K70 3 2 7 Softkeys of the Trigger Menu R amp S FSV K70 The TRIG key opens the I Q Capture tab of the Frontend amp UO Capture Settings dialog box see chapter 3 3 1 2 Frontend and UO Capture Settings on page 154 and displays the Tri
203. arker 1 2 3 4 Selects the corresponding marker and activates it Marker 1 is always a normal marker After Marker 2 to 4 have been switched on they are delta markers that are referenced to Marker 1 These markers can be converted into markers with absolute value displays using the Marker Norm Delta softkey When Marker 1 is the active marker pressing the Marker Norm Delta softkey switches on an additional delta marker Pressing the Marker 1 to Marker 4 softkey again switches the corresponding marker off Remote command CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt STATe on page 242 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt X on page 243 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt Y on page 245 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt STATe on page 215 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt X on page 216 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt Y on page 217 Marker Norm Delta Changes the active marker to a normal norm or delta marker with respect to marker 1 Remote command CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt STATe on page 242 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt STATe on page 215 Couple Screens On Off Markers in all diagrams with the same time or symbols x axis have coupled x values except for capture buffer display i e if you move the marker in one diagram it is moved in all coupled diagrams Softkeys and Menu Overview for Vector Signal Analysis R amp S FSV K70 Ref Level 10 00 dBm Std GSM_NormalBurst SR
204. as fuge 1 3 sig iT where fgymp 1 T is the symbol rate and h is a scaling factor termed the modulation index The transmitted or reference FSK signal is formed by frequency modulation of the instantaneous frequency Signal Model Estimation and Modulation Errors jos Di Q Ju REF t e E gl PREF where pe t denotes the phase of the transmitted waveform In the R amp S FSV K70 a continuous phase FSK signal is assumed which is ensured by the integral in the expression for REF t A graphical depiction of the reference waveform generation is shown below in Figure figure 2 55 Frequency Modulator Fig 2 55 Reference complex baseband FSK signal generation Reference Deviation The transmitted symbols sj are assumed to be chosen from a finite and real valued constellation of M values ec gy The maximum absolute constellation point is denoted by cy4x The maximum phase contribution of a data symbol is given by Pmax 72 2 Gay s at The reference deviation of the FSK signal is defined as _ mx _ 1 TL Arer Ze e phus 2 dt In the R amp S FSV K70 the frequency pulse filter is normalized such that _s a and the constellation for M FSK is assumed to be 1 3 M 1 which implies The expression for the reference deviation in terms of the modulation index is therefore given by 1 A per SERA 1 fu The above formula provides the necessary calculation for measurement of an FSK sig
205. ase offset in radians 2 6 2 2 Signal Model Estimation and Modulation Errors For the above phase model an equivalent frequency distortion model may be expressed as fost B Seer t 7 fo fat with Bis the scaling factor which results in a reference deviation error fo C 2 77 is a carrier frequency offset in Hz fo D 2 T7 is a frequency drift in Hz per second and ris the timing offset in seconds The measured signal model in terms of the instantaneous frequency and all distortion parameters is given by j2 B freer ut du for V fat MEAS t K e ett e n t Estimation The estimation of the distortion parameters listed previously is performed separately for the magnitude and phase frequency distortions as illustrated in figure 2 56 It is noted that the estimation of the timing offset is performed only on the frequency of the signal as the reference magnitude is assumed to be constant over the estimation range For details on the estimation range see chapter 2 6 1 2 Estimation on page 58 Compute Reference Waveform pum Estimate i i Timing Compute Frequency i Filter Ref deviation Carrier offset Carrier drift MEAS Measured Estimate Gain Amp droop Compute Magnitude Fig 2 56 FSK Estimation Strategy In figure 2 56 MEAS n denotes the sampled complex baseband measured signal waveform The magnitude samples are denoted Ameas N while the instantan
206. ate gt This command sets the limits of the marker search range to the zoom area Note The function is only available if the search limit for marker and delta marker is switched on see CALCulate n MARKer m X SLIMits STATe Suffix n irrelevant m irrelevant Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF Example CALC MARK X SLIM ZOOM ON Switches the search limit function on CALC MARK X SLIM RIGH 20MHz Sets the right limit of the search range to 20 MHz Manual operation See Search Limits on page 137 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt Y This command queries the measured value of a marker CALCulate subsystem The corresponding marker is activated before or switched to marker mode if neces sary To get a valid result you have to perform a complete measurement with synchroniza tion to the end of the measurement before reading out the result This is only possible for single sweeps Suffix lt n gt Selects the measurement window lt m gt Selects the marker Return values lt Result gt The measured value of the selected marker is returned Example INIT CONT OFF Switches to single sweep mode CALC MARK2 ON Switches marker 2 INIT WAI Starts a sweep and waits for the end CALC MARK2 Y Outputs the measured value of marker 2 Usage Query only Manual operation See Marker 1 2 3 4 on page 134 See Select 1 2 3 4 A on page 136 4 3 4 Other CALCulate commands CAL Culatesi
207. ater Remember to set the sweep mode to Single Sweep beforehand as Continuous Sweep would immediately over write the loaded input data If you contact the Rohde amp Schwarz support to get help for a certain problem send these files to the support in order to identify and solve the problem faster 6 1 Explanation of Error Messages The following section describes error messages and possible causes Message Burst Not Four teet NES 337 Message Pattern Not Found teneret eben debere otn nani e E nn due 340 Message Result Alignment Falled 2 eise cei rera vaa 341 Message Pattern Search On But No Pattern Selected cccceceeeeeeeeeeeeteeneeees 343 Message Pattern Not Entirely Within Result Range 343 Message Short Pattern Pattern Search Might Fall tente 343 Message Syne Prefers More Valid Symbols eee rese 344 Message Sync Prefers Longer Pattern cecinere nns 345 Message Result Ranges COverlap A 346 Message Burst Not Found The Burst Not Found error message can have several causes Burst search is active but the signal is not bursted C Mag CapBuf S 1 Clrw Start 0 sym i i Stop 1500 sym D rs l mA 18 03 2010 rz UGEET AT LEE Cad 09 53 45 Fig 6 1 Example for active burst search with continuous signal Solution Select Continuous Signal as the signal type For more information see Signal Description on page 15
208. ation Details on the estimation model and also the parameter vector can be found in chap ter 2 6 Signal Model Estimation and Modulation Errors on page 56 Subsequently the measurement signal is corrected with the determined parameter vector Note that with a subset of the parameters you can enable or disable correction see Demodulation on page 174 Estimation ranges The estimation ranges are determined internally according to the signal description e For continuous signals the estimation range corresponds to the entire result range since it can then be assumed that the signal consists of valid modulated symbols at all time instants e For bursted signals the estimation range corresponds to the overlapping area of the detected burst and the Result Range Furthermore the Run In Run Out ranges see Continuous Signal Burst Signal on page 152 are explicitly exclu ded from the estimation range In the special case that the signal is indicated as a burst signal but is so highly dis torted that the burst search cannot detect a burst the estimation range corresponds to the pattern and if an offset of the pattern is indicated the useful part of the burst from its start to the pattern start Signal Model Estimation and Modulation Errors 2 6 1 3 Modulation Errors Error vector EV Q Fig 2 47 Modulation error error vector The error vector is the difference between the measurement signal vect
209. ation See El Atten Mode Auto Man on page 121 See El Attenuation ON OFF on page 157 INPut EATT AUTO lt State gt This command switches the automatic behaviour of the electronic attenuator on or off If activated electronic attenuation is used to reduce the operation of the mechanical attenuation whenever possible This command is only available with option R amp S FSV B25 but not if R amp S FSV B17 is active Parameters State ON OFF RST ON INPut Subsystem Example INP1 EATT AUTO OFF Mode all Manual operation See El Atten On Off on page 121 See El Atten Mode Auto Man on page 121 INPut EATT STATe State This command turns the electronic attenuator on or off This command is only available with option R amp S FSV B25 but not if R amp S FSV B17 is active Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF Example INP EATT STAT ON Switches the electronic attenuator into the signal path Manual operation See El Attenuation ON OFF on page 157 INPut GAIN STATe lt State gt This command turns the 20 dB preamplifier on and off With option R amp S FSV B22 the preamplifier only has an effect below 7 GHz With option R amp S FSV B24 the amplifier applies to the entire frequency range This command is not available when using R amp S Digital UO Interface R amp S FSV B17 Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Example INP GAIN STAT ON Turns the preamplifier on Manual operat
210. ation but can also be used for the PSK QAM modulations However since these modulations can have transitions through zero in the UO plane in this case you might notice uncriti cal spikes This is due to the fact that the phase of zero or a complex value close to zero has in fact limited significance but still influences the result of the current fre quency measurement 3 1 1 21 Measurement Result Display A Freq Error Abs 1 Cirw HB TT mH MUNERE HU TTD th C T aii Start 0 sym Stop 200 sym Fig 3 15 Result display Frequency Error Absolute in normal mode Available for source types e Modulation Errors SCPI commands CALC FEED XTIM DDEM ERR MPH to define the required source type see CALCulate lt n gt FEED on page 249 CALC FORM FREO to define the result type see CALCulate lt n gt FORMat on page 249 TRAC DATA TRACE1 to query the trace results see TRACe n DATA on page 324 Frequency Error Relative Displays the error of the instantaneous frequency of the measurement signal with respect to the reference signal as a function of symbols over time The results are normalized to the symbol rate PSK and QAM modulated signals the estimated FSK deviation FSK modulated signals or one quarter of the symbol rate MSK modulated signals FREQ _ERR FREQyras FREQrer Q with tzn Tp and Tp the duration of one sampling p
211. ation types However as the signal processing for FSK signals is performed on the magnitude and instantaneous frequency the UO based results first require a recon struction of the reference and measured UO waveforms as illustrated in Reconstruc tion of the reference and measured UO waveforms for FSK modulation The dashed outline of the compensate blocks indicate that these operations are optionally de activated depending on the corresponding user settings With respect to FSK measurements the optional compensation parameters are e FSK Reference deviation Carrier frequency drift Formulae Figure 3 Compensate Reference Ref deviation Frequency Frequency Modulator Reference Compensate Ref deviation Measured Frequency Juras s Compensate Carrier drift Measured UO Frequency Modulator gt Carrier offset Compensate Auras n Timing Gain Fig 7 1 Reconstruction of the reference and measured I Q waveforms for FSK modulation Note that a reference deviation error is corrected in the reference frequency trace This ensures that the frequency deviation in the measured frequency trace corresponds to that of the originally measured signal With respect to the I Q reconstruction the mea sured magnitude is timing compensated using the timing offset estimated from the measured instantaneous frequency This ensures that the measured magnitude and frequenc
212. ative Real Imag UO Eye Diagram Real I Eye Diagram Imag Q Eye Diagram Frequency Constellation UO Constellation UO Rotated Vector UO Constellation Frequency Vector Frequency Symbols Binary Octal Decimal Hexadecimal Error Vector EVM Real Imag UO Vector UO Modulation Errors Magnitude Error Phase Error Frequency Error Absolute Frequency Error Relative Modulation Accuracy Result Summary Bit Error Rate BER 3 1 3 Spectral Displays Spectral evaluations can be carried out for all result displays that show the time or symbols on the x axis CH Note that the spectrum is only calculated over the evaluation range Measurement Result Display Table 3 4 Available spectral displays depending on source type Source Type Result Type Capture Buffer Magnitude Absolute Real Imag I Q Meas amp Ref Signal Magnitude Absolute Magnitude Relative Phase Wrap Phase Unwrap Frequency Absolute Frequency Relative Real Imag l Q Error Vector EVM Real Imag UO Modulation Errors Magnitude Error Phase Error Frequency Error Absolute Frequency Error Relative For real input signals the spectrum between the frequencies 0 and symbol rate cap ture oversampling 2 is displayed for complex input signals REAL IMAG and Error REAL IMAG the spec
213. automatically The measurement time for automatic leveling can be defined using the Settings soft key Remote command SENSe ADJust LEVel on page 284 Settings Opens a submenu to define settings for automatic leveling Possible settings are Meas Time Manual on page 123 3 2 5 Softkeys and Menu Overview for Vector Signal Analysis R amp S FSV K70 Meas Time Auto on page 123 Meas Time Manual Settings Opens an edit dialog box to enter the duration of the level measurement in seconds The level measurement is used to determine the optimal reference level automatically see the Auto Level softkey Auto Level on page 122 The default value is 1 ms Remote command SENSe ADJust CONFigure LEVel DURation on page 283 Meas Time Auto Settings The level measurement is used to determine the optimal reference level automatically see the Auto Level softkey This softkey resets the level measurement duration for automatic leveling to the default value depending on the signal description see Signal Description on page 151 Upper Level Hysteresis Settings Defines an upper threshold the signal must exceed before the reference level is auto matically adjusted when the Auto Level function is performed Remote command SENSe ADJust CONFiguration HYSTeresis UPPer on page 283 Lower Level Hysteresis Settings Defines a lower threshold the signal must exceed before the reference level
214. available If the Fine Synchronization setting in the Demodulation dialog box is set to Auto mode the known data is also used for synchronization Otherwise it can be selected manually Defining a maximum symbol error rate for the known data in ref erence to the analyzed data avoids using a falsely selected or unsuitable file for synchronization see also If SER lt on page 178 3 3 7 3 How to Create Known Data Files You must create the Known Data files yourself according to the possible data sequen ces of the input signal Use any xml editing tool you like following the rules described in chapter 3 3 7 4 Reference Known Data File Syntax Description on page 202 Configuring VSA measurements Before loading the file to the R amp S FSV K70 application make sure the syntax of your file is valid Auxiliary tool to create Known Data files An auxiliary tool to create Known Data files from data that is already available in the R amp S FSV K70 application is provided on the instrument free of charge To create a Known Data file using the recording tool for sequences 1 Import or apply input data for which stable demodulation results are available to the R amp S FSV K70 application If necessary adapt the demodulation settings until the requested results are obtained 2 Execute the file RecordingToolforSequences EXE from the installation direc tory on the instrument The R amp S Recording Tool for Sequence
215. ayed A topic containing information about the current menu or the currently opened dialog box and its function is displayed 0 For standard Windows dialog boxes e g File Properties Print dialog etc no context sensitive help is available P Ifthe help is already displayed press the softkey for which you want to display help A topic containing information about the softkey and its function is displayed If a softkey opens a submenu and you press the softkey a second time the submenu of the softkey is displayed Contents of the help dialog box The help dialog box contains four tabs e Contents contains a table of help contents e View contains a specific help topic Index contains index entries to search for help topics e Zoom contains zoom functions for the help display To change between these tabs press the tab on the touchscreen 1 4 Notes for Users of R amp S FSV 1307 9002Kxx Models Navigating in the table of contents To move through the displayed contents entries use the UP ARROW and DOWN ARROW keys Entries that contain further entries are marked with a plus sign To display a help topic press the ENTER key The View tab with the correspond ing help topic is displayed Tochange to the next tab press the tab on the touchscreen Navigating in the help topics To scroll through a page use the rotary knob or the UP ARROW and DOWN ARROW keys To jump to the linked t
216. bean 86 RU codicc 87 e Constellation Frequency peii tenera reed rr dose cR earn 88 e Vector e EE e 89 Eine OR RT 89 Error Vector Magnitude EVM 2 re reete reete eet uio eis 90 RTE ee TT E TEE EN E ET 92 e Frequency ENor ADSOLUEG cdidit etat nene teta e a e re n 93 e Frequency Error Relative ces soe ed EE LA a RE EA 94 e Result obnlaby ceri ode RE Rede den Rate e dede D e RN RES 95 e Bit Enor Rate BER onere rent etae tun ti Da d RARI 101 Magnitude Absolute Magnitude of the source signal the actual signal amplitude is displayed Mag yas t MEAS with tzn Tp and Tp the duration of one sampling period at the sample rate defined by the display points per symbol parameter see Display Points Sym on page 184 Available for source types 3 1 1 2 Measurement Result Display Capture Buffer e Meas amp Ref Signal Ref Level 10 00 dBm Std GSM_NormalBurst SR 270 833 kHz Att 30 dB Freq 15 0 GHz Res Len 178 Input RF Start 15 0 sym Stop 163 0 sym Fig 3 1 Result display Magnitude Absolute in normal mode SCPI commands CALC FEED XTIM DDEM MEAS T to define the required source type see CALCulate lt n gt FEED on page 249 CALC FORM MAGN to define the result type see CALCulate lt n gt FORMat on page 249 TRAC DATA to query the trace results see TRACe n DATA on page 324 Magnitude Relative Magnitude of the source signal t
217. ble MODulation lt n gt EVM limit violations in EVM evalua tion STATus QUESTionable MODulation lt n gt PHASe limit violations in Phase Error evaluation STATus QUESTionable MODulation lt n gt MAGnitude limit violations in Mag nitude Error evaluation STATus QUESTionable MODulation lt n gt CFRequency limit violations in Car rier Frequency evaluation e STATus QUESTionable MODulation lt n gt IQRHO limit violations in I Q Offset and RHO evaluation STATus QUESTionable MODulation lt n gt FSK limit violations in FSK evalua tion The status of the STATus QUESTionable MODulation register is indicated in bit 7 of the STATus QUESTionable register It can be queried using the STATus QUEStionable EVENt command The commands to query the contents of the following status registers are described in chapter 4 12 STATus QUEStionable Subsystem on page 317 R amp S FSV K70 Status Reporting System Option R amp S FSV K70 eo logical OR of all bits DigitallQ C specific for FSV K70 SYNC ACPLimit BURGE SYNG EE STAT QUES SYNC LMARgin LIMit CALibration UNCAL MODulation FREQuency FDEPeak TEMPerature FDEMean POWer FDECurrent STATus QUEStionable FFEPedk PFEMean PlQOffset PFECurrent MIQOffset ClQOffset PPEak PMEan RFEPeak PCURrent RFEMean PRHo RFECurrent MRHo PEAK one MEAN RPEak FSK STAT QUES MOD FSK MESE IQRHo
218. cale See Y Axis Unit on page 120 R amp S FSV K70 Remote Control Commands R amp S FSV K70 H DISPlay WINDow lt n gt ZOOM STATe State This command turns the zoom on and off Suffix lt n gt Selects the measurement window Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Example DISP ZOOM ON Activates the zoom mode DISPlay WINDow lt n gt ZOOM AREA lt x1 gt lt y1 gt lt x2 gt lt y2 gt This command defines the zoom area Before you can define a zoom area you first have to turn the zoom on 100 100 Suffix lt n gt window For applications that do not have more than 1 measure ment window the suffix lt n gt is irrelevant Parameters lt x1 gt lt y1 gt Diagram coordinates in of the complete diagram that define lt x2 gt lt y2 gt the zoom area The lower left corner is the origin of coordinate system The upper right corner is the end point of the system Range 0 to 100 Default unit PCT Example DISP ZOOM ON Activates the zoom mode DISP ZOOM AREA 5 30 20 100 Enlarges the display of the measurement results in the area defined by the coordinates 5 30 and 20 100 E Operating Manual 1176 7578 02 05 267 FORMat subsystem 4 5 FORMat subsystem FORMAEDEX PGR DSEParatO i iscascicdicdavecctinnacaidaceacaavidvanabanetacwauesaadendsteuuasdaaheagaawaaeecdons 268 FORMaUDEXPGICHEBDOE dae tica darte are kie caa aere rad aerea La wea ua ku nerd dva aeui 268 al ERT in
219. ce signal is not Solution 1 Press the key to select the measurement screen 2 Press the TRACE key 3 Press the Trace Wizard softkey 4 Select a second trace choose Clear Write as Trace Mode and toggle to Ref in the Evaluation column Trace Wizard Screen A Trace Trace Mode Evaluation Trace 3 Blank Meas f Ref Trace 4 Blank Meas f Ref Trace 5 Blank k J Trace 6 Blank Grease J Preset Select Select All Traces Max Avg Min Max ClrWrite Min Problem The measurement screen does not show average results Solution 1 Press the key to select the measurement screen e 2 Press the TRACE key R amp S FSV K70 Support 3 Press the Trace Wizard softkey 4 Select a second trace and choose the preferred Trace Mode e g Max Hold or Average Spectrum VSA Ref Level 0 00 dBm Mod m el Att 20 0 dB Freq 1 0GHz ResLen o TRG EXT Trace Trace Mode Evaluation AEVM 1 Clrw 2 Avg 3 Max M Clear Write Meas Trace 2 Ref traces 3 Trace 4 Blank peor AAIE AAA red T a ee THU f Start 0 sym Stop 100 sym Tes 5 Blank s Ref C Mag CapBuf 1 Clrw 20 dBm Preset Select Select 40 dBm All Traces Max Avg Min Max ClrWrite Min 60 dBm Trace Wizard 80 dBm Trace Wizard Screen A Start 0 sym Stop 1500 sym Start 2 535 Stop 2 535 Measur
220. ctive ON OFF RST ON Example DISP WIND1 STAT ON Activates window 1 Mode VSA Manual operation See Screen X active on page 181 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt MODE lt Mode gt This command defines the type of display and the evaluation of the traces WRITE cor responds to the Clr Write mode of manual operation The trace is switched off BLANK in manual operation with DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt STATe The number of measurements for AVERage MAXHold and MINHold is defined with the SENSe SWEep COUNt VALue on page 316 command Note that synchroni zation to the end of the indicated number of measurements is only possible in single sweep mode Suffix n window For applications that do not have more than 1 measure ment window the suffix n is irrelevant t trace Parameters lt Mode gt Example Manual operation DISPlay subsystem WRITe VIEW AVERage MAXHold MINHold BLANk RST WRITe for TRACe1 STATe OFF for TRACe2 3 4 5 6 For details on trace modes refer to chapter 3 4 1 Trace Mode Overview on page 205 INIT CONT OFF Switching to single sweep mode SWE COUN 16 Sets the number of measurements to 16 DISP TRAC3 MODE MAXH Switches on the calculation of the maximum peak for trace 3 INIT WAI Starts the measurement and waits for the end of the 16 sweeps See Clear Write on page 126 See Max Hold on page 126 See Min Hold
221. ctor Alpha or the filter bandwidth BT The roll off factor and filter bandwidth for Transmit filter is available for RC RRC Gauss and GMSK filter The roll off factor and filter bandwidth for measurement filter is available for RRC filter Remote command Transmit filter SENSe DDEMod FILTer ALPHa on page 286 Measurement filter SENSe DDEMod MFILter ALPHa on page 290 Display Configuration You configure the display for the results in the Display Configuration dialog box This dialog box contains the following tabs e Screen A D a separate tab for each of the four available screens e Predefined for predefined display configurations For more information see chapter 3 1 Measurement Result Display on page 74 The Display Configuration tab is also displayed when you select the MEAS key Screen A D For each of the four available screens you can configure what is to be displayed Configuring VSA measurements Display Configuration Screen A lv Screen A active Highlight Symbols Source for Screen C Capture Buffer Error Vector Meas amp Ref Signal Modulation Errors Symbols Modulation Accuracy Result type for Screen A Magnitude Relative Phase Wrap Phase Unwrap C Frequency Absolute Frequency Relative to SR Real Imag 1 Q e Eye Diagram Real 1 Eye Diagram Imag Q Eye Diagram Frequency le Constellation I Q Vector LO IC
222. ctor EVM Real Imag UO Modulation Errors Magnitude Error Phase Error Frequency Error Absolute Frequency Error Relative For complex displays REAL IMAG and Error REAL IMAG a separate statistics dia gram is calculated for the real and imaginary parts The input signal of the basic display is quantized and the probability of occurrence is shown by a bargraph The quantization can be set via the number of bars in the display area by using the Range X Axis Quantize parameter see Ranges statistic mea surements on page 118 In the basic setting 101 bars are used The figure 3 21 shows an example of a statistical evaluation The lower window C shows the basic diagram EVM while the upper window A shows the associated dis tribution of the EVM R amp S FSV K70 Instrument Functions for Vector Signal Analysis VSA x Ref Level 10 00 dBm Std GSM NormalBurst SR 270 833 kHz Att 10dB Freq 1 0 GHz Res Len 200 Input RF SGL Count 100 100 BURST PATTERN A Statistics EVM 61ciwe2 ciw Start 26 sym Stop 174 sym Fig 3 21 Error vector magnitude bottom EVM distribution top 3 1 5 Displayed Measurement Settings The channel bar above the result screens displays the most important measurement settings Depending on the result type the following information may be displayed in the channel bar Spectrum VSA Ref Level 8 00 dBm Offset 2 00 dB Std GSM NormalBurst SR 270 833
223. d or the values to the left smaller or to the right greater Remote command CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MAXimum PEAK on page 240 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MAXimum LEFT on page 239 CALCulate n MARKer m MAXimum RIGHt on page 240 Marker Real Marker Imag Search Settings Defines whether marker search functions are performed on the real or imaginary trace of the Real Imag measurement Remote command CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt SEARch on page 242 Search Limits Search Settings If enabled defines the limits of the search Left Limit Lowest symbol number for which the search is performed Right Limit Highest symbol number for which the search is performed Use Zoom Restricts the marker search to the zoomed area Limits Remote command CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt X SLIMits ZOOM on page 245 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt X SLIMits LEFT on page 244 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt X SLIMits RIGHT on page 245 Peak Sets the active marker delta marker to the highest maximum of the trace Remote command CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MAXimum PEAK on page 240 Next Peak Sets the active marker delta marker to the next maximum of the selected trace Remote command CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MAXimum NEXT on page 239 CALCulate n DELTamarker m MAXimum NEXT on page 213 Max Peak Sets the active marker delta marker
224. d eet deaths tata tall bet rt T y e ain kb L T D D o D e D D D 1 n 1 1 c L H 1 c SE H 1 n D D 1 1 D I 1 1 D D 1 D Le Ss Gel 3 5 wj 1 E TOUR PUE UN IS BSL iy E E esate nce eo PIE E SI e SIT S i i i i Es i i x i i D D D 1 D D 4 n 4 m e ebe e ee le we be eme gn e es e A amer eebe e e hasendlsseshesendannaaluenaalnma e i i i i o i i o i i i o 1 1 1 D D 1 1 1 D i 1 1 D 1 H D 1 D 1 D 1 1 1 1 D D D D D D D D D E VE E H SE L X WE E E M E ee E E ME URN D D 1 e D e D D e D 1 1 D 1 D 1 i i i i i i D 1 D D D D D H H IN IN H H C4 TEE DEER TT H eben em ls em ebe mem al em em mem ebe me E X PX H 1 i i ce 1 ce 1 H ce D 1 D 1 D 1 1 1 1 D 1 D 1 D D D D 1 D D 1 D 1 D D D D D D 1 D 1 D 1 D D D 1 D 1 D 7 1 n 1 n 1 n 1 1 1 n n 1 e e e e c e e ce ce c ea c ce e c ce c e c ce e ce ce ki tO ca e N N e co e N ka wW eco e 1 T T D T T ka H T T 1 gp apnyiubeyy gp epniiuBejq gp epnyubeyy feymbol Frequency in Formulae APCO25 H CPM D D D See eee ee eee eee eee eee ee eee 20 e 2 j 2 bR Jd 1 4LB 4 eee eee tee ee ee DEET EE Jg Pessac gp apnyiubeyy de shades niin dodi Jee Mitis icc acci eet deer eendeiteg dace viet 80 100 12 14 16 18 f ymbol 0 8 0 6 0 4 0 2 Frequency in APCO25 H DQPSK DH DH D 1 D ee ee ee ee ee eee ne 20 D 1 D D
225. dated by the instrument This part can only be read by the user Reading the register clears it Possible events limit violations are described for the individual result types in chap ter 5 Status Reporting System Option R amp S FSV K70 on page 330 Suffix n 1 4 lt ResultType gt Usage Mode STATus QUEStionable Subsystem CFRequency EVM FSK IQRHo MAGNitude PHASe CFRequency limit violations in Carrier Frequency evaluation EVM limit violations in EVM evaluation FSK limit violations in FSK evaluation IQRHo limit violations in I Q Offset and RHO evaluation MAGNitude limit violations in Magnitude Error evaluation PHASe limit violations in Phase Error evaluation Query only SCPI confirmed VSA STATus QUEStionable MODulation lt n gt lt ResultType gt CONDition Contains the result of the limit check during evaluation This register part can only be read but not written into or cleared Readout does not delete the contents of the CON Dition section Suffix lt n gt lt ResultType gt Usage Mode 1 4 CFRequency EVM FSK IQRHo MAGNitude PHASe CFRequency limit violations in Carrier Frequency evaluation EVM limit violations in EVM evaluation FSK limit violations in FSK evaluation IQRHo limit violations in I Q Offset and RHO evaluation MAGNitude limit violations in Magnitude Error evaluation PHASe limit violations in Phase Error evaluation Query onl
226. dth Real Imag I Q display of the Capture Buffer with a Spec trum transformation For further details see chapter 2 2 Filters and Bandwidths During Signal Processing on page 12 Remote command SENSe DDEMod PRATe on page 294 Sample Rate Shows the current sample rate Note that this is a read only field Usable I Q Bandwidth Shows the usable UO bandwidth Note that this is a read only field Operating Manual 1176 7578 02 05 159 Configuring VSA measurements Maximum Bandwidth Defines the maximum bandwidth to be used by the R amp S FSV for UO data acquisition This function is only available if the bandwidth extension option R amp S FSV B160 is installed and no other restrictions for its use apply see chapter 2 2 2 1 Restrictions on page 15 For details on the maximum bandwidth see chapter 2 2 Filters and Bandwidths Dur ing Signal Processing on page 12 Auto Default The maximum available bandwidth is used for all sample rates If the bandwidth extension option R amp S FSV B160 is installed it is activated for bandwidths as of 64 MHz if no other restrictions for its use apply see chapter 2 2 2 1 Restrictions on page 15 Thus sample rates up to 1 28 GHz and an UO bandwidth up to 160 MHz are possible Note that using the bandwidth extension may cause more spurious effects 40 MHz Deactivates use of the bandwidth extension option R amp S FSV B160 thus reducing possible spurious eff
227. e 124 Setting parameters lt SweepCount gt numeric value Range 0 to 32767 RST 0 Default unit NONE Example INIT CONT ON Activates continuous sweep mode SWE COUN 0 Records the UO data continuously and uses a sliding window length for averaging of 10 INIT CONT OFF Activates single sweep mode SWE 5 Records UO data until 5 evaluations have finished Usage SCPI confirmed Mode VSA Manual operation See Statistics Count on page 124 SENSe SWEep COUNt CURRent Counter This command queries the current statistics counter value which indicates how many result ranges have been evaluated For results that use the capture buffer as a source the number of used capture buffers can be queried Setting parameters Counter CAPTure STATistics STATistics Returns the number of result ranges that have been evaluated CAPTure Returns the number of used capture buffers evaluated RST STATistics Mode VSA STATus QUEStionable Subsystem 4 12 STATus QUEStionable Subsystem The following commands can be used to query the contents of the status registers spe cific to the R amp S FSV K70 option For details see chapter 5 Status Reporting System Option R amp S FSV K70 on page 330 STATUS QUESiionable CONDOM E 317 STATUS QUESt nable EVEN 317 STATus QUEStionable MODulation n ENABle cessisse nnne 318 STATus QUEStionable MODulation n CONDiition cesses 318 STAT
228. e Level Signal Source If enabled the reference level is adjusted to the full scale level automatically if any change occurs Remote command INPut DIQ RANGe COUPling on page 273 EXIQ Opens a configuration dialog box for an optionally connected R amp S EX IQ BOX and a submenu to access the main settings quickly Note The EX IQ Box functionality is not supported for R amp S FSV models 1321 3008Kxx If the optional R amp S DiglConf software is installed the submenu consists only of one key to access the software Note that R amp S DiglConf requires a USB connection not LAN from the R amp S FSV to the R amp S EX IQ BOX in addition to the R amp S Digi tal UO Interface connection R amp S DiglConf version 2 10 or higher is required For typical applications of the R amp S EX IQ BOX see also the description of the R amp S Digital UO Interface R amp S FSV B17 in the base unit manual For details on configuration see the R amp SGEx UO Box External Signal Interface Mod ule Manual For details on installation and operation of the R amp S DiglConf software see the R amp SGEX IQ BOX Digital Interface Module R amp SGDiglConf Software Operating Man ual TX Settings EXIQ Opens the EX IQ BOX Settings dialog box to configure the R amp S FSV for digital out put to a connected device Transmitter Type RX Settings EXIQ Opens the EX IQ BOX Settings dialog box to configure the R amp S FSV for digital input from a conn
229. e display over view dialog box Example SENS DDEM PRES CALC Resets the screen display to the presetting Usage Event Mode VSA SENSe subsystem SENSe DDEMod PRESet RLEVel This command initiates automatic setting of the RF attenuation and IF gain to the level of the applied signal Note The following command must be synchronized to the end of the autorange proc ess using WAI OPC or OPC because otherwise the autorange process will be stopped Example SENS DDEM PRES RLEV WAI Performs automatic level setting Usage Event Mode VSA SENSe DDEMod PRESet STANdard lt Standard gt This command selects an automatic setting of all modulation parameters according to a standardized transmission method or a user defined transmission method The standardized transmission methods are available in the instrument as predefined standards Setting parameters lt Standard gt string Specifies the file name that contains the transmission method without the extension For user defined standards the file path must be included Default standards predefined by Rohde amp Schwarz do not require a path definition A list of short forms for predefined standards is provided below Example DDEM PRES TETRA NDDOWN Switches the predefined digital standard TETRA_Disconti nuousDownlink on DDEM PRES C R_S Instr usr standards USER_GSM Switches the user defined digital standard US
230. e modulation and subsequently searches the I Q capture buffer for this UO pattern The K70 option can then adapt its result range to this pattern Predefined Patterns Common standards usually have predefined pattern lists with standard specific pat terns Patterns required for the current measurement can be selected from this list This list can be extended by patterns that are already available in the instrument Newly created patterns can also be added to the list Pattern Settings To configure a pattern search Configuring a pattern search requires the following steps 1 Selecting a pattern This may require further subtasks a Changing the display for the list of patterns b Adding a pattern to a standard c Creating a new pattern d Editing a pattern 2 Enabling pattern search if Auto mode is disabled 3 Optionally defining the offset of the pattern with respect to the useful part of the burst The specified number of symbols in the signal are ignored during the pattern search To add a pattern to the signal description 1 Inthe VSA gt Settings Overview dialog box select Signal Description 2 Select the Pattern option Configuring VSA measurements To select a predefined pattern for a search This task can also be performed by remote control see SENSe DDEMod SEARch SYNC CATalog on page 305 and SENSe DDEMod SEARch SYNC SELect on page 309 Depending on whether a dialog box is al
231. e number of sweeps that are defined by using the Statistic Count softkey The measurement stops after the defined number of sweeps has been performed Remote command INIT CONT OFF see INITiate lt n gt CONTinuous on page 269 Continue Single Sweep Repeats the number of sweeps set by using the Statistic Count softkey without delet ing the trace of the last measurement This is particularly of interest when using the trace configurations Average or Max Hold to take previously recorded measurements into account for averaging maximum search Remote command INITiate lt n gt CONMeas on page 269 Refresh Repeats the evaluation of the data currently in the capture buffer without capturing new data This is useful after changing settings for example filters patterns or evaluation ranges Remote command INITiate REFMeas on page 270 Statistics Count Opens a dialog box to define sweep characteristics The behavior depends on whether you have set the R amp S FSV to single sweep mode or continuous sweep mode Softkeys and Menu Overview for Vector Signal Analysis R amp S FSV K70 Auto ous e O ke visualization Example for bursted Signal Captures Q data until 1 evaluation is completed Sweep Capture Buffer E m mmy ER Continuous Continuously captures Q data sweep Sliding window length for averaging is 1 Activate Description to display a visualization of the behavior of the current settings
232. e symbol rate also determines the I Q bandwidth of the data recording and demodu lation You can change the default rate by entering a value in Hz For details on the possible values see table 2 1 Remote command SENSe DDEMod SRATe on page 310 Transmit filter Type Defines the type of transmit filter An overview of available Transmit filters is provided in table 2 3 Remote command SENSe DDEMod TFILter NAME on page 313 To define the name of the Transmit filter to be used SENSe DDEMod TFILter STATe on page 313 To switch off the Transmit filter Load User Filter Transmit filter Type Opens a file selection dialog box to select the user defined Transmit filter to be used Note If a user defined Transmit filter is selected and the measurement filter is defined automatically see Auto on page 179 a Low ISI measurement filter according to the selected user filter is calculated and used For details see chapter 2 2 7 Customized Filters on page 20 Remote command SENSe DDEMod TFILter NAME on page 313 Configuring VSA measurements Alpha BT Defines the roll off factor Alpha or the filter bandwidth BT The roll off factor and filter bandwidth for Transmit filter is available for RC RRC Gauss and GMSK filter The roll off factor and filter bandwidth for measurement filter is available for RRC filter Remote command Transmit filter SENSe DDEMod FILTer ALPHa on
233. e the measurement filter set to auto matic the internally calculated receive filter will be used as measurement filter Note that this filter is not necessarily suitable for your specific signal The filter is optimized 2 3 Symbol Mapping such that the intersymbol interference is low Hence you will probably be able to see a clear eye diagram and an Vector I Q diagram with a recognizable constellation How ever a filter that has low intersymbol interference might lead to noise enhancement which is commonly undesirable for a measurement filter In order to avoid noise enhancement it is recommended that you e a design your own measurement filter and upload it as a user filter e b select a suitable measurement filter from the list Transferring filter files to the R amp S FSV You can transfer the vaf filter files to the R amp S FSV using a USB memory device To load a user transmit TX filter 1 1 Open the Modulation tab of the Modulation amp Signal Description dialog 2 Select Transmit filter Type User TX Filter Tre User User Filter user_filter Load User Filter 3 Select Load User Filter 4 Load your vaf file from the USB stick To load a user measurement filter 1 Open the Measurement Filter tab of the Demodulation amp Measurement Filter dialog 2 Select Meas Filter Type User Measurement Filter Auto according to TX Filter Type User Filter user filter Load User Filter
234. e160 The bandwidth extension option R amp S FSV B160 is always used if no other restrictions for its use apply see chapter 2 2 2 1 Restrictions on page 15 thus raising the minimum possible sample rate to 32 MHz RST ON Manual operation See Maximum Bandwidth on page 160 TRIGger subsystem ARIGgerensrSEQUuence L EVelBBPOWOer 221 2 rette goo etai cett een e potrei ue 326 TRIGger n SEQuence BBPower HOLDAOff eiiis eese 327 TRIGgeren SEQuence ele cere t c teo rtt nexo net ex E iaa E 327 TRIGger n 2 SEQuence IFPower HOLDOoff eese enne nnne nnne 327 TRIGger n SEQuence 1FPower HYSTeresis ricis cerei eta ci cuis aeos 328 TRIGger n SEQuence HOLDoff TIME AER nnne nennen nnns 328 KREE E e 328 Ree Ee Ee 329 TRIGger lt n gt SEQuence LEVel BBPower Level This command sets the level of the baseband power trigger source for digital input via the R amp S Digital UO Interface R amp S FSV B17 Suffix lt n gt irrelevant Parameters lt Level gt Range 50 dBm to 20 dBm RST 20 DBM TRIGger subsystem Example TRIG LEV BB 30DBM Mode All Manual operation See Trigger Level on page 131 See Trigger Mode on page 160 TRIGger lt n gt SEQuence BBPower HOLDoff lt Value gt This command sets the holding time before the next BB power trigger event for digital input via the R amp S Digital UO Interface R amp S F
235. eaes esse ea A Yo ea a ELA ERR 315 SENSe FREQuency HEES es EES SEENEN deg 315 BENSE SWeEep COUNT VALUE uaa etd eti e ee dx re ee cdi ade eaters 316 SENSe SWEep C OUNt CURR Mb erinnern ni ii oreste TA coupe V ER occ TENENSA 316 SENSe subsystem SENSe JADJust CONFiguration HYSTeresis _OWer Threshold This command defines a lower threshold the signal must drop below before the refer ence level is automatically adjusted when the Auto Level function is performed See SENSe ADJust LEVel on page 284 Parameters Threshold Range 0 to 200 RST 1 dB Default unit dB Example SENS ADJ CONF HYST LOW 2 Example For an input signal level of currently 20 dBm the reference level will only be adjusted when the signal level falls below 18 dBm Manual operation See Lower Level Hysteresis on page 123 SENSe JADJust CONFiguration HYSTeresis UPPer Threshold This command defines an upper threshold the signal must exceed before the reference level is automatically adjusted when the Auto Level function is performed See SENSe ADJust LEVel on page 284 Parameters lt Threshold gt Range 0 to 200 RST 1 dB Default unit dB Example SENS ADJ CONF HYST UPP 2 For an input signal level of currently 20 dBm the reference level will only be adjusted when the signal level rises above 22 dBm Manual operation See Upper Level Hysteresis on page 123 SENSe ADJust CONFigure LEVel DURation
236. ean Constellation Power Mean expected power of the measurement signal at the symbol instants e Max Constellation Power The maximum expected power of the measurement signal at the symbol instants Remote command SENSe DDEMod ECALc MODE on page 284 Offset EVM The offset EVM is only available for Offset QPSK modulated signals e A I Operating Manual 1176 7578 02 05 176 R amp S FSV K70 Instrument Functions for Vector Signal Analysis WEEN Unlike QPSK modulation the Q component of Offset QPSK modulation is delayed by half a symbol period against the component in the time domain The symbol time instants of the and the Q component therefore do not coincide The offset EVM controls the calculation of all results that are based on the error vector It affects the EVM Real Imag and Vector UO result displays as well as the EVM results in the Result Summary EVM and MER You can select the way the R amp S FSV calculates the error vector results If Offset EVM is inactive the R amp S FSV substracts the measured signal from the ref erence signal to calculate the error vector This method results in the fact that the error vector contains two symbol instants per symbol period one that corresponds to the component and one that corresponds to the Q component
237. easurement deviation RST PEAK Usage Query only Mode VSA CALCulate subsystem CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion DDEMod STATistic GIMBalance lt type gt This command queries the results of the Gain Imbalance error measurement of digital demodulation The output values are the same as those provided in the Modulation Accuracy table Suffix lt n gt 1 4 screen number lt m gt 1 4 irrelevant Query parameters lt type gt lt none gt Gain imbalance error for current sweep AVG Average gain imbalance error over several sweeps RPE Peak gain imbalance error over several sweeps SDEV Standard deviation of gain imbalance error PCTL 95 percentile value of gain imbalance error RST PEAK Usage Query only Mode VSA CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion DDEMod STATistic QIMbalance lt type gt This command queries the results of the UO imbalance error measurement of digital demodulation Suffix lt n gt 1 4 screen number lt m gt 1 4 irrelevant Query parameters lt type gt Usage Mode CALCulate subsystem lt none gt IO imbalance error for current sweep AVG Average UO imbalance error over several sweeps RPE Peak UO imbalance error over several sweeps SDEV Standard deviation of UO imbalance error PCTL 95 percentile value of I Q imbalance error RST PEAK Query only VSA CALCulate lt n
238. ec tive of the selected unit Where necessary the scaling of the y axis is changed accord ingly The setting range is 200 dB in 0 1 dB steps Remote command DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe RLEVel OFFSet on page 265 Preamp On Off Switches the preamplifier on and off If option R amp S FSV B22 is installed the preamplifier is only active below 7 GHz If option R amp S FSV B24 is installed the preamplifier is active for all frequencies This function is not available for input from the R amp S Digital UO Interface option R amp S FSV B17 Remote command INPut GAIN STATe on page 276 Input Coupling Toggles the RF input of the R amp S FSV between AC and DC coupling Remote command INPut COUPling on page 272 Attenuation Mode Toggles the attunuation mode In automatic mode the RF attenuation is automatically set as a function of the selected reference level This ensures that the optimum RF attenuation is always used It is the default setting In manual mode the specified RF attenuation is used irrespective of the reference level see RF Attenuation on page 156 Remote command INPut ATTenuation AUTO on page 271 RF Attenuation For Attenuation Mode Manual this value defines the attenuation irrespective of the reference level If electronic attenuation is enabled option R amp S FSV B25 only Attenu ation Mode Auto this setting defines the mechanical attenuation The mechanical at
239. ected device Receiver Type Send To EXIQ The configuration settings defined in the dialog box are transferred to the R amp S EX IQ BOX R amp S FSV K70 Instrument Functions for Vector Signal Analysis gt gt SEE EE ay Firmware Update EXIQ If a firmware update for the R amp S EX IQ BOX is delivered with the R amp S FSV firmware this function is available In this case when you select the softkey the firmware update is performed R amp S Support EXIQ Stores useful information for troubleshooting in case of errors This data is stored in the C NR SNInstrNuser Support directory on the instru ment The SupportSave df1 file contains the instrument settings and input data and can be loaded to the instrument again for inspection later Remember to set the sweep mode to Single Sweep beforehand as Continuous Sweep would immediately over write the loaded input data If you contact the Rohde amp Schwarz support to get help for a certain problem send these files to the support in order to identify and solve the problem faster DiglConf EXIQ Starts the optional R amp S DiglConf application This softkey is only available if the optional software is installed To return to the R amp S FSV application press any key on the front panel The applica tion is displayed with the EXIQ menu regardless of which key was pressed For details on the R amp S DiglConf application see the R amp SGEX IQ BOX Digital
240. ects while restricting the analysis bandwidth to 40 MHz Sample rates higher than 128 MHz can only be achieved using the bandwidth extension 160 MHz The bandwidth extension option R amp S FSV B160 is always used if no other restrictions for its use apply see chapter 2 2 2 1 Restrictions on page 15 thus raising the minimum possible sample rate to 32 MHz Remote command TRACe IQ WBANd STATe on page 325 To query the currently used bandwidth TRACe lt n gt 1Q BWIDth on page 325 Swap UO Swaps the and Q values of the signal Swapping and Q inverts the sideband ON and Q are exchanged inverted sideband Q j l OFF Normal sideband I j Q Remote command SENSe DDEMod SBANd on page 300 Trigger Mode Defines the trigger mode External Defines triggering via a TTL signal at the EXT TRIG GATE IN input connector on the rear panel IF Power Free Run Configuring VSA measurements For this purpose the R amp S FSV uses a level detector at the second intermediate frequency The available trigger levels depend on the RF attenuation and pream plification A reference level offset if defined is also considered IF power triggers are not available together with the bandwidth exten sion option R amp S FSV B160 For details on available trigger levels and trigger bandwidths see the data sheet The bandwidth at the intermediate frequency depends on the RBW and sweep type Sweep mode e RBW gt
241. ed in blue font References References to other parts of the documentation are enclosed by quota tion marks Conventions for Procedure Descriptions When describing how to operate the instrument several alternative methods may be available to perform the same task In this case the procedure using the touchscreen is described Any elements that can be activated by touching can also be clicked using an additionally connected mouse The alternative procedure using the keys on the instrument or the on screen keyboard is only described if it deviates from the standard operating procedures 1 2 3 How to Use the Help System The term select may refer to any of the described methods i e using a finger on the touchscreen a mouse pointer in the display or a key on the instrument or on a key board Notes on Screenshots When describing the functions of the product we use sample screenshots These screenshots are meant to illustrate as much as possible of the provided functions and possible interdependencies between parameters The screenshots usually show a fully equipped product that is with all options instal led Thus some functions shown in the screenshots may not be available in your par ticular product configuration How to Use the Help System Calling context sensitive and general help gt To display the general help dialog box press the HELP key on the front panel The help dialog box View tab is displ
242. ee the R amp S Digital UO Interface R amp S FSV B17 description of the base unit Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Example INP DIQ RANG COUP OFF INPut Subsystem Mode IQ VSA EVDO CDMA WCDMA GSM ADEMOD TDS Manual operation See Adjust Reference Level to Full Scale Level on page 142 INPut DIQ RANGe UPPer lt Level gt Defines or queries the Full Scale Level i e the level that should correspond to an UO sample with the magnitude 1 It can be defined either in dBm or Volt see Full Scale Level on page 142 This command is only available if the optional R amp S Digital UO Interface option R amp S FSV B17 is installed For details see the R amp S Digital UO Interface R amp S FSV B17 description of the base unit Parameters Level numeric value Range 70 711 nV to 7 071 V RST 1V Example INP DIQ RANG 1V Mode A IQ NF TDS VSA CDMA EVDO WCDMA ADEMOD GSM OFDM OFDMA WiBro WLAN Manual operation See Full Scale Level on page 142 INPut DIQ RANGe UPPer UNIT Unit Defines the unit of the full scale level see Level Unit on page 142 The availability of units depends on the measurement application you are using This command is only available if the optional R amp S Digital UO Interface option R amp S FSV B17 is installed For details see the R amp S Digital UO Interface R amp S FSV B17 description of the base unit Parameters Level V dBm dBpW
243. efined by Rohde amp Schwarz can also be deleted A confirmation query is displayed to avoid unintentional deletion of the stand ard Note Restoring predefined standard files The standards predefined by Rohde amp Schwarz available at the time of delivery can be restored using the Restore Stand ards softkey Remote command SENSe DDEMod STANdard DELete on page 311 Standard Defaults Digital Standards Resets the instrument to the default settings of the currently used standard If no standard is currently active the previously active standard is used Remote command SENSe DDEMod STANdard PREset VALue on page 311 Restore Standard Files Digital Standards Restores the standards predefined by Rohde amp Schwarz available at the time of deliv ery Remote command SENSe DDEMod FACTory VALue on page 286 New Folder Digital Standards Creates a new folder in the file system in which you can save the settings file This function is only available if the Save Current Settings as Standard dialog box is open Display Config Opens the Display Configuration dialog box to configure the measurement results display See chapter 3 3 1 6 Display Configuration on page 180 Restore Factory Settings Opens a submenu that allows you to restore all standards and pattern settings on the instrument to the values predefined by Rohde amp Schwarz available at the time of deliv ery Restore Standa
244. elta marker is activated first if necessary If no next higher minimum value is found on the trace level spacing to adjacent values lt peak excursion an execution error error code 200 is produced Suffix lt n gt Selects the measurement window lt m gt Selects the marker Example CALC DELT2 MIN NEXT Sets delta marker 2 to the next higher minimum value Manual operation See Next Min on page 138 CALCulate subsystem CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MINimum PEAK This command positions the delta marker to the current trace minimum The corre sponding delta marker is activated first if necessary Suffix lt n gt Selects the measurement window lt m gt Selects the marker Example CALC DELT3 MIN Sets delta marker 3 to the minimum value of the associated trace CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MINimum RIGHt This command positions the delta marker to the next higher trace minimum on the right of the current value i e ascending X values The corresponding delta marker is acti vated first if necessary If no next higher minimum value is found on the trace level spacing to adjacent values lt peak excursion an execution error error code 200 is produced Suffix lt n gt Selects the measurement window lt m gt Selects the marker Example CALC DELT MIN RIGH Sets delta marker 1 to the next higher minimum value to the right of the current value CALCulate
245. ement is performed independently of successful synchronization Setting parameters MeasOnlyOnPatternzMEAS SYNC RST MEAS Example DDEM SEAR SYNC MODE SYNC The measurement is performed only with successful synchroni zation Mode VSA Manual operation See Auto On Off on page 166 See Meas only if pattern symbols correct on page 166 SENSe subsystem SENSe DDEMod SEARch SYNC NAME lt Name gt This command selects a sync pattern for editing or for a new entry Setting parameters lt Name gt string Example DDEM SEAR SYNC NAME GSM TSCO Selects the pattern GSM TSCO Mode VSA Manual operation See Edit on page 168 See New on page 168 See Name on page 170 SENSe DDEMod SEARch SYNC NSTate lt NState gt This command selects the degree of modulation number of permitted states The pat tern must have been selected before using the DDEM SEARch SYNC NAME command see SENSe DDEMod SEARch SYNC NAME on page 308 The number of permitted states depends on the modulation mode Setting parameters lt NState gt numeric value Example DDEM SEAR SYNC NAME GSM TSCO Selects the GSM TSCO pattern DDEM SEAR SYNC DATA 00010001 Enters 00010001 as data DDEM SEAR SYNC NST 4 Sets the degree of modulation Mode VSA Manual operation See Mod order on page 170 SENSe DDEMod SEARch SYNC PATTern ADD
246. emory of the condition part It only indicates events passed on by the transition filters It is permanently updated by the instrument This part can only be read by the user Reading the register clears it Example STAT QUES Usage Query only Mode all STATus QUEStionable Subsystem STATus QUEStionable MODulation lt n gt ENABle lt Enable gt Determines whether the EVENt bit of the STATus QUEStionable MODulation lt n gt register contributes to the sum bit of the STATus QUEStionable register Suffix lt n gt 1 4 Setting parameters lt Enable gt 0 the associated EVENt bit does not contribute to the sum bit 1 if the associated EVENt bit is 1 the sum bit is set to 1 as well Usage SCPI confirmed Mode all STATus QUEStionable MODulation lt n gt CONDition Contains the sum bit of the next lower register STATus QUEStionable MODulation lt n gt lt ResultType gt Its contents reflect the evaluation status This register part can only be read but not written into or cleared Its contents are not affected by reading Suffix lt n gt 1 4 Usage Query only SCPI confirmed Mode VSA STATus QUEStionable MODulation lt n gt EVENt The EVENt part indicates whether an event has occurred since the last reading it is the memory of the condition part It only indicates events passed on by the transition filters It is permanently updated by the instrument This part can only be
247. emote control sssesessss 325 Filters Activating remote control 286 291 313 Alpha BT remote control sseeess 312 Customized Selecting remote control We Fine Synchronization eren entrent Folders NOW tetti oe en essit oe Hes cte iz CHI en adus 115 Free Run ecl een 130 frequency Le E 116 Frequency CENTET PEE 116 Ee ne E 155 Frequency Absolute R s lt type sisirin naira Eee t 80 Frequency Error Absolute R s lt type erre re eee 93 Frequency Error Relative Res lbtyDe eege etre er AEN 94 Frequency Relative R s lt type acier rn entrer rte eee 81 Frequency response EDGE TIGtS n emen eio rues Low ISI filters Frequency shift keying FSK Frontend SOflkGy ere e rere mtr tags 132 FSK Deviation Error elle Le 175 Full Scale Level Digital UO Interface remote control 273 274 Digital lQ 2i eher end ete initi 142 H Hexadecimal ile 120 Hysteresis Lower Auto level esisiini no 123 Upper Auto level an 123 l ee Ela le E 14 UO Capture Capture Length id eite eege des Capture Length remote control Capture Length AUTO r crionna Capture Oversampling eene Sample Rate Softkey Trigger Mode Usable UO Bandwidth UO data BIOCK elle TE EE 1
248. entere tentis Hx iens oec ra ads 172 daer GE 131 161 Online help Kei Alle Kl LE 8 Options EA B160 Bandwidth extension eh Bandwidth extension ccceccceeesceeteeteeeeeeeeeeeeee FSV B25 eegent Eiere See RF Preamplifier B22 sss Order Demodulation remote control 296 298 Demodulation Remote control 297 Oversampling DIALSUICS qm Overwrite mode P Pattern Search Activating remote control ss 304 309 Auto cotfiguratigh EE 166 Ena blirig 5 nme za 166 UO Correlation Threshold Patterns us Adding to standard ssss 168 Assigning to standard remote control 308 Comment remote Control 305 Copying remote control ssseses 306 Creating a Defining Defining remote Control A 306 Deleting iriiria 169 Deleting remote control 306 Editing teens 168 Enabling 166 168 List 167 168 MANAGING err rte tire teen eret 196 OMSOU es e 153 Offset remote control 23 912 Removing from standard 168 Removing from standard remote control 909 ISestorini treten ne nep temere tiges 115 Selecting remote control 308 309 Settings eene t rre nie 167 Textremote control EE 309 Wor
249. eous fre quency samples of the measured and reference signals are denoted by fygAs n and fage n respectively The dashed outline of the Meas Filter block indicates that this Signal Model Estimation and Modulation Errors operation is optionally de activated based on the corresponding user settings see Measurement Filter on page 179 For the estimation of the magnitude parameters the following least squares criterion is minimized 2 Cyac K a gt Auzas n Keo n with respect to the model parameters K and a where Tg denotes the sampling period used for estimation see Estimation Points Sym on page 177 For estimation of the frequency parameters the following least squares criterion is minimized Crreo B fos fast 3 uzas B fre n c fo fs am with respect to the model parameters B fo f and 7 The term denotes the reference instantaneous frequency with a possibly fractional delay of samples For FSK modulation the default sampling period used for estimation is the capture sampling period 2 6 2 3 Modulation Errors A 2FSK signal is generated using a GMSK frequency pulse Examples of carrier drift and reference deviation are shown in figure 2 57 and figure 2 58 respectively Carrier frequency drift A carrier frequency drift is modeled as a linear change in the carrier frequency with respect to time The effect of carrier drift on the instantaneous frequency of an FSK signal is illustrated
250. equently Asked Questions 1eeeeeeeeeseeeeseeeeeeeee eene nennen nnne nennen nn 348 Annex Formulae and Abbreviations sees 357 meret 357 e erre irt itera ier E trend eer Ae eEE E 371 e ANS ia sia eects tto ieee nepcincete aaa aa 373 et E 380 1 1 Documentation Overview Preface When equipped with application firmware R amp S FSV K70 the analyzer performs vector measurements on digitally modulated signals in the time domain Based on the vector measurements further evaluations e g statistical evaluations can be performed This document contains all information required for operation of an R amp S FSV equipped with Application Firmware R amp S FSV K70 It describes the menus and remote control commands for vector signal analysis as well as some common measurements Documentation Overview The user documentation for the R amp S FSV is divided as follows Quick Start Guide Operating Manuals for base unit and options e Service Manual e Online Help Release Notes Quick Start Guide This manual is delivered with the instrument in printed form and in PDF format on the CD It provides the information needed to set up and start working with the instrument Basic operations and basic measurements are described Also a brief introduction to remote control is given The manual includes general information e g Safety Instruc tions and the following chapters
251. er comprises information about limit violations in Magnitude Error evaluation It can be queried with commands STATus QUEStionable MODulation lt n gt MAGNitude CONDition and STATus QUEStionable MODulation lt n gt MAGNitude EVENt Bit No Meaning 0 Error in current RMS value 1 Error in mean RMS value 2 Error in peak RMS value 3 4 These bits are not used 5 Error in current peak value 6 Error in mean peak value 7 Error in peak peak value 8 15 These bits are not used 5 7 STATus QUESTionable MODulation lt n gt CFRequency Register This register comprises information about limit violations in Carrier Frequency evalua tion It can be queried with commands STATus QUEStionable MODulation lt n gt CFREQuency CONDition and STATus QUEStionable MODulation lt n gt CFREQuency EVENt Bit No Meaning 0 Error in current value 1 Error in mean value 2 Error in peak value 3 15 These bits are not used 5 8 STATus QUESTionable MODulation n IQRHO Reg ister This register comprises information about limit violations in UO offset or RHO evalua tion It can be queried with commands STATus QUESTionable MODulation lt n gt FSK Register STATus QUEStionable MODulation lt n gt IQRHO CONDition and STATus QUEStionable MODulation lt n gt IQRHO EVENt Bit No Meaning 0 Error in current RHO va
252. erence power Signal Model Estimation and Modulation Errors UO Offset Origin Offset Quadrature a 0 5 1 Inphase Fig 2 50 Effect of an UO or origin offset after demodulation and error compensation figure 2 50 shows the effect of an UO offset in the transmitter The UO offset can be compensated for if the corresponding option is selected in the demodulation settings In this case the offset does not affect the EVM Gain Imbalance EE H H H H i H H i H H H H H I H W Inphase Fig 2 51 Effect of gain imbalance The gain difference in the and Q channels during signal generation in the transmitter is referred to as gain imbalance The effect of this error on the constellation diagram and the unit circle are shown in figure 2 51 In the example the gain in the channel is slightly reduced which causes a distortion of coordinates in the direction The unit cir cle of the ideal constellation points has an elliptic shape The gain imbalance can be compensated for if the corresponding option is selected in the demodulation settings In this case the imbalance does not affect the EVM Signal Model Estimation and Modulation Errors Note that the gain imbalance is not estimated and cannot be compensated for in a BPSK signal D Preconditions for Gain Imbalance and Quadrature Error measurements The distortions gain imbalance and quadrature error can only be measured without ambiguity
253. eriod at the sample rate defined by the display points per symbol parameter see Display Points Sym on page 184 d This measurement is mainly of interest when using the MSK or FSK modulation but can also be used for the PSK QAM modulations See also the note for Frequency Error Absolute Measurement Result Display Error Rel LIES A Fre I d M Start 0 sym Fig 3 16 Result display Frequency Error Relative in normal mode Available for source types e Modulation Errors SCPI commands CALC FEED XTIM DDEM ERR MPH to define the required source type see CALCulate lt n gt FEED on page 249 CALC FORM FREO to define the result type see CALCulate lt n gt FORMat on page 249 DISP TRAC Y MODE REL to define relative values see DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe MODE on page 264 TRAC DATA TRACE1 to query the trace results see TRACe lt n gt DATA on page 324 3 1 1 22 Result Summary Shows the Modulation Accuracy results in a table Depending on the modulation type you are using the result summary shows different measurement results Details concerning the specific measurement results can be found in chapter 7 1 For mulae on page 357 R amp S FSV K70 Instrument Functions for Vector Signal Analysis PSK QAM and MSK modulation Spectrum VS Ref Level 10 00 dBm Std EDGE 8PSK SR 270 833 kHz Att 10 dB Freq 1 0 G
254. error the measurement signal must be compared with the corresponding ideal signal For this purpose a reference filter is required which is calculated by the analyzer by convolving the coefficient of the transmit filter Tx filter and the meas filter see figure 2 4 If unfiltered signals have to be measured as well e g to determine nonlinear signal distortions no measurement filter is switched into the signal path and the reference filter is identical to the Transmit filter see figure 2 4 R amp S FSV K70 Brief Description of Vector Signal Analysis In the baseband block diagrams see figure 2 4 the system theoretical transmitter and analyzer filters are shown for PSK and QAM demodulation For the sake of clearness RF stages IF filters and the filter stages of the digital hardware section are not shown For a correct demodulation the following filters have to be accurately specified for the analyzer e Transmit filter filter characteristic of transmitter e Meas filter PSK QAM UserQAM MSK The and the Q part of the measurement and the reference signal are filtered with this filter FSK The instantaneous frequency of the measurement reference signal are filtered In many applications this filter is identical with the ISI filter The receive filter ISI filter is configured internally depending on the Transmit filter The goal is to produce intersymbol interference free points for the demodulation The re
255. erval x x Range 0 0 to 360 RST 3 5 RMS 1 5 Default unit deg 4 3 3 CALCulate subsystem Example CALC2 FEED XTIM DDEM MACC Switch on result summary in screen 2 CALC2 LIM MACC PERR RPE VAL 1 9deg define a limit of 1 9 deg Mode VSA CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy RHO CURRent VALue lt LimitValue gt CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy RHO MEAN VALue lt LimitValue gt CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy RHO PEAK VALue lt LimitValue gt This command defines the lower limit for the current peak or mean Rho limit Note that the limits for the current and the peak value are always kept identical Suffix lt n gt 1 4 window Setting parameters lt LimitValue gt numeric value Range 0 0 to 1 0 RST 0 999 mean 0 9995 Default unit NONE Example CALC2 FEED XTIM DDEM MACC Switch on result summary in screen 2 CALC2 LIM MACC RHO PEAK VAL 0 995 define a limit of 0 995 Mode VSA CALCulate MARKer subsystem CAL Gulate ns MARKer me AQOEFF cies ria aeos suse sexe presas edv asus o eso aano ss d a do S Eii 226 CALOCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion DDEMod STATistic ADROOp eese 226 CAL Culate nz M Abker mzEUNGCHonDDEMod STATiepc ALL 227 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion DDEMod STATistic CFEbror 227 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion DDEMod STATistic EVM ccccccccccesccesseeeeeseeees 228 CA
256. es the bandwidth may vary considerably for the same RBW setting The R amp S FSV is triggered as soon as the trigger level is exceeded around the selected frequency start frequency in the frequency sweep Softkeys and Menu Overview for Vector Signal Analysis R amp S FSV K70 For digital input via the Digital Baseband Interface R amp S FSV B17 the baseband power BB Power is used as the trigger source Remote command TRIG SOUR IFP see TRIGger lt n gt SEQuence SOURce on page 329 TRIG SOUR BBP for digital input Trigger Level Defines the trigger level as a numeric value Remote command TRIGger lt n gt SEQuence LEVel IFPower on page 327 For digital input via the R amp S Digital UO Interface R amp S FSV B17 TRIGger lt n gt SEQuence LEVel BBPower on page 326 Trigger Polarity Sets the polarity of the trigger source The sweep starts after a positive or negative edge of the trigger signal The default set ting is Pos The setting applies to all modes with the exception of the Free Run and Time mode Pos Level triggering the sweep is stopped by the logic 0 signal and restarted by the logical 1 signal after the gate delay time has elapsed Neg Edge triggering the sweep is continued on a O to 1 transition for the gate length duration after the gate delay time has elapsed Remote command TRIGger lt n gt SEQuence SLOPe on page 328 Trigger Offset Opens an edit dialog b
257. et the result of the demodulation can be ambiguous with respect to the absolute phase position because of the rotational symmetry of e g a PSK constellation For example in the case of non differential QPSK modulation the measurement signal the reference signal and the decided IQ symbols may have a constant phase offset of 0 1 2 rr or 3171 2 This offset can only be detected and elimi nated if a pattern was successfully detected at symbol level see also chapter 2 5 4 Pattern Symbol Check on page 55 If modulation types are used where the information is represented by the phase transi tion e g differential PSK or MSK the absolute phase position is not an issue Thus the ambiguity of the starting phase does not have an influence on the symbol deci sions If the measurement signal contains a known pattern it is also possible to use a data aided DA estimator at this stage This means that the estimator operates on a known data sequence i e the pattern If the signal contains a pattern it is possible to choose between the above described non data aided estimator and the data aided estimator with the setting Coarse Synchronization Pattern If the data aided estimator is employed the phase ambiguitiy can be resolved at this stage Operating Manual 1176 7578 02 05 53 Demodulation Overview Demodulation amp Symbol Decision Settings IO Samples Result Range From Extract Result Range
258. etected data RST DDATa Example SENS DDEM FSYN MODE KDATa Mode VSA Manual operation See Fine Synchronization on page 178 SENSe DDEMod KDATa STATe lt KnownDataState gt This command activates the usage of known data The usage of known data is a pre requisite for the BER measurement and can also be used for the fine synchronization See chapter 3 3 7 Working With Known Data Files on page 199 for details Setting parameters KnownDataState ON OFF RST OFF Mode VSA Manual operation See Known Data on page 154 SENSe DDEMod KDATa NAME lt FileName gt This command selects the Known Data file Setting parameters lt FileName gt string the path and file name of the xml file containing known data sequences Example SENS DDEM KDAT NAME D MyData xml Mode VSA Manual operation See Load Data File on page 154 SENSe subsystem SENSe DDEMod MAPPing CATalog This command queries the names of all mappings that are available for the current modulation type and order A mapping describes the assignment of constellation points to symbols Example DDEM MAPP CAT Queries the list of mappings Usage Query only Mode VSA Manual operation See Modulation Mapping on page 150 SENSe DDEMod MAPPing VALue lt Mapping gt This command selects the mapping designated by mapping name for the digital demodulation The mapping describes the assignment of constellation poin
259. evant Parameters lt Range gt Range 10 to 200 RST 100 Default unit dB Example DISP TRAC Y 110dB Manual operation See Y Axis Range on page 117 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe AUTO VALue This command automatically scales the vertical axis of the specified screen Suffix lt n gt 1 4 p 1 6 Example DISP WIND2 TRAC Y SCAL AUTO Auto scaling for screen B Usage Event Mode VSA Manual operation See Y Axis Autorange on page 118 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe AUTO ALL This command automatically scales the vertical axis of all screens DISPlay subsystem Suffix lt n gt 1 4 lt t gt 1 6 Example DISP WIND2 TRAC Y SCAL AUTO ALL Usage Event Mode VSA Manual operation See Y Axis Auto Range All Screens on page 123 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe MODE Mode This command selects the type of scaling of the y axis When SYSTem DISPlay UPDate is turned off this command has no immediate effect on the screen Suffix n window For applications that do not have more than 1 measure ment window the suffix lt n gt is irrelevant t irrelevant Parameters Mode ABSolute absolute scaling of the y axis RELative relative scaling of the y axis RST ABS Example DISP TRAC Y MODE REL DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe PD
260. f All Patterns 4 Press Delete Pattern The pattern is removed from the list of available patterns and can no longer be assigned to any standard Any existing assignments to other standards are removed as well To remove a predefined pattern from a standard 1 In the VSA gt Settings Overview menu select Signal Description 2 Press Pattern Settings 3 Select the pattern from the list of Standard Patterns Configuring VSA measurements 4 Press Remove from Standard The pattern is deleted and removed from the list of Standard Patterns but is still available for assignment from the list of All Patterns 3 3 7 Working With Known Data Files For various vector signal analysis functions the measured signal is compared to a defined ideal reference signal The more precise the reference signal the more precise the results become In the best case the possible data sequences within the signal to analyze are known in advance and can be used to compare the measured data to This is similar to defining a pattern for the entire result range Thus a falsely estimated reference signal due to false symbol decisions is avoided and does not influence the error calculation As of firmware version R amp S FSV 1 70 you can load xml files containing the possible sequences to the R amp S FSV K70 application and use them to compare the measured data to In particular you can use known data for the following functions e Fine
261. f a command in the description The instrument itself does not distinguish between upper and lower case letters Operating Manual 1176 7578 02 05 209 Notation Special Characters A selection of key words with an identical effect exists for several commands These keywords are indicated in the same line they are separated by a vertical stroke Only one of these key words needs to be included in the header of the command The effect of the command is inde pendent of which of the keywords is used Example SENSe FREQuency CW FIXed The two following commands with identical meaning can be created They set the fre quency of the fixed frequency signal to 1 kHz SENSe FREQuency CW 1E3 SENSe FREQuency FIXed 1E3 A vertical stroke in parameter indications marks alternative possibilities in the sense of or The effect of the command differs depending on which parameter is used Example Selection of the parameters for the command SENSe 1 4 AVERage 1 4 TYPE VIDeo LINear l Key words in square brackets can be omitted when composing the header The full command length must be accepted by the instrument for reasons of compatibility with the SCPI standards Parameters in square brackets can be incorporated optionally in the command or omitted as well 0 Parameters in braces can be incorporated optionally in the command either not at all once or Several
262. f the burst The correct value for Offset here would be 58 Solution Try one of the following Remove the offset unknown Enter the correct offset within about 4 symbols of tolerance For more information see Signal Description on page 151 The specified pattern does not coincide with the pattern in your signal In the R amp S FSQ K70 it is possible to search for multiple patterns at the same time For example in a GSM measurement the capture buffer can be checked for all TSCs simultaneously This is not possible in the R amp S FSV K70 Solution Make sure that the correct pattern is specified in the Signal Description dialog For more information see Signal Description on page 151 Message Result Alignment Failed The result range alignment is not possible for the patricular capture buffer The result range needs Q data that has not been captured Operating Manual 1176 7578 02 05 341 R amp S FSV K70 Support trur VSA Ref Level 10 00 dam Att 10 dB Freq 1 SGL TRG EXT BURST pemahaman Evaluation Range A EVM Length Result Range Alignment Result Range Alignment and Evaluation Range Reference Capture e Burst Alignment Left Center Offset Symbol No Burst Start Start 126 sym C Mag CapBuf Visualization
263. ference filter synthesizes the ideal transmitted signal after meas filtering It is calculated by the analyzer from the above filters convolution operation Transmit filter Meas Filter Table 2 2 Typical combinations of Tx and Meas filters Transmit filter Measurement filter Remarks analyzer RC raised cosine filter combination without intersymbol interference ISI RRC root raised cosine RRC filter combination without ISI GMSK filter combination with low ISI Linearized GMSK EDGE NSR standard specific filter filter combina tion with ISI Gauss filter combination with low ISI Rectangular filter combination without ISI Half Sine filter combination without ISI CDMA2000 1X FORWARD Low ISI Meas Filter filter combination without ISI CDMA2000 1X REVERSE Low ISI Meas Filter filter combination without ISI APCO25 C4FM Rectangular filter combination without ISI APCO25 H CPM Rectangular filter combination without ISI APCO25 H DQPSK Low ISI Meas Filter filter combination without ISI APCO25 H D8PSK Narrow Low ISI Meas Filter filter combination without ISI APCO25 H D8PSK Wide Low ISI Meas Filter filter combination without ISI EDGE Narrow Pulse Shape EDGE HSR Narrow standard specific filter filter combina Pulse tion with ISI Operating Manual 1176 7578 02 05 16 2 2 5 Filters and Bandwidths During Signal Processing Transmit filter Measurement filter Remarks
264. ferential encoder d 4 input symbol delayed by the symbol period Ts d output symbol 0 1 of differential encoder The logical symbol mapping is then performed on the XOR coded bitstream d Quadrature Amplitude Modulation QAM In the case of QAM the information is represented by the signal amplitude and phase The symbols are arranged in a square constellation in the UO plane To ensure reliable demodulation symbol numbers should be distributed evenly with respect to the symbol alphabet As a rule of thumb the result length should correspond to at least 8 times the modula tion order For example with 64 QAM a result length of at least 8 64 512 symbols should be used Symbol Mapping QAM Mappings The following QAM mappings are obtained from the mapping of the 1st quadrant which is always rotated by 1r 2 for the subsequent quadrants and supplemented by a GRAY coded prefix for each quadrant Table 2 16 Derivation of QAM mappings In the following diagrams the symbol mappings are indicated in hexadecimal and binary form 0 1 3 2 1100 1101 1111 1110 1000 1001 1011 1010 Fig 2 30 Constellation diagram for 16QAM GRAY including the logical symbol mapping hexadeci mal and binary Symbol Mapping 1011 1001 0001 0011 1010 1000 0000 0010 1110 1100 0100 0110 1111 1101 0101 0111 Fig 2 31 Constellation diagram for 16QAM including the logical symbol mapping for EDGE hexa dec
265. finition The settings in the Pattern dialog box define the pattern TETRA_SA Special Continuous Downlink Burst 4 Fig 3 27 Pattern definition For details on defining a pattern see example Defining a pattern on page 197 EI EE 170 arces 170 eg Bir ic 21 ERECTO TET SURE RU 170 3 3 1 4 Configuring VSA measurements SVMS MOWING e 170 EU le 170 eon eL E T 170 Name Pattern name that will be displayed in selection list Remote command SENSe DDEMod SEARch SYNC NAME on page 308 Description Optional description of the pattern which is displayed in the pattern details Remote command SENSe DDEMod SEARch SYNC TEXT on page 309 Mod order The order of modulation e g 8 for an 8 PSK Remote command SENSe DDEMod SEARch SYNC NSTate on page 308 Symbol format Hexadecimal decimal or binary format Symbols Pattern definition consisting of one or more symbols Remote command SENSe DDEMod SEARch SYNC DATA on page 306 Comment Optional comment for the pattern displayed in the pattern details kept for compatibility with FSQ Remote command SENSe DDEMod SEARch SYNC COMMent on page 305 Result Range and Evaluation Range Settings You configure the result range and evaluation range settings in the Result Range Alignment and Evaluation Range dialog box This dialog box contains the following tabs
266. following Align the result range to a pattern instead of the burst Use a precise external trigger and align the result range to the capture buffer This requires a very precise trigger timing otherwise the result range start may be incorrect again Continuous signals For continuous signals without a pattern the result range is aligned randomly Thus a very large number of possible sequences must be predefined Use a precise external trigger and align the result range to the capture buffer This requires a very precise trigger timing otherwise the result range start may be incor rect again 3 3 7 2 How to Load Known Data Files Known Data files are loaded in the Modulation amp Signal Description settings To load an existing Known Data file 1 In the Settings Overview select Modulation Signal Description 2 Switch to the Known Data tab 3 Activate the usage of a Known Data file by selecting the Known Data option This enables the Load Data File function 4 Select the Load Data File button A file selection dialog box is displayed 5 Select the xml file which contains the possible data sequences of the input signal The file must comply with the syntax described in chapter 3 3 7 4 Reference Known Data File Syntax Description on page 202 The header information of the xml file is displayed in the dialog box Once a Known Data file has been loaded the Bit Error Rate result display becomes
267. frequency frequency pulse f k Magnitude 1 Fig 2 5 Modulator with Transmit filter in detail As the measurement filters of the R amp S FSV K70 have low pass characteristics they suppress high frequency distortion components in the Meas Ref Error signal The errors are weighted spectrally Thus turning off the measurement filter can have an influence on the numeric and graphical error values However the measurement filter should be switched off if non linear distortions have to be measured they usually pro duce high frequency components 2 2 7 Predefined measurement filters Filters and Bandwidths During Signal Processing The most frequently required measurement filters are provided by the R amp S FSV K70 Table 2 4 Overview of predefined measurement filters EDGE NSR Measurement filter required for the EDGE Normal Symbol Rate standard see 3GPP TS 45 005 chapter 4 6 Modulation Accuracy The resulting system is NOT inter symbol interfer ence free EDGE HSR Narrow Pulse Measurement filter required for the EDGE High Symbol Rate Narrow Pulse standard EDGE HSR Wide Pulse Measurement filter required for the EDGE High Symbol Rate Wide Pulse standard Gauss Classic Gauss filter with an adjustable BT Low ISI Meas Filter Measurement filter implemented to retain a low intersymbol inferference Best suited for eye diagrams or UO vector dia grams Not necessarily suited fo
268. ftkey Note This function is not available for stop frequencies or center frequencies in zero span 7 GHz In this case the electronic and mechanical attenuation are summarized and the electronic attenuation can no longer be defined individually As soon as the stop or center frequency is reduced below 7 GHz this function is available again When the electronic attenuator is switched off the corresponding RF attenuation mode auto manual is automatically activated Remote command INPut EATT AUTO on page 275 EI Atten Mode Auto Man This softkey defines whether the electronic attenuator value is to be set automatically or manually If manual mode is selected an edit dialog box is opened to enter the value This softkey is only available with option R amp S FSV B25 and only if the elec tronic attenuator has been activated via the El Atten On Off softkey Note This function is not available for stop frequencies or center frequencies in zero span 7 GHz In this case the electronic and mechanical attenuation are summarized and the electronic attenuation can no longer be defined individually As soon as the stop or center frequency is reduced below 7 GHz electronic attenuation is available again If the electronic attenuation was defined manually it must be re defined The attenuation can be varied in 1 dB steps from 0 to 30 dB Other entries are rounded to the next lower integer value Operating Manual 1176 7578 02 05 12
269. g Attenuation Settings Attenuation Mode Manual RF Attenuation El Attenuation Start 541 667 kHz Stop 541 667 kHz Re EE 155 3eference BEE 155 Ref beval OffGet 2 ree ri oca eta ERR Vae ee avv erasa eur eed bae ya E nativaudedcdensacteasuaneds 156 Preamp OMOR e 156 INPUt eorom MH 156 Attenuatlon MOG EE 156 FRAMES Ee EE 156 El Atdtenuation ONOFF nenna na a a Ea 157 Frequency Defines the center frequency The allowed range of values for the center frequency depends on the frequency span span gt 0 SPAN pin 2 s fcenter S fmax z Spanmin 2 span 0 0 Hz S feenter S fmax fmax and span are specified in the data sheet Remote command SENSe FREQuency CENTer on page 314 Reference Level Defines the reference level in dBm Operating Manual 1176 7578 02 05 155 Configuring VSA measurements The reference level value is the maximum value the AD converter can handle without distortion of the measured value Signal levels above this value will not be measured correctly which is indicated by the IFOVL status display To get an ideal reference level use Auto Level function For more information see e Auto Level on page 122 Remote command DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe RLEVel on page 265 Ref Level Offset Defines the arithmetic level offset This offset is added to the measured level irresp
270. g abbreviations Abbreviation Description A spectrum analysis A F spectrum analysis span gt 0 only frequency mode A T spectrum analysis zero span only time mode ADEMOD analog demodulation option R amp S FSV K7 BT Bluetooth option R amp S FSV K8 CDMA CDMA 2000 base station measurements option R amp S FSV K82 EVDO 1xEV DO base station analysis option R amp S FSV K84 GSM GSM Edge measurements option R amp S FSV K10 IQ IQ Analyzer mode OFDM WiMAX IEEE 802 16 OFDM measurements option R amp S FSV K93 OFDMA WiBro WiMAX IEEE 802 16e OFDMA WiBro measurements option R amp S FSV K93 NF Noise Figure measurements R amp S FSV K30 PHN Phase Noise measurements R amp S FSV K40 PSM Power Sensor measurements option R amp S FSV K9 SFM Stereo FM measurements optionR amp S FSV K7S SPECM Spectogram mode option R amp S FSV K14 TDS TD SCDMA base station UE measurements option R amp S FSV K76 K77 VSA Vector Signal Analysis option R amp S FSV K70 WCDMA 3GPP Base Station measurements option R amp S FSV K72 3GPP UE measure ments option R amp S FSV K73 WLAN WLAN TX measurements option R amp S FSV K91 The spectrum analysis mode is implemented in the basic unit For the other modes the corresponding options are required Upper Lower Case Notation Upper lower case letters are used to mark the long or short form of the key words o
271. gger menu which contains the following softkeys uiii pm 130 34 130 IF Power Baseband POWAE tereti rei doi a Centa uri saya Fete ES 130 WIG GST WAV ER 131 TRIG GSE e 131 TAG GSU OUSC c 131 MAGGS OR Ot LE 132 Free Run The start of a sweep is not triggered Once a measurement is completed another is started immediately Remote command TRIG SOUR IMM see TRIGger lt n gt SEQuence SOURce on page 329 External Defines triggering via a TTL signal at the EXT TRIG GATE IN input connector on the rear panel Remote command TRIG SOUR EXT see TRIGger lt n gt SEQuence SOURce on page 329 IF Power Baseband Power For this purpose the R amp S FSV uses a level detector at the second intermediate fre quency The available trigger levels depend on the RF attenuation and preamplification A refer ence level offset if defined is also considered IF power triggers are not available together with the bandwidth extension option R amp S FSV B160 For details on available trigger levels and trigger bandwidths see the data sheet The bandwidth at the intermediate frequency depends on the RBW and sweep type Sweep mode e RBW gt 500 kHz 40 MHz nominal e RBW s 500 kHz 6 MHz nominal FFT mode e RBW gt 20 kHz 40 MHz nominal e RBW s 20 kHz 6 MHz nominal Note Be aware that in auto sweep type mode due to a possible change in sweep typ
272. ging standard patterns see chapter 3 3 6 Managing patterns on page 196 Note Pattern details Pattern details for the currently focussed pattern are displayed at the upper right hand side of the dialog box You can refer to these details for example when you want to add a new pattern to the standard and want to make sure you have selected the correct one Prefix Advanced Settings Shows only patterns that contain the specified prefix Show Compatible Advanced Settings Shows only patterns that are compatible to the selected modulation mode Configuring VSA measurements Show All Advanced Settings Shows all patterns regardless of the selected standard Pattern Search On Advanced Settings If enabled the instrument can adapt its result range to the selected pattern Remote command SENSe DDEMod SEARch SYNC STATe on page 309 Meas only if pattern symbols correct Advanced Settings If enabled measurement results are only displayed and averaged if a valid pattern has been found For measurements of signals with patterns that are averaged over several sweeps this option should be enabled so that erroneous measurements do not affect the result of averaging Remote command SENSe DDEMod SEARch SYNC MODE on page 307 Add to Standard Advanced Settings Adds the selected patterns to the list of available patterns Standard Patterns For details see To add a predefined pattern to a standard
273. he signal amplitude is scaled to the ideal reference signal Available for source types e Meas amp Ref Signal Measurement Result Display Ref Level 10 00 dBm Std GSM_NormalBurst SR 270 833 kHz Att 30dB Freq 15 0GHz ResLen 178 Input RF 1M Clrw Start 15 0 sym Stop 163 0 sym Fig 3 2 Result display Magnitude Relative in normal mode SCPI commands CALC FEED XTIM DDEM MEAS to define the required source type see CALCulate lt n gt FEED on page 249 CALC FORM MAGN to define the result type see CALCulate lt n gt FORMat on page 249 DISP TRAC Y MODE REL to define relative values see DISPlay WINDowc n TRACe t Y SCALe MODE on page 264 TRAC DATA TRACE1 to query the trace results see TRACe n DATA on page 324 3 1 1 3 Phase Wrap The phase or argument of the signal the display is limited to the phase value range of 180 180 Phase yas t Z MEAS t with tzn Tp and Tp the duration of one sampling period at the sample rate defined by the display points per symbol parameter see Display Points Sym on page 184 Available for source types e Meas amp Ref Signal Measurement Result Display Ref Level 10 00 dBm Std GSM_NormalBurst SR 270 833 kHz Att 30 dB Freq 15 0 GHz Res Len 178 Input RF SGL A SE ESEIRSS TH 1M Clrw CDN AIL IE r MULA Start LIBE ic Fig 3 3 Result display Phase Wrap in normal mode SCPI comm
274. he teen rtt thi Feci regere ree ERR TR epa 290 SENSeEDDEMOQG MAPPingEVALUe ctetu ea Ee ecu te beue ec date reta d Y teo EE Age SENSe EDDEMOGC MElIEter AUPEIa as ci rtr et Re Ere oet eee GIO EADEM E AT SENSeEDDEMOQ MEIEteri AUTO 12121 recette Eg oed o ER SENSeEDDEMOGQ MFEIEter NAME eo c Ent Rte Ld Ee eR RSEN RAE E SUC Eve EVEN CHRIS lice anand oe SENSeEDDEMOGQMEIEter USER fastens tbl ett seas decre pr RI E Heo BERE E ERRARE ey Ed SENSe DDEMod MFILter STATe SENSeEDDEMOQG MSK E ORMal 5 tects ENEE SENSe DDEMod NORMalize ADROOD 22 5 rtt enti ntn nh to think than tra edere eR EPA EE SEES S 292 SENSeEDBDEMod NORMalize CF DRIift see 2 rro tt ot eren rena tnra eda e Ye ie Feci ene ten ge 293 SENSeEDDEMod NORMalize PDERLEGE sscoii cente ehe eege deeg 293 IGENSGel DDEModNOHMaltzelOlMbalance nennen rennen EN TATE 293 SENSeEDDEMod NORMalize l QOFfset 2 12e ENEE er t egeat ird edge ic e CER gs 293 SENSe DDEMod NORMalize VALue SENSE DDEMOd EE SENSeEDDBEMod PRESStCOALG rte restadi rre erp iee E eii ea SENSeEDDEMOG PRESetRLEVAel 5 troi io er dE v EET Re ded Ue er IR ac iaceo Ea n SORS EE eee eee SENSe DDEMod PRESet STANdard SENSeEDDEMOG PSK FORMAL ttt rte ttg e Re AEN eer SENSeEDDEMoG PSK NS Tale obras ed coax eus bed CASU De ERR dE e RN SENSeEDDEMOQG QAM F ORMal sissies recon edic ie DR txt PR ELEE OE ei HAE OE DX red FR E P E aTe SENSe
275. i gt TEE 247 CALCulate sn DDEM SPECtrum S TATe 2 12 iecore eee rk bhecceertiaecatveunaeedeeees 247 CALCulate n ELINsstartstop STATe enceinte trn inn ette einn ke Rea Rr ken R RR KEEN 248 CALCulatesmes ELIN startstop VALWG EE 248 CAG ete ET EE 249 GAL Gulat lt ne FORMAL EE 249 CAL Culate nzF kDEViaton COMensation sees naa 251 CALCulate n FSK DEViation RE terence REI ative nete 251 CALCulate lt n gt FSK DEViation REFerence VALUE ccceeeeeeeeeee eee edeeeeeeeeeeseteeeeeeereeeees 252 CALOCulate n STATistics CCDF STATe essere nennen inen 252 CALCuUlatesn gt STA Tistios MODE EN 252 CALC latesn gt STA Tolices TEE 293 CAL Culate nz GTATlstce GCAleA Oo anina Naani 253 CAL Culate nz GTATlstce GCAlexvbBCOunt eene aa nene nsns nn snnt nian 253 CALCGulatesmsSTATIstics SCALbe Y LOWEN i eati ere tete ooh ete cert dx 254 GALE Gulate ns STATIsties SCALE N EN EE 254 CAL Culate nz GTATlstce GCAlexv Uber 254 CALCulate n TRACe t ADJust ALIGnment OFFSet assesses esee 255 CALOCulate n TRACe t ADJust ALIGnment DEFault ecce 255 CAL Culate nzTR ACectADJustfVAl ue 256 CALCulate subsystem CALCGUulatesms TRACE SP VALUS s tat erc aote tante vete natae 256 e Ae ET ae le RE 257 GAL Oulatesmsoc UNIT TIME EE 257 CALCulate lt n gt BERate Format Queries the Bit Error Rate results The available results are described in ch
276. ignal Description Signal Type Continuous Signal Burst Signal Burst Min Length 738 462 Max Length 300 sym 1 108 m Start 0 sym j Stop 1300 sym Run In G sym 11 077 EE E ig 3 sym 11 077 Fig 6 5 Example for a failed burst search due too a burst that is too short Solution try one of the following Switch on the Magnitude Capture Buffer result display Move a marker to the start of the burst Move a delta marker to the end of the burst and compare the burst length to the settings in the Signal Description dialog Increase the search tolerance in the Burst Search dialog Keep an eye on the green red field If the burst search succeeds you can see the length of the found bursts Set the minimum burst length to 50 and the maximum burst length to 5000 For more information see Signal Description on page 151 chapter 3 2 9 Softkeys of the Marker Menu R amp S FSV K70 on page 134 Burst Search on page 163 e The signal is highly distorted and or has modulation noise One possibility to enhance the robustness of the burst search is to increase the minimum gap length If the bursts within your capture buffer are not closely spaced it makes sense to increase the value of this parameter e M M B B Operating Manual 1176 7578 02 05 339 R amp S F
277. imal and binary 1011 1001 0010 0011 1010 1000 0000 0001 1101 1100 0100 0110 1111 1110 0101 0111 Fig 2 32 Constellation diagram for 16QAM including the logical symbol mapping for DVB C hexa decimal and binary 11010 11110 01011 01111 Fig 2 33 Constellation diagram for 32QAM including the logical symbol mapping for DVB C hexa decimal and binary Symbol Mapping e e e e 001000 001001 001101 001100 e e e 001010 001011 001111 001110 H H e 000010 000011 000111 000110 H H H 000000 000001 000101 000100 Fig 2 34 Constellation diagram for 64QAM including the logical symbol mapping for DVB C hexa decimal and binary the binary form shows the upper right section of the diagram only H H H H 0011010 0011011 0001011 0001010 e D H D 0011000 0011001 0001001 0001000 H H D e e D 0010000 0010001 0010101 0010100 0011100 0011101 H D H H D H 0010010 0010011 0010111 0010110 0011110 0011111 D D D D D D 0000010 0000011 0000111 0000110 0001110 0001111 H H H H D H 0000000 0000001 0000101 0000100 0001100 0001101 Fig 2 35 Constellation diagram for 128QAM including the logical symbol mapping hexadecimal and binary the figure shows the upper right sections of the diagram only Fig 2 36 Constellation diagram for 256QAM including the logical symbol mapping hexadecimal the figure shows the upper right section of the diagram only 2 3 9 User QAM Symbol Mapping In the case of a User
278. in figure 2 57 Signal Model Estimation and Modulation Errors Instantaneous Frequency GMSK Modulation Frequency Ref Deviation Freq Ref Freq Meas M 5 10 15 20 25 30 Time Symbols Fig 2 57 The reference and distorted instantaneous frequency of a GMSK signal with a carrier fre quency drift FSK deviation error The FSK deviation error is the difference between the measured frequency deviation and the reference frequency deviation as entered by the user see FSK Ref Deviation on page 150 The evidence of a deviation error in the instantaneous frequency of an FSK signal is demonstrated in figure 2 58 Signal Model Estimation and Modulation Errors Instantaneous Frequency GMSK Modulation Meas Deviation Frequency Ref Deviation Freq Ref Freq Meas 0 5 10 15 20 25 30 Time Symbols Fig 2 58 The reference and measured instantaneous frequency of a GMSK signal with reference deviation error A Instrument Functions for Vector Signal Analysis To open the VSA menu If the Vector Signal Analysis VSA mode is not the active measurement mode press the MODE key and select the VSA softkey If the VSA mode is already active press the HOME key The VSA menu is dis played After activation the contents of the menus are adapted to the functions of the VSA option The menus of the option are described in chapter 3 2 Softkeys and Menu Overview for Vector Signal Analysis
279. indicated in the Signal Description dialog Iv jut scoring Co Use the parameter Offset and Make sure the burst search is switched on in the Burst Search dialog Result Length in the Result Range Setting dialog to move your result range to the desired point in the capture buffer Make sure the pattern search is switched on yes Do you Found Message yes see a Burst Not o you see a Pattern Not Found Message se an external trigger and a appropriate trigger offset Go back to Qo no Make sure your Result Range Alignment reference is Burst Range Setting Dialog Make sure your Result Range Alignment reference is Pattern Waveform Range Setting Dialog 6 3 Result Range Alignment C capture Burst 8 Pattern Waveform C Left Genter Right Reference Result Range Alignment Reference Capture Burst Pattern Waveform Left Center Right Alignment Go back to Alignment Frequently Asked Questions Problem The trace is not entirely visible within the measurement screen Problem The trace of the measurement signal is visible in the measurement screen the trace of the reference signal is not Problem The measurement screen does not show average results Problem The spectrum
280. ing Problem The spectrum is not displayed in the logarithmic domain Solution 1 Press the key to select the measurement screen 2 Press the AMPT key 3 Press the Unit softkey 4 Press the Y Axis Unit softkey 5 Select dB Operating Manual 1176 7578 02 05 350 R amp S FSV K70 Support Problem The Vector I Q result display and the Constellation UO result display look different Spectrum VSA Ref Level 1 96 dBm Std EDGE_8PSK SR 270 833 kHz Att 22 dB Freq 1 0 GHz Res Len 148 SGL BURST PATTERN i Crw B Const 1 Q Meas amp Ref e 1M Clrw Start 0 sym Stop 148 sym Start 2 91 Stop 2 91 C Mag CapBuf e1cClw D Vector I Q Meas amp Ref iM Clrw Tt Start 0 sym Stop 1500 sym Start 2 91 Date 16 MAR 2010 10 08 34 Reason e The Vector UO diagram shows the measurement signal after the measurement fil ter and synchronization e The Constellation UO diagram shows the de rotated constellation i e for a rr 4 DQPSK 4 instead of 8 points are displayed The inter symbol interference has been removed In case the measurement filter does not remove the inter symbol interference the screens show measurements that are significantly different Problem The Constellation UO measurement result display has a different num ber of constellation points in the R amp S FSQ K70 and the R amp S FSV K70 Reason In the FSQ K70 the Constellation UO measurement displays the symbol instants of the Vector UO measu
281. ings to your specific requirements e Configuring the measurement settings and if necessary storing the settings in a file Settings 7 DUI EM 146 e Deining the Result Rangos co dede ms cede n er i cds nee e 186 e Changing the EE e DEE 189 Managing standard settings fIles teen reta pde a eren dens 192 e Working with Pattern Gearches AAA 194 e Managing pattertis nicis E Luo e ER ELE De eoa a oeil 196 e Working With Known Data Files cr rt ettet dus 199 e Working with Limits for Modulation Accuracy Measurements 204 3 3 4 Settings Overview An overview of the current and required settings is available using the Settings Over view softkey in the VSA menu see Settings Overview on page 114 The overview visualizes the data flow in the Vector Signal Analyzer summarizes the current settings and provides a convenient way to configure all measurement settings From the overview you can access the individual settings dialog boxes by clicking the required topic For details on the displayed information see the description of the indi vidual dialog boxes below 3 3 1 1 Configuring VSA measurements To reset the instrument to the default settings of the default standard click Set to Default _ Settings Overview EP x Modulation QPSK Symbol Rate 3 84 MHz TX Filter RRC Capture Length 8000 Alpha BT 0 22 Center Freq 15 0 GHz Oversampling DEI Signa
282. inimum If no next higher minimum value is found on the trace level spacing to adjacent values lt peak excursion an execution error error code 200 is produced Suffix lt n gt Selects the measurement window lt m gt Selects the marker Example CALC MARK2 MIN Positions marker 2 to the minimum value of the trace CALC MARK2 MIN NEXT Positions marker 2 to the next higher maximum value Usage Event Manual operation See Next Min on page 138 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MINimum PEAK This command positions the marker on the current trace minimum The corresponding marker is activated first or switched to marker mode if necessary If no minimum value is found on the trace level spacing to adjacent values lt peak excursion an execution error error code 200 is produced Suffix lt n gt Selects the measurement window lt m gt depends on mode Selects the marker CALCulate subsystem Example CALC MARK2 MIN Positions marker 2 to the minimum value of the trace Usage Event Manual operation See Min on page 138 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MINimum RIGHt This command positions a marker to the next higher trace minimum on the right of the current value i e in ascending X direction If no next higher minimum value is found on the trace level spacing to adjacent values lt peak excursion an execution error error code 200 is produced Suffix lt n gt Select
283. ion See Preamp On Off on page 120 INPut SELect lt Source gt This command selects the signal source for measurements Parameters lt Source gt RF DIQ RF Radio Frequency RF INPUT connector DIQ Digital IQ only available with R amp S Digital UO Interface option R amp S FSV B17 RST RF INSTrument Subsystem Example INP SEL RF Mode A IQ NF TDS VSA CDMA EVDO WCDMA ADEMOD GSM OFDM OFDMA WiBro WLAN Manual operation See Input Path on page 141 4 8 INSTrument Subsystem INSTrument SELect lt Mode gt This command switches the instrument to VSA mode Parameters lt Mode gt DDEM VSA mode Example INST SEL DDEM Mode VSA INSTrument NSELect lt Mode gt This command switches the instrument to VSA mode Parameters lt Mode gt 2 VSA mode Example INST NSEL 2 Mode VSA 4 9 MMEMory Subsystem MMEMory LOAD IQ STATe 1 lt FileName gt This command loads the UO data from the specified iq tar file Note switch to single sweep mode INIT CONT OFF before importing UO data as otherwise the instrument will continue to measure data and display the current results rather than the imported data Parameters lt FileName gt Complete file name including the path Example MMEM LOAD IQ STAT 1 C R_S Instr user data ig tar Loads UO data from the specified file Usage Setting only MME Mon Subsystem MMEMory SELect ITEM VIQData Mode If enabled the cap
284. ions The ana lyzer trace is shifted against the transmitter trace by this scale factor Signal Model Estimation and Modulation Errors Phase Distortion Table 2 22 Effect of nonlinear phase distortions Nonlinear distortions phase distortion transmitter Phase distortion analyzer Phase Distortion Tranarntter Imagnary 0 Di 02 OF 04 Res 0 06 OF 0 Phase Destomen Analyzer D 0 02 03 O4 05 O06 OF O8 Rex The table 2 22 illustrates the effect of nonlinear phase distortions on a 64QAM signal only the 1st quadrant is shown The transfer function is level dependent the highest effects occur at high input levels while low signal levels are hardly affected These effects are caused for instance by saturation in the transmitter output stages The sig nal is scaled in the analyzer so that the average square magnitude of the error vector is minimized The table 2 22 shows the signal after scaling Table 2 23 Phase transfer functions Nonlinear distortions phase distortion transmitter Phase distortions analyzer Phase Transier Function Tranentier Phase Eno ae KREE 34 42 3 38 38 4 2 09 Int Power og Phase Tianster F unetoe Anayzer Phas Error In o Bb 5 d mm 6 6 4 2 0 Input Poser Gog table 2 23 show a logarithmic display of the phase transfer functions The analyzer trace is shifted by the phase described above as against the transmitter
285. is auto matically adjusted when the Auto Level function is performed Remote command SENSe ADJust CONFiguration HYSTeresis LOWer on page 283 Y Axis Autorange Adapts the y axis to the current measurement results only once not dynamically in the focussed window To adapt the range of all screens together use the Y Axis Auto Range All Screens function For more information see e Y Axis Auto Range All Screens on page 123 Remote command DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe AUTO VALue on page 263 Y Axis Auto Range All Screens Adapts the y axis to the current measurement values only once not dynamically in all measurement windows Remote command DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe AUTO ALL on page 263 Softkeys of the Sweep Menu R amp S FSV K70 The SWEEP key displays the Sweep menu which contains the following softkeys Softkeys and Menu Overview for Vector Signal Analysis R amp S FSV K70 COmtMUOUS SWORD DEE 124 Single SWOOP E 124 Continue Single Gweenp AAA 124 PRONG EE 124 Statisties EE 124 Select Result DEE 125 Continuous Sweep Sets the continuous sweep mode the sweep takes place continuously according to the trigger settings This is the default setting The trace averaging is determined by the Statistic Count Remote command INIT CONT ON see INITiate lt n gt CONTinuous on page 269 Single Sweep Sets the single sweep mode after triggering starts th
286. is is passed on Both the symbol decisions and the IQ measurement signal are then rotated with this pattern phase for the whole result range thus resolving the phase ambiguity For more information refer to chapter 2 5 3 Demodulation and Symbol Decisions on page 53 chapter 2 5 2 I Q Pattern Search on page 52 Signal Model Estimation and Modulation Errors Pattern Symbol Check ze Symbol Decisions Result Range Pattern Start as Detected by the IQ Pattern Search Check for all Rotated Passed on to 3 1 2 2 0 1 3 Reference Signal Generation 1 0 3 3 2 0 1 Fig 2 45 Pattern Symbol Check algorithm 2 6 Signal Model Estimation and Modulation Errors This section describes the signal and error models used within the R amp S FSV K70 VSA option The estimation algorithms used to quantify specific modulation errors are then outlined The chapter is divided into two parts 2 6 14 PSK QAM and MSK Modulatton nenne 57 2611 Eror Model escran eire ena o EE E EENE EEEE OENE ea aaia 57 261 2 Ee 58 26 13 Modulatloi Errors ederet EE EEEE DEEE 59 2 6 2 FSK lee TEE E 66 Signal Model Estimation and Modulation Errors 2 0 2 1 ErrorModel EE 68 2 00 22 Estlimalion E 69 2 6 2 3 Modulation Erl Senis ttt rerit eoe deste d eic sete cea been tas Pe Dee dE ERE Ede 70 2 6 1 PSK QAM and MSK Modulation 2 6 1 1 Error Model Modelling Modulation Errors Modulated RF Signal
287. itude Error Phase Error Frequency Error Absolute Frequency Error Relative Modulation Accuracy Result Summary Remote command CALCulate lt n gt FORMat on page 249 Result Type Transformation The result type transformation parameters set the evaluation method of the measure ment results These settings are not available for the following source types see Source on page 181 e Symbols Modulation Accuracy For more information see chapter 3 1 Measurement Result Display on page 74 Normal X axis displays time values Spectrum X axis displays frequency values Statistics X axis displays former y values Y axis displays statistical informa tion e Trace 1 the probability of occurrence of a certain value is plotted against the value Trace 2 the cumulated probability of occurance is plotted against the value Remote command CALCulate lt n gt DDEM SPECtrum STATe on page 247 CALCulate lt n gt STATistics CCDF STATe on page 252 Configuring VSA measurements Display Points Sym Sets the number of display points that are displayed per symbol If more points per symbol are selected than the given Capture Oversampling rate the additional points are interpolated for the display The more points are displayed per symbol the more detailed the trace becomes Note If the Capture Buffer is used as the signal source the Capture Oversampling rate defines the number of displayed p
288. king with Se PEAKSEARCH EE Phase Error ISesult type 201 iie here peterent redo 93 Phase shift keying Dk 23 Phase Unwrap ISesult tyD amp iret eee ENEE 79 Phase Wrap FRESUIE type ier ente centena 78 polarity external trigger eme rns 131 162 trigger edge a pre reis ET Preamplifier B22 ee eden 120 156 Printing aC rc M 111 e Ee 111 PSK mixed forms creer rtm eene tet entre 29 R R amp S Digital UO Interface B17 144 272 279 280 R amp S Support eru 143 145 Range Settings frc emgeet de Eed ege 133 Ranges EEN eege leede totes es zu df Softkey statistic measurements 118 Softkey Symbol Table AA 119 Real Imag I Q Result tyD amp iue ior et eee n rre 82 Cre mile 16 Recording tool Knowrt data unen eterni 201 Reference Isesult range acte ene anni 172 Reference filter teer inco 16 Reference level ONSON 1 ice ere Leto eee 122 Offset RF Settings AAA 156 Reference Level Digital IQ c rore wallet 142 RESENS e 117 155 Restore Factory Settings SOflKGy 5i tree rennes 115 Restore Pattern Files SOflKGy eebe Eege rette Ptr n denos 115 Restore Standard Files nic e 115 Result ranges ll un 172 DEMING ET 186 el 109 ue ET 171 VE E 172 OVER ADDING EE 346 EE nl EEN 172 SEIS CUNG EE 125 Result Summary Result type ege en ree ENEE Result type Result type transformation Result types Display Configuration
289. l Type Continuous Ref Level 10 0 dBm Dig Filter BW 1 229E 07 Burst Length 102 1600 Attenuation 10 dB Trigger Mode Free Run Pattern DEE Preamp Off Trigger Offset 0 0 sym Signal Description Res Length 800 Reference CAPTURE Alignment LEFT Screen A I Q Const Meas amp Ref Demodulation Result Range Screen B Result Summary Meas Filter RRC Entire Result Range Screen Mag CapBuf Alpha 0 22 Screen D Stat Mag CapBuf Burst Pattern Search Off Off Measurement e i Evaluation Display Filter On Range Configuration e Modulation and Signal Description Gettngs AA 147 e Frontend and UO Capture Geitings cesses eeneeeeeaeeeseneeetiaeeeeeneeees 154 e Burstand Patten Search Settings onte tb he e Prendre Du dl 163 e Result Range and Evaluation Range Gettnges 170 e Demodulation and Measurement Filter Gettimgs AAA 174 e Display ConfigutatiOn u acere erar epe ena bn ite Bend ea 180 Modulation and Signal Description Settings You describe the properties of the signal to be measured in the Modulation and Signal Description Settings dialog box This dialog box is displayed when you select Modu lation Signal Description in the Settings Overview The dialog box contains the following tabs e Modulation on page 148 Signal Description on page 151 e Known Data on page 153 R amp S FSV K70 Instrument Functions for Vector Signal Analysis Modulation The Modula
290. lation Measurement Result Display C ConstRot I Q Meas amp Ref amp 1M Clrw D Const I Q Meas amp Ref 1M Clrw Start 2 91 Stop 2 91 Fig 3 10 Result display Constellation I Q Rotated vs common Constellation HO for 8PSK mod ulation SCPI commands CALC FEED XTIM DDEM MEAS to define the required source type see CALCulate lt n gt FEED on page 249 CALC FORM RCON to define the result type see CALCulate lt n gt FORMat on page 249 TRAC DATA TRACE1 to query the trace results see TRACe n DATA on page 324 3 1 1 13 Vector UO The complex source signal as an X Y plot all available samples as defined by the dis play points per symbol parameter see Display Points Sym on page 184 are drawn and connected The scaling of the capture buffer is e relative to the current reference level if you are using the RF input e relative to the full scale level if you are using the UO input Available for source types Capture Buffer Meas amp Ref Signal Error Vector Measurement Result Display MSK QPSK B I Q Vector Meas amp Ref 6 1M Clrw B I Q Vector Meas amp Ref Mi 1 0 715 0 698 103 000 sym Start 2 43 Stop 2 43 SCPI commands CALC FEED XTIM DDEM MEAS to define the required source type see CALCulate lt n gt FEED on page 249 CALC FORM COMP to define the result type see CALCulate lt n gt FORMat on page 249 TRAC DA
291. le Mode Manual operation MSK PSK QAM QPSK FSK UQAM QPSK Quad Phase Shift Key PSK Phase Shift Key MSK Minimum Shift Key QAM Quadrature Amplitude Modulation RST PSK SENS DDEM FORM QAM Selects QAM modulation VSA See Modulation Type on page 148 SENSe DDEMod FSK NSTate lt FSKNstate gt This command defines the demodulation of the FSK modulation scheme Setting parameters lt FSKNstate gt Mode 2 4 2 2FSK 4 4FSK RST 2 VSA SENSe DDEMod FSYNc AUTO lt FineSyncAuto gt If Auto mode is selected and a Known Data file has been loaded and activated for use the known data sequences are used Otherwise the detected data is used Setting parameters lt FineSyncAuto gt Mode Manual operation ON OFF RST VSA ON See Fine Synchronization on page 178 SENSe subsystem SENSe DDEMod FSYNc LEVel lt SERLevel gt This command is only available if SENSe DDEMod FSYNc MODE KDAT was per formed It defines a maximum symbol error rate for the known data in reference to the analyzed data If the SER of the measured data exceeds this limit the default synchronization using the detected data is performed A maximum SER level of 0 means that the file is only used if the measured data is identical to one of the specified data sequences Setting parameters lt SERLevel gt numeric value Range 0 0 to 100 0 RST 10 0 Default
292. le DISP TRAC X PDIV 20 Sets the scaling of the Y axis to 20 DIV Mode VSA Manual operation See X Axis Range on page 118 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt X SCALe RPOSition lt RPos gt This command defines the position of the reference value for the X axis Setting the position of the reference value is possible only for statistical result displays All other result displays support the query only Suffix lt n gt 1 4 lt t gt 1 6 Setting parameters lt RPos gt numeric value lt numeric_value gt Example DISP TRAC X RPOS 30 PCT The reference value is shifted by 30 towards the left Mode VSA DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt X SCALe RVALue lt RVal gt This command defines the reference value for the X axis of the measurement diagram DISPlay subsystem Setting the reference value of the x axis is possible only for statistical result displays All other result displays support the query only Suffix lt n gt 1 4 lt t gt 1 6 Setting parameters lt RVal gt numeric value Reference value for the X axis Example DISP TRAC X RVAL 20 Sets the reference value to 20 Mode VSA Manual operation See X Axis Reference Value on page 118 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt X SCALe STARt This command queries the first value of the x axis in symbols or time depending on the unit setting for the x axis Note In the Result Range Alignment And Evaluation Range dialog or
293. le INIT CONT OFF Switches the sequence to single sweep INIT CONT ON Switches the sequence to continuous sweep Mode all Manual operation See Continuous Sweep on page 124 See Single Sweep on page 124 INITiate lt n gt IMMediate The command initiates a new measurement sequence With sweep count gt 0 or average count gt 0 this means a restart of the indicated num ber of measurements With trace functions MAXHold MINHold and AVERage the pre vious results are reset on restarting the measurement In single sweep mode you can synchronize to the end of the measurement with OPC OPC or WAI In continuous sweep mode synchronization to the end of the mea surement is not possible Thus it is not recommended that you use continuous sweep mode in remote control as results like trace data or markers are only valid after a sin gle sweep end synchronization Suffix lt n gt irrelevant Example INIT CONT OFF Switches to single sweep mode DISP WIND TRAC MODE AVER Switches on trace averaging SWE COUN 20 Setting the sweep counter to 20 sweeps INIT WAI Starts the measurement and waits for the end of the 20 sweeps Mode all INITiate REFMeas Repeats the evaluation of the data currently in the capture buffer without capturing new data This is useful after changing settings for example filters patterns or evaluation ranges Usage Event Mode VSA Manual operation See Refresh on page 12
294. lear Write Config ModAcc Limits Cont Meas remote control sssssssss 269 Continue Single Sweep Se COMLINUOUS SWEEP WEE Continuous Sweep remote control 269 Decim Sep remote control e DIGIGONT e ET Display COonflg i rrr EL Atten remote control nene EL Atten Mode Auto Man remote control 275 El Attem On Off ornnes tentes 121 EX IQ BOX Export remote control Frequency Offset remote control 315 IF Power Retrigger Holdoff remote control 327 IF Power Retrigger Hysteresis remote control 328 Import remote control skeri het Input AC DC Input AC DC remote control IQ EXpOft SE Load Standard Marker 1 to 4 remote control Marker 1 2 3 4 ENEE Marker to Trace sss Marker to Trace remote control Max Hold WEE Mech Atten Auto Mech Atten Auto remote control Mech Atten Manual rentes Mech Atten Manual remote control Min Holdi ipiius ren tres ModAcc Bu Preamp On Off ses Preamp On Off remote control Ref Level remote control srsti Ref Level Offset G f RF Atten Auto etre EES RF Atten Auto remote control RF Atten Manual ee RF Atten Manual remote control Select 1 2 3 4 remote control sse Single Meas remote control
295. lt t gt MODE on page 259 Blank Hides the selected trace Remote command DISP TRAC OFF see DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt STATe on page 260 3 4 2 ASCII File Export Format for VSA Data The data of the file header consist of three columns each separated by a semicolon parameter name numeric value basic unit The data section starts with the keyword Trace lt n gt lt n gt number of stored trace followed by the measured data in one or several columns depending on measurement which are also separated by a semico lon Table 3 8 ASCII file format for VSA trace data export File contents Description Header Type FSV Instrument model Version 1 45 Firmware version Date 01 Apr 2010 Date of data set storage Further Information File contents Screen A Description Instrument mode Points per Symbol 4 Points per symbol x Axis Start 13 sym Start value of the x axis x Axis Stop 135 sym Stop value of the x axis Ref value y axis 10 00 dBm Y axis reference value Ref value position 100 96 Y axis reference position Data section Trace 1 Trace number Meas Result Result type Meas Signal Magnitude Result display Demodulator Offset QPSK Demodulation type ResultMode Trace Result mode x unit sym Unit of the x axis y unit dBm Unit of the y axis Trace Mode Clear Write Trace mode
296. lt t gt X SCALe RVALue on page 261 X Axis Range Ranges statistic measurements Opens an edit dialog field to define the x axis range in the current unit Remote command DISPlay WINDow n TRACe t X SCALe PDIVision on page 261 Softkeys and Menu Overview for Vector Signal Analysis R amp S FSV K70 y Axis Max Value Ranges statistic measurements Opens an edit dialog box to define the upper limit of the displayed probability range Values on the y axis are normalized which means that the maximum value is 1 0 The y axis scaling is defined via the y Unit Abs softkey The distance between max and min value must be at least one decade Remote command CALCulate lt n gt STATistics SCALe Y UPPer on page 254 y Axis Min Value Ranges statistic measurements Opens an edit dialog box to define the lower limit of the displayed probability range Values in the range 1e lt value lt 0 1 are allowed The y axis scaling is defined via the y Unit Abs softkey The distance between max and min value must be at least one decade Remote command CALCulate lt n gt STATistics SCALe Y LOWer on page 254 y Unit Abs Ranges statistic measurements Defines the scaling type of the y axis The default value is absolute scaling Remote command CALCulate n STATistics SCALe Y UNIT on page 254 Default Settings Ranges statistic measurements Resets the x and y axis scalings to their preset values for the c
297. luations cette o E 359 e Statistical Evaluations for the Result Summary 362 e Trace AVETAQUING BE 363 Analytically Calculated EIllers rre ttt tea tee nr een teta 363 e Standard Specific Filters esses ennemis 364 7 1 1 Trace based Evaluations The trace based evaluations all take place at the sample rate defined by the Display Points Per Symbol parameter see Display Points Sym on page 184 The sampling instants at this rate are referred to as t here i e t n Tp where Tp equals the duration of one sampling period at the sample rate defined by the Display Points Per Symbol parameter Test parameter Formula Error vector EV MEAS REF t Error Vector Magnitude EVM EV t EVM t ES with the normalization contant C depends on your setting By default C is the mean power of the reference signal deet T duration of symbol periods Magnitude Mag uras MEAS Magper REFO Formulae Test parameter Phase Formula Phaseypas t Z MEAS Phase ppp Z REF Frequency l d FREQ ug sf mrlg Hm 1 d FREQprr C sg O Magnitude error MAG ERR t MAG yeas MAG rer Phase error PHASE _ ERR t PHASE yras t PHASE prr tr Frequency error FREQ _ERR t FREQ yras t FREQ prr G FSK Modulation The trace based results for FSK signals are the same as those available for linear modul
298. lue 1 Error in mean RHO value 2 Error in peak RHO value 3 4 These bits are not used 5 Error in current UO offset value 6 Error in mean UO offset value 7 Error in peak UO offset value 8 15 These bits are not used 5 9 STATus QUESTionable MODulation lt n gt FSK Register This register comprises information about limit violations in FSK evaluation It can be queried with commands STATus QUEStionable MODulation lt n gt FSK CONDition and STATus QUEStionable MODulation lt n gt FSK EVENt Bit No Meaning 0 Error in current Frequency Error RMS value 1 Error in mean Frequency Error RMS value 2 Error in peak Frequency Error RMS value 3 4 These bits are not used 5 Error in current Frequency Error peak value 6 Error in mean Frequency Error peak value 7 Error in peak Frequency Error peak value 8 9 These bits are not used 10 Error in current Frequency Deviation value 11 Error in mean Frequency Deviation value 12 Error in peak Frequency Deviation value 13 15 These bits are not used R amp S FSV K70 Support 6 Support The R amp S Support softkey in the SAVE RCL gt Export menu stores useful informa tion for troubleshooting in case of errors This data is stored in the C R_S Instr user Support directory on the instru ment The SupportSave df1 file contains the instrument settings and input data and can be loaded to the instrument again for inspection l
299. mately 10 symbols or if the signal is highly distorted tuning this parameter helps the pattern search to suc ceed Remote command SENSe DDEMod SEARch SYNC IQCThreshold on page 307 Configuring VSA measurements Select Pattern for Search Determines which of the patterns that are assigned to the current standard is to be searched for Only one pattern can be selected at a time However to check for sev eral patterns in the same captured signal select the single sweep mode Statistic Count 0 or 1 and change the pattern The measurement is updated Remote command SENSe DDEMod SEARch SYNC SELect on page 309 Advanced Settings Advanced Pattern Settings Standard Patterns Pattern Details I EDGE TSCO Name EDGE TSC1 EDGE TSC4 E EDGE TSC2 Description EDGE TSC3 EDGE Normal Burst EDGE TSC4 EDGE TSC5 Comment FEDGF TSCA Training Sequence Code 4 Remove from Standard Mod Order 8 All Patterns Prefix Show Compatible Show All EDGE DUMMY 2 EDGE TSCO EDGE TSCI1 EDGE TSC2 EDGE TSC3 Add to Standard w Pattern Search On Meas only if pattern was found New The Advanced Pattern Settings dialog box lists the patterns assigned to the currently selected standard You can add existing patterns to the standard remove patterns already assigned to the standard edit existing or define new patterns For details on mana
300. may be useful for the following purposes Filters and Bandwidths During Signal Processing e Development of new networks and modulation methods for which no filters are defined yet Measurements of transmitter characteristics with slightly modified e g shortened transmitter filters An external program FILTWIZ is offered to convert user defined filters This pro gram generates filter files vaf which can be transferred to the analyzer with a USB device for example The program can be downloaded together with a detailed descrip tion as a precompiled MATLABO file MATLAB pcode on the Internet at http www rohde schwarz com search term FILTWIZ Rohde amp Schwarz Filter Wizard Version 1 5 ioj xl File operations Display File name MyFilter vaf Load Save Save as Exit A a EE Frequency domain Description File info Juser specific filter 0 035 RRC alpha 0 22 L 10 ISI_LSNR 18 5 dB 0 03 0 025 0 02 0 015 hit 0 01 0 005 tin Ves obol Fig 2 6 FILTWIZ filter tool for the R amp S FSV K70 It is possible to load customized transmit filters and customized measurement filters If a customized transmit filter is selected the internal receive filter coefficients are calcu lated automatically on the fly Note that this is different to the R amp S FSQ K70 where it is necessary to also transfer a user receive filter If you upload a customized transmit filter and leav
301. n on page 232 Carrier Frequency Error Shows the mean carrier frequency offset in Hz SCPI command CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion DDEMod STATistic CFERror on page 227 Carrier Frequency Drift Shows the mean carrier frequency drift in Hz per symbol SCPI command CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion DDEMod STATistic FSK CFDRift on page 230 Power Shows the power of the measured signal Operating Manual 1176 7578 02 05 98 Measurement Result Display SCPI command CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion DDEMod STATistic MPOWer on page 234 Basis of evaluation The majority of the values that are displayed in the Result Summary are calculated over the Evaluation Range see Evaluation Range on page 173 They are evalu ated according to the setting of the Display Points Sym parameter For example if Display Points Symbol is 1 only the symbol instants contribute to the result dis played in the result summary Table 3 1 Results calculated over the evaluation range PSK MSK QAM FSK EVM Frequency Error MER Magnitude Error Phase Error Power Magnitude Error Rho Power The following results that are based on internal estimation algorithms see chapter 2 6 Signal Model Estimation and Modulation Errors on page 56 are calculated over the Estimation range see also chapter 2 6 1 2 Estimation on page
302. n in which additional phase shifts occur These phase shifts depend on the symbol number e g for a 11 4 QPSK the third symbol has an additional phase offset of 3 1 rr 4 This offset has the same effect as a rotation of the basic system of coordinates by the offset angle after each symbol The method is highly important in practical applications because it prevents signal tran sitions through the zeros in the UO plane This reduces the dynamic range of the modulated signal and the linearity requirements for the amplifier In practice the method is used for 311 8 8PSK for example and in conjunction with phase differential coding for rr 4 DQPSK Symbol mapping The logical constellation diagram for 311 8 8PSK comprises 8 points that correspond to the modulation level see figure 2 15 A counter clockwise offset rotation of 3117 8 is inserted after each symbol transition Fig 2 15 Constellation diagram for 37 8 8PSK before rotation including the symbol mapping for EDGE Symbol Mapping Fig 2 16 I Q symbol stream after 3778 rotation in I Q plane if the symbol number 7 is transmitted six times in a row Fig 2 18 Constellation diagram for 77 4 QPSK Natural including the symbol mapping Symbol Mapping 2 3 3 Differential PSK With differential PSK the information is represented in the phase shift between two consecutive decision points The absolute position of the complex sample value at the decision point doe
303. n is displayed Note that if the values are in a logarithmic representation e g the UO Off Set the linear values are averaged Peak value In the Peak column the maximum value that occurred during several evaluations is displayed Note that when the value can be positive and negative e g the phase error the maximum absolute value maintaining its sign is displayed The peak value of Rho is handled differently since its minimum value represents the worst case In that case the minimum value is displayed Standard Deviation The value for the standard deviation is calculated on the linear values and then conver ted to the displayed unit 3 1 1 23 Measurement Result Display 95 percentile The 95 percentile value is based on the distribution of the current values Since the phase error and the magnitude error can usually be assumed to be distributed around zero the 95 Percentile for these values is calculated based on their absolute values Again the Rho value is handled differently Here the 5 Percentile is displayed since the lowest Rho value represents the worst case SCPI commands CALC FEED TCAP to define the required source type see CALCulate lt n gt FEED on page 249 TRAC DATA to query the trace results see TRACe lt n gt DATA on page 324 Bit Error Rate BER A bit error rate BER measurement compares the transmitted bits with the determined symbol decision bits B
304. n the transmitter is referred to amplitude droop o Magnitude of Meas Signal relative CH eo P D o N 0 50 100 150 200 Time Symbols Fig 2 53 Effect of amplitude droop Signal Model Estimation and Modulation Errors Gain Distortion Table 2 20 Effect of nonlinear amplitude distortions Nonlinear distortions amplitude distortion transmit ter Amplitude distortion analyzer Gain Distortion Transmitter 0 of 02 03 04 05 06 OF 0 Real Gain Distortion Analyzer 0 0 02 03 04 Rew 05 06 07 08 The table 2 20 illustrates the effect of nonlinear amplitude distortions on a 64QAM sig nal only the 1st quadrant is shown The transfer function is level dependent the high est effects occur at high input levels while low signal levels are hardly affected The signal is scaled in the analyzer so that the average square magnitude of the error vec tor is minimized The table 2 20 shows the signal after scaling Table 2 21 Amplitude transfer functions Amplitude transfer function transmitter Amplitude transfer function analyzer Mtglbute Tiatster function Tars meien Output Power input P ower dag eo igit Pamer lag Zog pg Tranefer Function Analyzer b m Output Power Input P ower lag o a e to 48 4 36 AM A 30 8 A 4 23 9 heut Power log table 2 21 shows a logarithmic display of the amplitude transfer funct
305. nal in separate measure ment diagrams the x axis scaled in time units or symbols is identical for both dia grams Measurement Result Display The scaling of the capture buffer is e relative to the current reference level if you are using the RF input and e relative to the full scale level if you are using the UO input Available for source types e Capture Buffer e Meas amp Ref Signal Error Vector Ref Level 10 00 dBm Std GSM NormalBurst SR 270 833 kHz Att 30 dB Freq 15 0 GHz Res Len 158 Input RF SGL 4 Real Meas amp Ref 1M SE Pee ae ci di M e NP yw A Imag Meas amp Ref 91M Clrw M1 1 Beppe Laid AT Start 5 0 sym ee 0 sym Fig 3 7 Result display Real Imag I Q in normal mode SCPI commands CALC FEED XTIM DDEM MEAS to define the required source type see CALCulate lt n gt FEED on page 249 CALC FORM RIMag to define the result type see CALCulate lt n gt FORMat on page 249 TRAC DATA TRACE1 to query the trace results see TRACe n DATA on page 324 3 1 1 8 Eye Diagram Real I The eye pattern of the inphase I channel the x axis value range is from 1 to 1 sym bols MSK 2 to 2 Available for source types e Meas amp Ref Signal Measurement Result Display vsa 3 a Ref Level 10 00 dBm Std GSM NormalBurst SR 270 833 kHz Att 30 dB Freq 15 0 GHz Res Len 158 Input RF 1M Cirw 0 668 63 000 sym Start 2 0 sym St
306. ncy of the signal source The results are normalized to the symbol rate PSK and QAM modulated signals the estimated FSK deviation FSK modulated signals or one quarter of the symbol rate MSK modulated signals l1 d FREQ zack gaa S Measurement Result Display with t n Tp and Tp the duration of one sampling period at the sample rate defined by the display points per symbol parameter see Display Points Sym on page 184 This measurement is mainly of interest when using the MSK or FSK modulation but can also be used for the PSK QAM modulations See also the note for Frequency Absolute Available for source types e Meas amp Ref Signal VSA Ref Level 10 00 dBm Std GSM NormalBurst SR 270 833 kHz Att 30dB Freq 15 0 GHz Res Len 158 Input RF A FreqRel Meas amp Ref 1M Clrw Start 5 0 sym Stop 153 0 sym Fig 3 6 Result display Frequency Relative in normal mode SCPI commands CALC FEED XTIM DDEM MEAS to define the required source type see CALCulate lt n gt FEED on page 249 CALC FORM FREO to define the result type see CALCulate lt n gt FORMat on page 249 DISP TRAC Y MODE REL to define relative values see DISPlay WINDowc n TRACe t Y SCALe MODE on page 264 TRAC DATA TRACE1 to query the trace results see TRACe n DATA on page 324 3 1 1 7 Real Imag UO Real and imaginary part of the measurement or reference sig
307. nd They must be entered following the quotation mark Example SENSe FREQuency CENTer MAXimum Returns the maximum possible numeric value of the center frequency as result arbitrary block program data This keyword is provided for commands the parameters of which consist of a binary data block 4 2 ABORt Subsystem ABORt This command aborts a current measurement and resets the trigger system Example ABOR INIT IMM Mode all 4 3 CALCulate subsystem 4 3 1 CALCulate DELTamarker subevstem enne 211 4 3 2 CALCulate LIMit MACCuracy subsvstem emen 217 4 3 38 CALCulate MARKer subsvstem eee nennen nennen nnns 225 4 3 4 Other CALCulate commande ener nennen nne 246 4 3 1 CALCulate DELTamarker subsystem cGAECulatesmneDELTamarkersmoNOF P ia ante a tae cedar eite xn bonas 212 CALGulate ns DELTamarker mco LINK 2 22 33 2 REESEN anaa ENEE REES PP ENN Y Pu 212 CAL Culate nz DEL Tamarker mzM Aimum Abt ak 212 CAL Culate nz DEL Tamarkercmz M AimumlEEFT see ennn nnne 213 CAL Culate nz DEL TamarkercmzMAximumNENT essen enean nnns 213 CALOCulate n DELTamarker m MAXimum PEAK esses 213 CAL Culate nz DEL Tamarker mzM Aimum RICH 214 CALCulate subsystem CAL Culate nz DEL Tamarkercmz MiNimum LEET 214 CAL Culate nz DEL TamarkercmzMiNimumcNENT eene nens nn enn nnns 214 CALOCulate n DELTamarker m MlNimum PEAK eese 215 CAL Culate nz DEL Tamarker mz MiNim
308. nd Min Gap Length settings are not available Remote command SENSe DDEMod SEARch BURSt CONFigure AUTO on page 300 Search Tolerance Auto Configuration Defines the number of symbols that may differ from the burst length without influencing the burst detection A search tolerance of 5 for example with a minimum and maxi mum burst length of 100 will detect bursts that are 95 to 100 symbols long Note that due to the fact that the VSA does not have knowledge of the ramp length there is an uncertainty in the burst search algorithm Thus setting this parameter to 0 will result in a failed burst search for most signals Remote command SENSe DDEMod SEARCh BURSt TOLerance on page 303 Min Gap Length Auto Configuration Represents the minimum distance in symbols between adjacent bursts The default value is 1 symbol in order to make sure that the burst search finds bursts that are very close to each other However in case the capture buffer does not contain bursts that are narrowly Modulation Orderd it is recommended to increase the value This makes the burst search faster and also more robust for highly distorted signals Configuring VSA measurements Note that this parameter only influences the robustness of the burst search It should not be used to explicitly exclude certain bursts from the measurement For example setting the minimum gap length to 100 symbols does not ensure that the burst search doe
309. nding on the unit defined with CALC UNIT POW or on the activated measuring functions the query result is output in the units below Suffix lt n gt Selects the measurement window lt m gt Selects the marker Example INIT CONT OFF Switches to single sweep mode INIT WAI Starts a sweep and waits for its end CALC DELT2 ON Switches on delta marker 2 CALC DELT2 Y Outputs measurement value of delta marker 2 Usage Query only Manual operation See Marker 1 2 3 4 on page 134 CALCulate LIMit MACCuracy subsystem CAL Culate nzLIMirMACCuracv D Fauh cence eaeaeae aaa eae eedeteeeeseeeeeseeeeeeeees 218 CAL Culatesn gt LIMiEMACCuracy KN NEE 219 CALOCulate n LIMit MACCuracy ResultType LimitType STATe esee 219 CALOCulate n LIMit MACCuracy ResultType LimitType2 RESUIt sss 220 CALCulate subsystem CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy CFERror CURRent VALUC ecccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeananaeaes 221 CALOCulate n LIMit MACCuracy CFERror MEAN VALue eeeeeseseeenen eene 221 CAL Culate nzLlMirMACCuracvCFERror PEAKVAL ue 221 CAL Culate nzLIMirMACCuracvEVM PCUbRrent VAl ue 222 CALOCulate n LIMit MACCuracy EVM PMEan VALue sisse 222 CALOCulate n LIMit MACCuracy EVM PPEak VALue cessisse nennen 222 CALOCulate n LIMit MACCuracy EVM RCURrent VALue eese 222 CALOCulate n LIMit MACCurac
310. nennen nennen nnn 146 3 4 Further Information cucinare innuit nn khai RNANA TASANE NEENA RASS 205 4 Remote Control Commands R amp S FSV K70 208 MM cu 208 4 2 ABORtSubsystem rites etate eia insns esu E uana a8 E ER uan AE RE S ERN AERE RR RA RAERRR ceeeested ce 211 4 3 CALCulate subsystem urinaire cerei eto rens ccu o ck dua eaae 211 4 4 DISPlay subeyetem euCEEEEKEEEEESEEEENEEEEEEEEREEEEEEEEEEEEEEEREEEEEEEEEEEEKEEEEETEEEEEEEEER auae EEENen 257 4 FORMat subsystem iiiter nna incita Leda n so ca a aane a dan avons 268 4 6 INITiate Subsystem eeu enceinte tense ctia nune cea nave dns 269 LTEM dust 271 48 INSTrument Subsystem iiec eiie inn einen nini rris ne cca ka nane a dana needs 277 49 MMEMO ry Subsystemiveciiccccccccccceccccssccecscccssdecssceted cee immu annnm acd a nummo cd ka rane a auae ea dans 277 4 10 OUTPUt Subsystem 2 cuui ecu tn nain tne nro tnn unns asa imma raa tn EEEREEEEE cee 279 4 11 SENSe subsystem nicae entera tnn abrirse d a dmn E ER raa dann Ea REES geg 281 4 12 STATus QUEStionable Subsystem eese nnne nnn 317 Operating Manual 1176 7578 02 05 S 4 13 4 14 4 15 5 5 1 5 2 5 3 5 4 5 5 5 6 5 7 5 8 5 9 6 6 1 6 2 6 3 7 7
311. ng trace TRACe1R TRACe2R TRACe3R The real data from the corresponding trace The parameters are available for the Real Imaginary result types TRACelI TRACe2I TRACe3l The imaginary data from the corresponding trace The parame ters are available for the Real Imaginary result types Example TRAC TRACEL Queries data from trace 1 Mode VSA TRACe n IQ BWIDth This command queries the flat usable filter bandwidth of the final UO data Suffix n irrelevant Example TRAC IQ BWID Manual operation See Maximum Bandwidth on page 160 TRACe IQ WBANG STATe State Activates or deactivates the bandwidth extension option R amp S FSV B160 if installed Sample rates higher than 128 MHz can only be achieved using the bandwidth exten sion 4 15 TRIGger subsystem Parameters lt State gt ON OFF FORCe160 ON Default The maximum available bandwidth is used for all sam ple rates If the bandwidth extension option R amp S FSV B160 is installed it is activated for bandwidths as of 64 MHz if no other restrictions for its use apply see chapter 2 2 2 1 Restrictions on page 15 Thus sample rates up to 1 28 GHz and an UO bandwidth up to 160 MHz are possible Note that using the bandwidth extension may cause more spuri ous effects OFF Deactivates use of the bandwidth extension option R amp S FSV B160 thus reducing possible spurious effects while restricting the analysis bandwidth to 40 MHz FORC
312. ngle sweep mode M coresponds to the statistics count The index s represents the st sample within the trace If the measurement results are represented in logarithmic domain the average opera tion is performed on the linear values The result is then subsequently converted back into logarithmic domain Measurements Calculation in R amp S FSV RMS Average s M x Error Vector Magnitude EVM Meas Ref magnitude Capture Buffer magnitude E BU MUTO ap Linear Average s M x All measurements where trace averaging is possible except for the measurements listed for RMS averaging 2 M 1 Xs M1 Xs M M Xs M 7 1 5 Analytically Calculated Filters The following filters are calculated during runtime of the unit and as a function of the operating parameter Alpha or BT Formulae Gauss ETSI TS 100 959 V8 3 0 Filter Type Setting Parameter Impulse Response Raised cosine RC Alpha a RH E sin T cos T bit PX 2 Z 1 4 n T Root raised cosine Alpha a in 1 m RRC cos a at T a SEL 4a a zT 4at TY Gaussian filter BT wi MM 2z pT with re 2aBT 7 1 6 Standard Specific Filters 7 1 6 1 Transmit filter EDGE Tx filter ETSI TS 300 959 V8 1 2 Linearized GMSK 3 aite S i7 for O lt t lt sT ONS i 0 0 S un Is E Jan dt 0 ett Ad else for else t 5T 2 _ SE cl d 0
313. nstrument Functions for Vector Signal Analysis FSK modulation Result Summary Frequency Error RMS Peak Shows the average RMS and peak frequency error in The frequency error is the difference of the measured frequency and the reference frequency The frequency error is normalized to the estimated FSK deviation SCPI command CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion DDEMod STATistic FSK DERRor on page 230 Magnitude Error RMS Peak Shows the average RMS and peak magnitude error in The magnitude error is the difference of the measured magnitude to the magnitude of the reference signal The magnitude error is normalized to the mean magnitude of the reference signal SCPI command CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion DDEMod STATistic MERRor on page 234 FSK Deviation Error Shows the deviation error of FSK modulated signals in Hz The FSK deviation error is the difference of the FSK deviation of the measured signal and the FSK refer ence deviation you have set SCPI command CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion DDEMod STATistic FDERror on page 229 FSK Meas Deviation Shows the estimated deviation of FSK modulated signals in Hz SCPI command CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion DDEMod STATistic FSK MDEViation on page 231 FSK Ref Deviation Shows the reference deviation you have set in Hz SCPI command CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion DDEMod STATistic FSK RDEViatio
314. nt A file selection dialog box is displayed in which you can select the storage loca tion and file name You can also add an optional comment to the file e Otherwise reset the tool to start a new recording possibly after changing the demodulation settings or input data 7 Close the tool window to return to normal operation of the R amp S FSV K70 applica tion The created xml file can now be loaded in the R amp S FSV K70 application as described in chapter 3 3 7 2 How to Load Known Data Files on page 200 3 3 7 4 Reference Known Data File Syntax Description When you load a Known Data file the R amp S FSV K70 application checks whether the file complies with the following syntax Table 3 7 Known Data File Syntax Syntax Possible Values Description RS VSA KNOWN DATA FILE as specified File Header Version 01 00 gt lt Comment gt lt Comment gt arbitrary Optional file description lt Base gt lt Base gt 2 16 The base used to specify the lt Data gt values binary or hexa decimal For lt ModulationOrder gt values 232 use binary 2 lt ModulationOrder gt lt Modulation 2 4 8 16 32 64 128 Number of values each symbol can represent order of modu Order 256 lation e g 8 for 8 PSK For lt ModulationOrder gt values 232 use Base 2 lt ResultLength gt lt ResultLength gt 1 up to 2000 Number of symbols in each lt Data gt element The number must be identical to
315. o the maximum value of the associated trace CALCulate subsystem CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MAXimum RIGHt This command positions the delta marker to the next smaller trace maximum on the right of the current value i e ascending X values The corresponding delta marker is activated first if necessary If no next higher minimum value is found on the trace level spacing to adjacent values lt peak excursion an execution error error code 200 is produced Suffix lt n gt Selects the measurement window lt m gt Selects the marker Example CALC DELT MAX RIGH Sets delta marker 1 to the next smaller maximum value to the right of the current value CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MINimum LEFT This command positions the delta marker to the next higher trace minimum on the left of the current value i e descending X values The corresponding delta marker is acti vated first if necessary If no next higher minimum value is found on the trace level spacing to adjacent values lt peak excursion an execution error error code 200 is produced Suffix lt n gt Selects the measurement window lt m gt Selects the marker Example CALC DELT MIN LEFT Sets delta marker 1 to the next higher minimum to the left of the current value CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MINimum NEXT This command positions the delta marker to the next higher trace minimum The corre sponding d
316. ode gt This command turns auto mode of points per symbol on or off If Auto is enabled most measurements use the current Capture Oversampling see SENSe DDEMod PRATe on page 294 Alternatively select the number of points to be displayed per symbol manually see DISPlay WINDow lt n gt PRATe VALue on page 258 Suffix n 1 4 Setting parameters lt DisplayPPSMode gt AUTO MANual RST AUTO Example DISP WIND2 PRAT AUTO Queries the points per symbol mode Mode VSA Manual operation See Display Points Sym on page 184 M n DISPlay WINDow lt n gt PRATe VALue lt DisplayPPS gt This command determines the number of points to be displayed per symbol if manual mode is selected see DISPlay WINDow lt n gt PRATe AUTO on page 258 Suffix lt n gt 1 4 Setting parameters lt DisplayPPS gt 1 2 4 8 16 or 32 RST 4 Example DDEM PRAT 8 Sets 8 points per symbol Mode VSA Manual operation See Display Points Sym on page 184 DISPlay subsystem DISPlay WINDow lt n gt SIZE lt Size gt This command configures the measurement display Suffix lt n gt 1 4 Setting parameters lt Size gt SMALI LARGe LARGe diagram in full screen SMALI split screen diagram and table Mode VSA DISPlay WINDow lt n gt STATe Active Activates deactivates the window specified by the suffix lt 1 4 gt Suffix n 1 4 Setting parameters A
317. oints per symbol the Display Points Sym parameter is not available If Auto is enabled the Capture Oversampling value is used Alternatively select the number of points to be displayed per symbol manually The available values depend on the source type For the Result Summary the number of display points corresponds to the Estimation Points Sym By default 1 for QAM and PSK modulated signals and the capture over sampling rate for MSK and FSK modulated signals This value also controls which samples are considered for the Peak and RMS values and the Power result A IZQ Vector Meas amp Ref imMClrw BI Q Vector Meas amp Ref 6 1M Cirw Stop 2 91 Start 2 91 Stop 2 91 imMCirw DI Q Vector Meas amp Ref 1M Cirw Start 2 91 Stop 2 91 2 Stop 2 91 Fig 3 29 Result display with different numbers of points per symbol Screen A 1 Screen B 2 Screen C 4 Screen D 16 Remote command DISPlay WINDow lt n gt PRATe VALue on page 258 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt PRATe AUTO on page 258 Oversampling Defines the sample basis for statistical evaluation This setting is only available for the Result Type Transformation Statistics Configuring VSA measurements Ref Level 10 00 dBm Std GSM_NormalBurst SR 270 833 kHz Att 30 dB Freq 15 0 GHz Res Len 148 Input RF ec EE e Ki EE peice EEG Start 101 562 kHz Stop 101 562 kHz Start 101 562 kHz Stop 101 562 kHz Cc s L 1M Cirw ap Jh ada
318. ol rate Setting parameters lt SymbolRate gt numeric value For details on the possible values see table 2 1 RST 3 84e6 Default unit Hz Mode VSA Manual operation See Symbol Rate on page 150 SENSe subsystem SENSe DDEMod STANdard COMMent lt Comment gt This command enters the comment for a new standard The comment is stored with the standard and is only displayed in the selection menu manual operation When remote control is used the string is deleted after the standard has been stored allow ing a new comment to be entered for the next standard In this case a blank string is returned when a query is made Setting parameters lt Comment gt string Mode VSA SENSe DDEMod STANdard DELete lt FileName gt This command deletes a specified digital standard file in the vector signal analysis The file name includes the path If the file does not exist an error message is displayed Setting parameters lt FileName gt string File name including the path for the digital standard file Example SENS DDEM STAN DEL C path standardname Usage Setting only Mode VSA Manual operation See Delete Standard on page 115 SENSe DDEMod STANdard PREset VALue This command restores the default settings of the currently selected standard Usage Event Mode VSA Manual operation See Standard Defaults on page 115 SENSe DDEMod STANdard SAVE lt FileName gt This command stores the c
319. on System Theoretical Modulation and Demodulation Filters MEAS filter Measurement Filter Weighting filter for the measure ment System Theoretical Modulation and Demodulation Filters MSK Minimum Shift Keying Modulation mode Minimum Shift Keying MSK NDA Demodulator Non Data Aided Demodulator Demodulation without any knowl edge of the sent data contents Demodulation and Algorithms PSK Phase Shift Keying Modulation mode for which the information lies within the phase or within the phase transitions Phase Shift Keying PSK QAM Quadrature Amplitude Modulation Modulation mode for which the information is encrypted both in the amplitude and phase Quadrature Amplitude Modulation QAM RMS Root Mean Square Averaging RMS Quantities RX filter Transmit filter Receive Filter Baseband filter in analyzer used for signal adapted filtering Transmitter Filter Digital impulse shaping filter in signal processing unit of transmit ter System Theoretical Modulation and Demodulation Filters System Theoretical Modulation and Demodulation Filters VSA Vector Signal Analysis Measurement at complex modula ted RF carriers List of Commands SENSe ADJust CONFiguration HYSTeresis LOWer esee nnne enne 283 SENSe ADJust CONFiguration HYS Teresis U PP riot rein beh ck da eb cene een exu n E 283 S
320. on page 127 See Average on page 127 See View on page 127 See Trace Mode on page 128 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt STATe lt State gt This command switches on or off the display of the corresponding trace The other measurements are not aborted but continue running in the background Suffix lt n gt lt t gt Parameters lt State gt Example Manual operation window For applications that do not have more than 1 measure ment window the suffix lt n gt is irrelevant trace ON OFF RST ON for TRACe1 OFF for TRACe2 to 6 DISP TRAC3 ON See Trace 1 Trace 2 Trace 3 Trace 4 Trace 5 Trace 6 on page 126 See Blank on page 127 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt SYMBol This command defines the display of the decision instants time when the signals occurred on the trace Suffix lt n gt lt t gt 1 4 1 6 DISPlay subsystem Example DISP WIND1 TRAC SYMB ON Defines that the decision instants are displayed in the form of dots Mode VSA Manual operation See Highlight Symbols on page 181 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt X SCALe PDIVision lt PDiv gt This command defines the scaling of the X axis Setting the scale of the horizontal axis is possible only for statistical result displays All other result displays support the query only Suffix lt n gt 1 4 lt t gt 1 6 Setting parameters lt PDiv gt numeric value numeric value Examp
321. once not dynamically To define the y axis range manually With this method you define the upper and lower limits of the displayed probability range Values on the y axis are normalized which means that the maximum value is 1 0 The y axis scaling is defined via the y Unit Abs softkey see y Unit Abs on page 119 If the y axis has logarithmic scale the distance between max and min value must be at least one decade 1 Focus the result screen 2 Select AMPT gt Ranges gt Y Axis Min Value see y Axis Min Value on page 119 3 Enter the lower limit in the current unit 4 Select AMPT Ranges Y Axis Max Value see y Axis Max Value on page 119 5 Enter the upper limit in the current unit The y axis is adapted to display the specified range Probabilities of occurrence located outside the display area are applied to the bars at the left or right borders of the display To restore the default scaling settings 1 Focus the result screen 2 Select AMPT gt Ranges gt Default Settings see Default Settings on page 119 The x and y axis scalings are reset to their default values 3 3 4 Managing standard settings files Various predefined settings files for common digital standards are provided for use with the VSA option In addition you can create your own settings files for user specific measurements For an overview of predefined standards and settings see chapter 2 4 Predefined Standards
322. op 2 0 sym Fig 3 8 Result display Eye Diagram Real I in normal mode SCPI commands CALC FEED XTIM DDEM MEAS to define the required source type see CALCulate lt n gt FEED on page 249 CALC FORM IEYE to define the result type see CALCulate lt n gt FORMat on page 249 TRAC DATA TRACE1 to query the trace results see TRACe n DATA on page 324 3 1 1 9 Eye Diagram Imag Q The eye pattern of the quadrature Q channel the x axis range is from 1 to 1 sym bols MSK 2 to 2 Available for source types e Meas amp Ref Signal 3 1 1 10 Measurement Result Display Ref Level 10 00 dBm Std GSM NormalBurst SR 270 833 kHz Att 30 dB Freq 15 0GHz ResLen 158 Input RF 6 1M Clrw 0 73 63 000 sy Lo l S NE IP mn N o v 3 Fig 3 9 Result display Eye Diagram Imag Q in normal mode SCPI commands CALC FEED XTIM DDEM MEAS to define the required source type see CALCulate lt n gt FEED on page 249 CALC FORM QEYE to define the result type see CALCulate lt n gt FORMat on page 249 TRAC DATA TRACE1 to query the trace results see TRACe n DATA on page 324 Eye Diagram Frequency Shows the eye diagram of the currently measured frequencies and or the reference signal The time span of the data depends on the evaluation range capture buffer Available for source types e Meas amp
323. opic press the link text on the touchscreen Searching for a topic 1 Change to the Index tab 2 Enter the first characters of the topic you are interested in The entries starting with these characters are displayed 3 Change the focus by pressing the ENTER key 4 Selectthe suitable keyword by using the UP ARROW or DOWN ARROW keys or the rotary knob 5 Press the ENTER key to display the help topic The View tab with the corresponding help topic is displayed Changing the zoom 1 Change to the Zoom tab 2 Setthe zoom using the rotary knob Four settings are available 1 4 The smallest size is selected by number 1 the largest size is selected by number 4 Closing the help window P Press the ESC key or a function key on the front panel Notes for Users of R amp S FSV 1307 9002Kxx Models Users of R amp S FSV 1307 9002Kxx models should consider the following differences to the description of the newer R amp S FSV 1321 3008Kxx models e Functions that are based on the Windows operating system e g printing or set ting up networks may have a slightly different appearance or require different set tings on the Windows XP based models For such functions refer to the Windows documentation or the documentation originally provided with the R amp S FSV instru ment Notes for Users of R amp S FSV 1307 9002Kxx Models e The R amp S FSV 1307 9002K03 model is restricted to a maximum frequency of 3 GHz whereas the
324. or Meas vec tor and the reference signal vector Ref vector Error Vector Magnitude EVM Q Fig 2 48 Modulation error EVM magnitude error phase error The magnitude of the error vector in the diagram is specified as the error vector magni tude EVM It is commonly normalized to the mean reference power The EVM should not be confused with the magnitude error see below Magnitude Error The magnitude error is defined as the difference between the measurement vector magnitude and the reference vector magnitude see figure 2 48 Signal Model Estimation and Modulation Errors Phase Error Q Fig 2 49 Modulation error Phase error error vector phase The phase error is the phase difference between the measurement vector and the ref erence vector PHASE ERR t PHASE yas t PHASE pep t This measurement parameter is of great importance for MSK modulation measure ments The phase error should not be confused with the error vector phase The error vector phase is the absolute phase of the error vector see figure 2 49 The effects of the different modulation errors in the transmitter on the result display of the analyzer are described on the next pages All diagrams show the equivalent com plex baseband signal Modulation Error Ratio MER The modulation error ratio MER is closely related to EVM MER 20 log EVM where the EVM is normalized to the mean ref
325. ox to enter the time offset between the trigger signal and the start of the sweep The time may be entered in s or in symbols offset 0 Start of the sweep is delayed offset 0 Sweep starts earlier pre trigger Only possible for span 0 e g UO Analyzer mode and gated trigger Switched off Maximum allowed range limited by the sweep time pretriggernax sweep time When using the R amp S Digital UO Interface R amp S FSV B17 with UO Ana lyzer mode the maximum range is limited by the number of pretrigger samples See the R amp S Digital UO Interface R amp S FSV B17 description in the base unit Softkeys and Menu Overview for Vector Signal Analysis R amp S FSV K70 In the External or IF Power trigger mode a common input signal is used for both trigger and gate Therefore changes to the gate delay will affect the trigger delay trig ger offset as well Remote command TRIGger lt n gt SEQuence HOLDoff TIME on page 328 Trigger Offset Unit Toggles between symbols and seconds as the trigger offset unit 3 2 8 Softkeys of the Meas Config Menu R amp S FSV K70 The Meas Config menu provides functions for measurement configuration e UE 132 Modulation Signal Te ceteindetind eee ed ede ite ere 132 PONO Cee oce bep UE UT ehe ex abet d umet due tert tede tx mneete ercee seer rte 132 MELE eT p EEE E 133 COn F ANE EEN 133 Burs tP atem E E DE 133 Ee
326. page 179 Demodulation The Demodulation tab contains the settings for the demodulation A live preview of the trace with the current settings is displayed in the preview area at the bottom of the dialog box The preview area is not editable directly Demodulation amp Measurement Filter Demodulation Compensate for v 1 Q Offset 1 Q Imbalance w Amplitude Droop Advanced Normalize EVM to Mean Ref Power Estimation Points Sym w Auto 1 Coarse Synchronization wd Auto Data Fine Synchronization Auto Known Data If SER 10 96 Constellation I Q Meas amp Ref 1M Clrw Start 6 315 Stop 6 315 EE Operating Manual 1176 7578 02 05 174 R amp S FSV K70 Instrument Functions for Vector Signal Analysis _ 4 Demodulation amp Measurement Filter E i3 Demodulation Compensate for o For FSK modulation the dialog has slightly different options wi FSK Deviation Error E Carrier Frequency Drift Advanced Estimation Points Sym w Auto Capture Ov Coarse Synchronization lV Auto Data Fine Synchronization Auto Detected Data Trace Constellation Freq Meas amp Ref 1M Clrw Start 15 149 MHz Stop 15 149 MHz Compensale FOR erre et e ERE PEE a caugaceancensecanands SOR AM ANN dRERUE MEE RRES ai 175 Normalize EVM e euer z 176 EE EE 176 Estimation Polltel Gyll ue erede ed reet xr edt iu aetna 177 Coarse Synchroni
327. pd YSH 3903 easing epi C MSH 3904 esindepiM ous 0081 Sd edeug esind 4004 usH s GUZZI Y or uened LL 0 YSH 35a3 op ae 1 zHWSzE ySdO r ue do 39a asind L LOSL Sd MOJJEN O NSH 3903 ush S E edeus esingwoue ous 09081 Sd asind wo 3903 vue ys S Z4i v op wened LL 0 YSH 35a3 ueN3OQ3 zHWSZE Sdo v uc do 3583 soy Seo abuey u16ue UuJ9jjed sung Jet 9je1 Budden uonenjeag 1ueuuBi y ynsey uJayed 10 u24eoS 104 uoueeg 1g eudiv ylwsuely joquiAg uoge npo piepuejs JepjoJ Predefined Standards and Settings Jee SUON IEIMEN uo Loo g 9 Z 011sung 99 c o ASNO ZHN L ASZ ong ujoojenig JejnBuejoas yor WO SCOOdV wa ende ooz SzOOdV ZH ev xSdr 9 Scoodv wen s ANON SzOOdV XSdo adeo ooz zo ou ZH18 7 MSdOd bi O SzOOdv SzOOdV Jet Spo ISI 01 Kel ue SIONS XI MSdd AJA XI saunjdeo 008 0002 VINGO ZHN g8zz L 19sJO 0002 VIGO Jet Spo ISI 01 0M Ve aM4 XL d MeVWOD ama xi adeo 008 000Z VINGO ZHN g8zz L SdO 000zviNao VINGO m KO VINIOM v adeo 008 eco OMH ZHN HSE SdO Naom 5 dd9 i xuiuwoq sequen S vulaL Du VMLSL snonugu vtz 0 011sung SG d vulaL Gen KO ZHJ 8L WSdOG r 09 VYLSL CS VHl3L s xul uMoq 49 U99 oud VaLAl snonuguoo vv 0 011sung obz LS VYLSL P Gen KO ZHJ 8L MSdOG v 1 SIG VYLSL vHlaL NE LOSL WVOC HSH 390
328. peak or mean center frequency error limit Note that the limits for the current and the peak value are always kept identical Suffix lt n gt Setting parameters lt LimitValue gt Example Mode 1 4 window numeric value the value x x gt 0 defines the interval x x Range 0 0 to 1000000 RST 1000 0 mean 750 0 Default unit Hz CALC2 FEED XTIM DDEM MACC Switch on result summary in screen 2 CALC2 LIM MACC CFER PEAK VAL 100 Hz define a limit of 100 100 VSA CALCulate subsystem CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy EVM PCURrent VALue lt LimitValue gt CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy EVM PMEan VALue lt LimitValue gt CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy EVM PPEak VALue lt LimitValue gt CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy EVM RCURrent VALue lt LimitValue gt CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy EVM RMEan VALue lt LimitValue gt CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy EVM RPEak VALue lt LimitValue gt This command defines the value for the current peak or mean EVM peak or RMS limit Note that the limits for the current and the peak value are always kept identical Suffix lt n gt 1 4 window Setting parameters lt LimitValue gt numeric value Range 0 0 to 100 RST 1 5 Default unit Example CALC2 FEED XTIM DDEM MACC Switch on result summary in screen 2 CALC2 LIM MACC EVM RPE VAL 2 define a limit of 296 Mode VSA CALCula
329. pensation off Mode VSA Manual operation See Compensate for on page 175 SENSe DDEMod NORMalize IQOFfset lt ComplQOffset gt This command switches the compensation of the IQ offset on or off Setting parameters lt ComplQOffset gt ON OFF RST ON SENSe subsystem Example DDEM NORM IQOF OFF Switches the compensation off Mode VSA Manual operation See Compensate for on page 175 SENSe DDEMod NORMalize VALue lt Normalize gt This command switches the compensation of the UO offset and the compensation of amplitude droop on or off When queried the command returns 1 if both are ON and 0 if both are off Otherwise an error is returned The command is kept because of compatibility to the R amp S FSQ and won t be suppor ted in later versions Instead use the new command SENSe DDEMod NORMalize IQOFfset on page 293 Setting parameters lt Normalize gt ON OFF RST ON Example SENS DDEM NORM ON Turn on IQ offset compensation and amplitude droop compensa tion Mode VSA SENSe DDEMod PRATe lt CaptOverSampling gt This command determines the number of captured points per symbol Setting parameters lt CaptOverSampling gt 4 8 16 32 RST 4 Example DDEM PRAT 8 Sets 8 points per symbol Mode VSA Manual operation See Capture Oversampling on page 159 SENSe DDEMod PRESet CALC This command selects the Signal Overview from the predefined tab of th
330. plitude of the received signal at the decision points Symbol Mapping Fig 2 39 Constellation diagram for OOK 4ASK 4ASK is a 4 ary Amplitude Shift Keying mapping type With this type of modulation the information is solely represented by the absolute amplitude of the received signal at the decision points Predefined Standards and Settings Fig 2 40 Constellation diagram for 4ASK 2 4 Predefined Standards and Settings In the Digital Standards menu predefined basic settings for standards can be selected and user defined standards stored see Digital Standards on page 114 The most common measurements are predefined as standard settings for a large num ber of mobile radio networks The instrument comes prepared with the following set tings for those standards e Capture length and result length Signal description e Modulation Transmit filter and measurement filter Burst Pattern search configuration e Result range alignment Evaluation range settings Display configuration The standard settings are grouped in folders to facilitate selecting a standard Predefined Standards and Settings E w 3903 Wvoze C YSN 3903 19u30 mei gt SWO 3903 Wy GLivvl e o uengd 9v 3903 voce p zye un ZH eee 072 INVOc v iL Oc 3933 EP 3903 Wvo9l C YSN 3903 ouer mei XSWo 39d sw GLivvl e o uengd 9v 3903 WVO9L pezueeur ZHY eee 072 INVO9IL v 1L O94 3903 JSL 390
331. pter 3 Repair 1 2 1 2 1 1 2 2 Conventions Used in the Documentation Chapter 4 Software Update Installing Options Chapter 5 Documents Online Help The online help contains context specific help on operating the R amp S FSV and all avail able options It describes both manual and remote operation The online help is instal led on the R amp S FSV by default and is also available as an executable chm file on the CD delivered with the instrument Release Notes The release notes describe the installation of the firmware new and modified func tions eliminated problems and last minute changes to the documentation The corre sponding firmware version is indicated on the title page of the release notes The cur rent release notes are provided in the Internet Conventions Used in the Documentation Typographical Conventions The following text markers are used throughout this documentation Convention Description Graphical user interface ele All names of graphical user interface elements on the screen such as ments dialog boxes menus options buttons and softkeys are enclosed by quotation marks KEYS Key names are written in capital letters File names commands File names commands coding samples and screen output are distin program code guished by their font Input Input to be entered by the user is displayed in italics Links Links that you can click are display
332. r PCTL 95 percentile value of frequency error RST PEAK Query only VSA CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion DDEMod STATistic EVM lt type gt This command queries the results of the error vector magnitude measurement of digital demodulation The output values are the same as those provided in the Modulation Accuracy table Suffix lt n gt lt m gt 1 4 screen number 1 4 irrelevant CALCulate subsystem Query parameters lt type gt lt none gt Average EVM value of current sweep AVG RMS average EVM value over several sweeps RPE Peak value of EVM over several sweeps SDEV Standard deviation of EVM values over several sweeps PCTL 95 percentile of RMS value over several sweeps PEAK Maximum EVM over all symbols of current sweep PAVG Average of maximum EVM values over several sweeps TPEA Maximum EVM over all symbols over several sweeps PSD Standard deviation of maximum EVM values over several sweeps PPCT 95 percentile of maximum RMS values over several sweeps RST PEAK Usage Query only Mode VSA CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion DDEMod STATistic FDERror lt type gt This command queries the results of the FSK deviation error of FSK modulated sig nals Suffix lt n gt 1 4 screen number lt m gt 1 4 irrelevant Query parameters lt type gt Usage Mode CALCulate subsystem lt none gt Deviation error for current sweep AVG
333. r XTIM DDEM ERR MPH Modulation errors XTIM DDEM MACC Modulation accuracy XTIM DDEM SYMB Symbol table TCAP Capture Buffer Example Switch to EVM CALC FEED XTIM DDEM ERR VECT CALC FORM MAGN Switch to Meas Signal Frequency Relative CALC FEED XTIM DDEM MEAS CALC FORM FREQ DISP WIND1 TRAC1 Y SCAL MODE REL Mode VSA Manual operation See Evaluation on page 129 See Source on page 181 CALCulate n FORMat Format This command defines the result type of the traces Which parameters are available depends on the setting for CALC FEED see CALCulate lt n gt FEED on page 249 CALCulate subsystem Table 4 2 Available result types depending on source type Source Type Result Type Parameter Capture Buffer Magnitude Absolute MAGNitude Real Imag UO RIMag Frequency Absolute FREQuency Vector UO COMP Meas amp Ref Signal Magnitude Absolute MAGNitude Magnitude Relative MAGNitude Phase Wrap PHASe Phase Unwrap UPHase Frequency Absolute FREQuency Frequency Relative FREQuency Real Imag UO RIMag Eye Diagram Real I IEYE Eye Diagram Imag Q QEYE Eye Diagram Frequency FEYE Constellation UO CONS Constellation UO Rotated RCON Vector UO COMP Constellation Frequency CONF Vector Frequency COVF Symbols Binary Octal E Decimal E Hexadecimal Error Vec
334. r on page 180 SENSe DDEMod MFILter STATe lt MeasFilterState gt Use this command to switch the measurement filter off To switch a measurement filter on use the SENSe DDEMod MFILter NAME command Setting parameters lt MeasFilterState gt ON OFF OFF Switches the measurement filter off ON Switches the measurement filter specified by SENSe DDEMod MFILter NAME on However this command is not necessary as the SENSe DDEMod MFILter NAME com mand automatically switches the selected filter on RST ON Example SENS DDEM MFIL STAT OFF Deactivates the measurement filter Mode VSA Manual operation See Type on page 180 SENSe subsystem SENSe DDEMod MFILter USER lt FilterName gt This command selects the user defined measurement filter For details on creating user defined filters see chapter 2 2 7 Customized Filters on page 20 Setting parameters lt FilterName gt Name of the user defined filter Example SENS DDEM MFIL NAME USER Selects user filter mode for the meas filter ENS DDEM MFIL USER D MMyMeasFilter Selects the user defined meas filter Mode VSA SENSe DDEMod MSK FORMat Name This command defines the specific demodulation mode for MSK Setting parameters Name TYPE1 TYPE2 NORMal DIFFerential TYPE1 NORMal MSK TYPE2 DIFFerential DMSK RST QPSK Example DDEM FORM MSK Switches
335. r starts at symbol number 1 the first symbol to be displayed is the second symbol due to the offset 1 1 2 The result range is indicated by a green bar along the time axis in capture buffer result displays see chapter 3 1 6 Result Ranges and Evaluation Ranges on page 109 Defining an Evaluation Range By default the entire result range is used for evaluation If necessary you can define an evaluation range that differs from the result range For example you can exclude the ramps of a burst for evaluation The used evaluation range is indicated in the result display For details see Evaluation Range on page 173 Remote control In order to define the result range via remote control use the following commands SENSe DDEMod TIME 100 Defines the result length as 100 symbols CALC TRAC ADJ TRIG Defines the capture buffer as the reference for the result range Configuring VSA measurements CALC TRAC ADJ ALIG LEFT Aligns the result range to the left edge of the capture buffer CALC TRAC ADJ ALIG OFFS 1 Defines an offset of 1 symbol from the capture buffer start DISP TRAC X VOFF 1 Defines the symbol number 1 as the capture buffer start 3 3 3 Changing the Display Scaling Depending on the type of display time spectrum or statistics various scaling func tions are available to adapt the result display to the current data Scaling functions are located in the Ranges submenu of
336. r EVM evaluation due to amplifi cation in the pass band Low Pass Narrow Pass band up to Feymbo 2 Stop band starts at Fsymboi 40dB Low Pass Wide Pass band up to Fsymbol Stop band starts at 1 5 F sympo1 40dB Rectangular Rectangular filter in the time domain with a length of 1 symbol period integrate and dump effect RRC USER Root Raised Cosine Filter The roll off parameter Alpha is set according to the Transmit filter if the Auto according to Trans mit filter option is enabled see Auto on page 179 Other wise it must be set manually If the Transmit filter is also a Root Raised Cosine filter with the same roll off parameter the resulting system is inter symbol interference free User defined filter Define the filter using the Load User Filter on page 180 func tion or the SENSe DDEMod MFILter USER command For details see chapter 2 2 7 Customized Filters on page 20 NONE No measurement filter is used The frequency response of the available standard specific measurement filters is shown in chapter 7 1 6 2 Measurement Filter on page 365 Customized Filters The analytical filter types RC raised cosine RRC root raised cosine and GAUS SIAN as well as the most important standard specific filters are already integrated in the R amp S FSV K70 In addition it is possible to use user defined measurement and Transmit filters Customized filters
337. r all subsequent measurements until it is deactivated The results of the limit check are indicated by red or green values in the result sum mary 3 4 Further Information 3 4 1 Trace Mode Overview nnne nennen en nss sss se sa ass sa saa da ganas 205 3 4 2 ASCII File Export Format for VSA Data 206 3 4 4 Trace Mode Overview The traces can be activated individually for a measurement or frozen after completion of a measurement Traces that are not activated are hidden Each time the trace mode is changed the selected trace memory is cleared The R amp S FSV provides the following different trace modes Clear Write Overwrite mode the trace is overwritten by each sweep This is the default setting Remote command DISP TRAC MODE WRIT see DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt MODE on page 259 Max Hold The maximum value is determined over several sweeps and displayed The R amp S FSV saves the sweep result in the trace memory only if the new value is greater than the previous one This mode is especially useful with modulated or pulsed signals The signal spectrum is filled up upon each sweep until all signal components are detected in a kind of enve lope This mode is not available for statistics measurements Remote command DISP TRAC MODE MAXH see DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt MODE on page 259 Min Hold The minimum value is determined from several measurements and displayed The R amp S FSV sa
338. r in UO offset or RHO evaluation 5 Error in FSK evaluation 6 15 These bits are not used STATus QUESTionable MODulation lt n gt EVM Register 5 4 STATus QUESTionable MODulation lt n gt EVM Register This register comprises information about limit violations in EVM evaluation It can be queried with commands STATus QUEStionable MODulation lt n gt EVM CONDition and STATus QUEStionable MODulation lt n gt EVM EVENt Bit No Meaning 0 Error in current RMS value 1 Error in mean RMS value 2 Error in peak RMS value 3 4 These bits are not used 5 Error in current peak value 6 Error in mean peak value 7 Error in peak peak value 8 15 These bits are not used 5 5 STATus QUESTionable MODulation lt n gt PHASe Reg ister This register comprises information about limit violations in Phase Error evaluation It can be queried with commands STATus QUEStionable MODulation lt n gt PHASe CONDition and STATus QUEStionable MODulation lt n gt PHASe EVENt Bit No Meaning 0 Error in current RMS value 1 Error in mean RMS value 2 Error in peak RMS value 3 4 These bits are not used 5 Error in current peak value 6 Error in mean peak value 7 Error in peak peak value 8 15 These bits are not used STATus QUESTionable MODulation lt n gt MAGnitude Register 5 6 STATus QUESTionable MODulation lt n gt MAGnitude Register This regist
339. race 6 Defines whether the trace displays the evaluation of the measured signal or the refer ence signal if Meas amp Ref Signal is used as the signal source see Source on page 181 Remote command CALCulate lt n gt TRACe lt t gt VALue on page 256 Trace Wizard Opens the Trace Wizard dialog For each trace you can define a Trace Mode and an Evaluation type Alternatively you can configure several traces in one step using the predefined settings Trace Wizard Screen B Trace Trace Mode Evaluation um Blank Meas Ref Preset Select Select All Traces Max Avg Min Max ClrWrite Min Trace Mode Trace Wizard Defines the type of display and the evaluation of the trace Clear Write Max Hold Min Hold Average View Blank For details see chapter 3 4 1 Trace Mode Overview on page 205 Remote command DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt MODE on page 259 Softkeys and Menu Overview for Vector Signal Analysis R amp S FSV K70 Evaluation Trace Wizard Defines whether the trace displays the evaluation of the measured signal or the refer ence signal if Meas amp Ref Signal is used as the signal source see Source on page 181 Remote command CALCulate lt n gt FEED on page 249 Preset All Traces Trace Wizard Configures several traces to predefined display modes in one step Trace 1 Clear Write Trace 2 6 Blank For details see ch
340. rch on page 165 Range Settings Displays the Result Range tab of the Result Range Evaluation Range dialog box A preview of the result display with the current settings is displayed in the visualization area at the bottom of the dialog box For details on the available settings see Result Range on page 170 and Evaluation Range on page 173 Demod Meas Filter Displays the Demodulation amp Measurement Filter dialog box The Demodulation tab contains the settings for the demodulation The Measurement Filter tab contains the settings for the measurement filter A live preview of the Constellation UO trace with the current settings is displayed in the preview area at the bottom of the dialog box The preview area is not editable directly For details on the available settings see Measurement Filter on page 179 and Demodulation on page 174 Softkeys and Menu Overview for Vector Signal Analysis R amp S FSV K70 Display Config Opens the Display Configuration dialog box to configure the measurement results display See chapter 3 3 1 6 Display Configuration on page 180 3 2 9 Softkeys of the Marker Menu R amp S FSV K70 The MARKER key displays the Marker menu which contains the following softkeys Maker e 134 LiFe andes bak Bea ee t rato dee tae dec EE ek Ie bre Du COT PU ED CE Pr ao Rc Tad 134 Couple Screens OMO DE 134 Link Mkri and Delta cirea etr a ENE 135 Marker to Trae EE 135 AU MK e DEE 136 M
341. rd Files Restore Factory Settings Restores the standards predefined by Rohde amp Schwarz available at the time of deliv ery Remote command SENSe DDEMod FACTory VALue on page 286 Restore Pattern Files Restore Factory Settings Restores the pattern files predefined by Rohde amp Schwarz available at the time of deliv ery Remote command SENSe DDEMod FACTory VALue on page 286 Softkeys and Menu Overview for Vector Signal Analysis R amp S FSV K70 3 2 2 Softkeys of the Frequency Menu R amp S FSV K70 The FREQ key opens the RF Settings tab of the Frontend A I Q Capture Settings dialog box and displays the Frequency menu which contains the following softkeys e uc m 116 Stepsize EE 116 CP EE EE 116 Re e 116 Center Opens an edit dialog box to enter the center frequency Remote command SENSe FREQuency CENTer on page 314 Stepsize Auto Man Toggles between automatic step size or a fixed manually defined step size CF Stepsize for the center frequency Remote command SENSe FREQuency CENTer STEP AUTO on page 315 CF Stepsize Opens an edit dialog box to define the fixed step size for the center frequency The softkey indicates the current setting This function is only available if Stepsize Auto Man on page 116 is set to Man Remote command SENSe FREQuency CENTer STEP on page 315
342. re Settings dialog box Softkeys and Menu Overview for Vector Signal Analysis R amp S FSV K70 A live preview of the signal with the current settings is displayed in the preview area at the bottom of the dialog box The preview area is not editable directly Note that this works only in continuous sweep mode For details on the available settings see Frontend on page 154 UO Capture Displays the UO Capture tab of the Frontend A UO Capture Settings dialog box A live preview of the signal in the capture buffer with the current settings is displayed in the preview area at the bottom of the dialog box The preview area is not editable directly Note that this works only in continuous sweep mode For details on the available settings see Q Capture on page 157 Config Pattern Displays the Advanced Pattern Settings dialog box see Advanced Settings on page 167 Burst Pattern Search Displays the Burst Pattern Search dialog box The Burst Search tab contains the settings for burst searches A live preview of the capture buffer with the current settings is displayed in the preview area at the bottom of the dialog box The green bar below the trace indicates the defined evaluation ranges see Evaluation Range on page 173 The preview area is not editable directly The Pattern Search tab contains the settings for pattern searches For details on the available settings see Burst Search on page 163 and Pattern Sea
343. re not considered Mode VSA SENSe DDEMod SEARch BURSt SKIP RISing lt RunIn gt This command defines the length of the rising burst edge which is not considered when evaluating the result The default unit is symbols The value can also be given in sec onds SENSe subsystem Setting parameters Runin numeric value Range 0 to 15000 RST 1 Default unit SYM Example DDEM SEAR BURS SKIP RIS 5US 5 us of the rising burst edge are not considered Mode VSA SENSe DDEMod SEARch BURSt STATe lt SearchState gt This command switches the search for a signal burst on or off Setting parameters lt SearchState gt ON OFF RST OFF Example DDEM SEAR BURS OFF Switches burst search off Mode VSA SENSe DDEMod SEARch BURSt TOLerance lt SearchTolerance gt This command controls burst search tolerance Setting parameters lt SearchTolerance gt numeric value Range 0 to 100000 RST 4 Default unit SYM Example DDEM SEAR BURS TOL 1 Sets the burst tolerance to 1 Mode VSA Manual operation See Search Tolerance on page 164 SENSe DDEMod SEARch MBURst CALC lt SelectResRangeNr gt Sets the result range to be displayed after a single sweep Setting parameters lt SelectResRangeNr gt numeric value Range 1 to 1000000 RST 1 Default unit NONE Mode VSA SENSe subsystem Manual operation See Select Result Rng on page 125 SENSe DDEMod SEARch P
344. ready displayed there are different ways to select a pattern 1 If the Settings Overview dialog box is displayed select Signal Description From the Name selection list select a pattern that is assigned to the currently defined standard 2 Ifthe Burst amp Pattern Settings dialog box is displayed select the Pattern Search tab and select the pattern from the list of assigned patterns 3 Ifthe Advanced Pattern Settings dialog box is displayed select the required pat tern from the Standard Patterns list 4 Otherwise from the VSA menu select Signal Description From the Name selection list select a pattern that is assigned to the currently defined standard If the pattern you require is not available see To add a predefined pattern to a standard on page 196 To enable a pattern search This task can also be performed by remote control see SENSe DDEMod SEARch SYNC STATe on page 309 1 If the Advanced Pattern Settings dialog box is already displayed select the Pat tern Search On option Otherwise in the VSA Settings Overview dialog box select Pattern Search 2 Select On to enable the search globally or Auto to enable a search if a pattern is part of the signal description see To add a pattern to the signal description on page 194 The selected pattern is used for a pattern search 3 Optionally select the Meas only if pattern symbols correct option In this case
345. red here Input Path Signal Source Defines whether the RF Radio Frequency or the Digital IQ input path is used for measurements Digital IQ is only available if option R amp S FSV B17 R amp S Digital UO Interface is installed Note Note that the input path defines the characteristics of the signal which differ sig nificantly between the RF input and digital input Remote command INPut SELect on page 276 Connected Device Signal Source Displays the name of the device connected to the optional R amp S Digital UO Interface R amp S FSV B17 to provide Digital IQ input The device name cannot be changed here The device name is unknown Remote command INPut DIQ CDEVice on page 272 Input Sample Rate Signal Source Defines the sample rate of the digital UO signal source This sample rate must corre spond with the sample rate provided by the connected device e g a generator Remote command INPut DIQ SRATe on page 274 Softkeys and Menu Overview for Vector Signal Analysis R amp S FSV K70 Full Scale Level Signal Source The Full Scale Level defines the level that should correspond to an I Q sample with the magnitude 1 The level can be defined either in dBm or Volt Remote command INPut DIQ RANGe UPPer on page 274 Level Unit Signal Source Defines the unit used for the full scale level Remote command INPut DIQ RANGe UPPer UNIT on page 274 Adjust Reference Level to Full Scal
346. rement Hence this is a rotated constellation e g for a 1 4 DQPSK 8 points are displayed In the R amp S FSV K70 the Constellation UO diagram shows the de rotated constellation i e for a 11 4 DQPSK 4 instead of 8 points are displayed The inter symbol interfer ence has been removed Operating Manual 1176 7578 02 05 351 R amp S FSV K70 Support Note As of firmware version R amp S FSV 1 70 a new result display UO Constellation Rotated is available that displays the rotated constellation as the FSQ K70 does For details on the Constellation UO diagram in the R amp S FSV K70 see chap ter 3 1 1 11 Constellation l Q on page 86 Table 6 1 Constellation I Q and Vector I Q for pi 4 DQPSK modulation Std TETRA_ContinousDownlink SR 18 0 kHz Freq 1 0GHz Res Len 255 1 Q Meas amp Ref 1M Clrw Start 5 13 D Vector I Q Meas amp Ref R amp S FSQ K70 R amp S FSV K70 Problem the MSK FSK signal demodulates on the R amp S FSQ K70 but not on the R amp S FSV K70 or Why do I have to choose different transmit filters in the R amp S FSQ K70 and the R amp S FSV K70 When generating an MSK FSK reference signal the R amp S FSQ K70 automatically replaces the Dirac pulses generated by the frequency mapper with square pulses with the length of one symbol In the R amp S FSV K70 however this replacement is part of the transmit filter routine Thus the R amp S FSQ and the R amp S FSV require different trans
347. rement Result Display e Rho SCPI command CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion DDEMod STATistic RHO on page 237 e I Q Offset SCPI command CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion DDEMod STATistic OOFFset on page 235 Q Imbalance Not for BPSK SCPI command CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion DDEMod STATistic IQIMbalance on page 233 e Gain Imbalance Not for BPSK SCPI command CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion DDEMod STATistic GIMBalance on page 233 e Quadrature Error Not for BPSK SCPI command CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion DDEMod STATistic QERRor on page 236 Amplitude Droop SCPI command CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion DDEMod STATistic ADRoop on page 226 e Power SCPI command CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion DDEMod STATistic MPOWer on page 234 For each result the R amp S FSV calculates and shows various statistical values Current value e Mean value To calculate the mean value the R amp S FSV averages the number of results defined by the Statistics Count e Peak value e StdDev standard deviation e 95 ile 95 percentile only for continuous sweep or sweep count gt 1 Compared to the mean value the 95 ile is a result of all measurement results since the last start of a single or continous sweep or of all measurements since the last change of a measurement parameter e Unit R amp S FSV K70 I
348. rement signal reference signal For example EVM Mag meas ref Modulation errors due to different complex samples in the measurement and the ref erence signal Modulation measurement signal Modulation reference signal For example Magnitude Error Mag meas Mag ref Modulation Accu racy Category for measurements that provide a summary on the modulation accuracy e g the Result Summary Remote command CALCulate lt n gt FEED on page 249 Result Type Defines how the signal source is evaluated and which result is displayed The available result types depend on the selected source type For more information see chapter 3 1 1 Result types on page 76 Table 3 6 Available result types depending on source type Source Type Result Type Capture Buffer Magnitude Absolute Real Imag l Q Frequency Absolute Vector UO Meas amp Ref Signal Magnitude Absolute Magnitude Relative Phase Wrap Phase Unwrap Frequency Absolute Frequency Relative Real Imag UO Eye Diagram Real I Eye Diagram Imag Q Eye Diagram Frequency Constellation UO Configuring VSA measurements Source Type Result Type Vector UO Constellation Frequency Vector Frequency Symbols Binary Octal Decimal Hexadecimal Error Vector EVM Real Imag I Q Vector UO Modulation Errors Magn
349. remote control Range Log remote control Ref Level Offset remote control Ref Level Position remote control Ref Value remote control eres Ref Value Position remote control si Reference Position remote control Right Limit remote control seesssess Search Lim Off remote control E Search Limits remote control Select 1 2 3 4 remote control assainies 242 Select 1 21 SA TEE 136 Settings Single Meas remote control Single Sweep remote control Trace 1234 5 6 remote control Trace Mode remote control ssse Trg Gate Polarity Pos Neg remote control 328 Trigger Holdoff remote control 328 Trigger Polatity critt eei 131 162 Use Zoom Limits remote control 245 y Axis Max Value y Axis Max Value remote control Softkey y Axis Min Value 5 ront rentre 119 Ve ue 1 te y Unit Abs remote control f UrodE i i HN 122 i re 127 206 BB Power Retrigger Holdoff remote control 327 snp q EA 127 206 ec 116 Center remote control AAA 314 C
350. result range i e the source to which the result will be aligned see Reference on page 172 The reference can be the captured data a detected burst or a detected pattern 3 Define the Alignment of the result range to the reference source i e whether the result starts at the beginning of the reference source ends with the reference source or is centered with the reference source see Alignment on page 172 4 Optionally define an offset of the result range to the reference source e g to ignore the first few symbols of the captured data see Offset on page 172 5 Optionally define the number of the symbol which marks the beginning of the ref erence source to change the scaling of the x axis see Symbol Number at lt Refer ence start on page 172 This offset is added to the one defined for the signal description see Offset on page 153 Configuring VSA measurements Example Defining the result range Result Range Alignment and Evaluation Range Result Range Length Result Length 26 042 us Result Range Alignment Reference Capture Burst Pattern Waveform Alignment e Left C Center C Right Offset Symbol Number at Capture Start Visualization Fig 3 31 Example Defining the Result Range In figure 3 31 a result range will be defined for the first 100 symbols of the capture buf fer starting at the second symbol which has the symbol number 1 the capture buffe
351. rst Pattern Search on page 133 Burst amp Pattern Search E E xj Burst Search I Auto according to Signal Description Burst found en Con we Meas only if Burst was found I Auto Configuration Search Tolerance 4 sym 14 769 us Min Gap Length 1sym 3 692 US Related Settings Signal Description Mag CapBuf 1 Clrw 40 dBm I 3 60 dBm4 Start Osym Stop 3500 sym Operating Manual 1176 7578 02 05 163 Configuring VSA measurements tel DEE 164 Meas Only i burst was TOUR cir rte n rin Bh eyes 164 AUTO COMM UTA EE 164 EE 164 L Min Gap Length 164 Auto On Off Enables or disables burst searches If Auto is selected burst search is enabled only if Bursted Signal is selected in the Signal Description tab of the Modulation amp Signal Description dialog box see Continuous Signal Burst Signal on page 152 Remote command SENSe DDEMod SEARch BURSt AUTO on page 300 Meas only if burst was found If enabled measurement results are only displayed and are only averaged if a valid burst has been found For measurements of burst signals that are averaged over sev eral sweeps this option should be enabled so that erroneous measurements do not affect the result of averaging Remote command SENSe DDEMod SEARch BURSt MODE on page 302 Auto Configuration Configures the burst search automatically If enabled the Search Tolerance a
352. rt of signal the user can switch to data aided synchronization The fine synchronization stage always works data aided Sync Prefers More Valid Symbols indicates that one of the synchronization stages has too few symbols to ensure that the synchronization is robust The message is given if e Coarse Synchronization Non Data Aided User Pattern for Sync Off Estimation range shorter than 40 symbols see chapter 2 6 1 2 Estimation on page 58 e Fine Synchronization Estimation range shorter than 10 symbols R amp S FSV K70 Support EH see chapter 2 6 1 2 Estimation on page 58 Solution e If the signal contains a pattern set Coarse Synchronization Pattern see Coarse Synchronization on page 177 Example measurement of a GSM EDGE pattern that has a length of 26 symbols C Mag CapBuf eiciw D Const I Q Meas amp Ref 1M Clrw erter EE UST RTI VIT 20 dBm 40 d m 60 dBm Stop 200 sym Start 2 91 Stop 2 91 did 08 21 13 D Const I Q Meas Ref e iM Clrw 20 dBm 40 dBriy 60 dBm Start 0 sym Fig 6 11 User Pattern for Sync On e Choose a longer Result Range e lf the signal is bursted and the bursts are short Make sure your Result Range comprises the entire burst Make sure that Run In Out is not chosen too large since the Run In Out ranges are excluded from the synchronization e If the signal is bursted and contains a pattern Only switch off the burs
353. ry the trace results see TRACe lt n gt DATA on page 324 Symbol Table Symbol numbers are displayed as a table Each symbol is represented by an entry in the table The symbols can be displayed in binary octal hexadecimal or decimal for mat Measurement Result Display Example Symbol Table Binary BUS et MU S esos e 01 00 01 11 00 01 10 11 01 01 o 11 00 O1 OO 11 OO O1 00 O1 00 00 00 00 10 Fig 3 11 Result display for Symbols in binary mode If a pattern search is active a found pattern is indicated in the symbol table as well SCPI commands CALC FEED XTIM DDEM SYMB to define the required source type see CALCulate lt n gt FEED on page 249 TRAC DATA TRACE1 to query the trace results see TRACe n DATA on page 324 3 1 1 17 Error Vector Magnitude EVM Displays the error vector magnitude as a function of symbols or time EV r E EVM t with tzn Tp and Tp the duration of one sampling period at the sample rate defined by the display points per symbol parameter see Display Points Sym on page 184 The normalization constant C is chosen according to the EVM normalization By default C is the mean power of the reference signal C Eder ery and T duration of symbol periods Note that k 0 5 n T for Offset QPSK with inactive Offset EVM Measurement Result Display Ref Level 10 00 dBm Std EDGE_NormalBurst SR 27
354. s number of analyzed bits e Total of Errors number of detected decisions bit errors Known data compared to symbol Total of Bits number of analyzed bits For each of these results the following values are provided BER Result Description Current Minimum Current va Minimum Value for current result range lue during the current measurement Maximum Maximum Current value during the current measurement Accumulative Total value over several measurements for BER Total of Errors Total of Bits similar to average function SCPI commands CALC F XTIM DDEM MACC SS ED to define the required source type see CALCulate lt n gt FEED on page 249 CALC FORM BER to define the result type see CALCulate lt n gt FORMat on page 249 CALC BER to query the results see CALCulate lt n gt 1 Normal Time Symbol Displays Normal displays show the results in the tim BERate on page 247 e domain or as symbols Table 3 3 Available time symbol displays depending on source type Source Type Result Type Capture Buffer Magnitude Absolute Real Imag I Q Frequency Absolute Vector UO Meas amp Ref Signal Magnitude Absolute Magnitude Relative Measurement Result Display Source Type Result Type Phase Wrap Phase Unwrap Frequency Absolute Frequency Rel
355. s CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy EVM RMEan VALue essent et rennen CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy EVM RPEak VALue sess ren nreennnen rennen CALOCulate n LIMit MACCuracy FDERror CURRent VALue sese rennen enne 222 CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy FDERror MEAN VALue 2 CALOCulate n LIMit MACCuracy FDERror PEAK VALue essere nennen rennen nenne CALOCulate n LIMit MACCuracy FERRor PCURrent VALue essent rennen 223 CALOCulate n LIMit MACCuracy FERRor PMEan VALue sese rennen 223 CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy FERRor PPEak VALue essen nennen rennen 223 CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy FERRor RCURrent VALue i220 CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy FERRor RMEan VALue sese 223 CALOCulate n LIMit MACCuracy FERRor RPEak VALue esses nennen nnne trennen 223 CALOCulate n LIMit MACCuracy MERRor PCURrent VALue essere nennen 223 CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy MERRor PMEan VALue CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy MERRor PPEak VALue CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy MERRor RCURrent VALue CALOCulate n LIMit MACCuracy MERRor RMEan VALue esee enne rennen CALOulate n LIMit MACCuracy MERRor RPEak VALue essent nennen CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy OOFFset CURRent VALue ge m CAL Culate nzLUlMt M
356. s i e samples per symbol should be displayed For example it might make sense for certain mea 3 1 1 1 Measurement Result Display surement results to only display the symbol instants In this case the parameter Display Points Sym should be set to 1 e eent I ae 76 e Normal Time Symbol Displavs AA 102 ee NEIE 103 e Statistical Displays eter teen eet tpe e Euri AER DRE XR RE E EOS 106 e Displayed Measurement Settings ieeeseeeeee eene nennt 108 e Result Ranges and Evaluation HRanges esee 109 e Saving Measurement Results cire cet rc EE Leere te dat 111 Result types The following result types are available depending on the source type Ee rte Ee 76 e Magntgde kelenme ee EEEEEEREEEEEENEEEEEEEEREEEEEAEERENENEEENEEEE EEN kr a RRERn nn uA ERR Rn 77 e Phase UE e D 78 Phase UInIap eoe ERR PEE RA EX ENSROINESEENRER EE E EEA 79 e Frequency ADSOlUEG uccceeedeceeenteneca epu cene e Een e e RE n Urt ad ERU Fer d ER ERR Ze Rata LAS 80 e Frequency Relate cick gicien centre conde re ede cb ddl de er 81 LEE e Bt or 82 e Eye Diagram Real I rette stra tra e Eia need ik a asked ARA ges 83 e Eye Diagram Imag Q resiente avete eaa rete pe Te eg tena 84 e Eye Diagram FFequeriy iooeeeoee iiie eene dL eii text hod SEENEN LL Ea a E AE Ae 85 e Constellation VO E 86 e Constellation Q Rotated a seceiesneetitennnnt KEEN
357. s window is displayed R amp S Recording Tool for Sequences amp 0R Configuration VISA TCPIP localhost Results Analyzed Sequences 33 Modulation PSK Format NORM Order 8 ResultLength 148 Different Sequences 83 Last New Sequence Found s ago Throughput 0 72 kSymbols s Store for K70 Run Stop Reset 3 Start a measurement in the R amp S FSV K70 application 4 Inthe tool window select Run The tool records the demodulated data sequences The following result information is provided by the tool during recording e Analyzed Sequences number of data sequences analyzed since the tool was started e Different Sequences number of unique sequences detected in the measured data e Last New Sequence Found time that has passed since the most recent unique sequence was found e Throughput current data processing speed of the tool Configuring VSA measurements Note that while the tool is running the R amp S FSV is set to remote mode i e the manual interface is not available As soon as the tool is closed the remote mode is automatically deactivated 5 When all known possible sequences have been found or when a significantly large amount of time has passed so as to assume no more sequences will be found stop the tool by selecting Stop 6 e Ifthe results are acceptable select Store for K70 to store a valid xml file with the recorded data sequences on the instrume
358. s CALCulate n LIMit MACCuracy MERRor RCURrent VALue on page 223 Magnitude Err Peak CALCulate n LIMit MACCuracy MERRor PCURrent VALue on page 223 FSK Dev Err CALCulate n LIMit MACCuracy FERRor PCURrent VALue CFERror CURRent VALue Check Current Mean Peak Config ModAcc Limits Considers the defined limit value in the limit check if checking is activated Remote command CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy lt ResultType gt lt LimitType gt STATe on page 219 Softkeys and Menu Overview for Vector Signal Analysis R amp S FSV K70 3 2 12 Softkeys of the Input Output menu R amp S FSV K70 The INPUT OUTPUT key displays the In Output menu which contains the following softkeys SIG Mell SOULCO mE 141 el EE 141 L Connected Device c ceccecseseccessesesseesecceceesecsecascasecsscsacsecessecuucateasevaccarereacers 141 L Input Sample R te ntn titer rhet tutt nent 141 L A 142 el deg Ee 142 L Adjust Reference Level to Full Scale Level 142 LEE 142 ro E 142 Di 4 0o o ENNIUS PUE 142 Bic SNC MEER TR NETTE 142 CUA T rtt secti bx retten pecia d Sade ad Ru 143 L RES DUBIE EE 143 i75 AMEI 143 iue dines kN EE 143 Digtal IO BIQU encre eae tects e etn sees cep ase Yo packs ee rudes eer er pea Hx vpn Eo ee prx ete eet pua 144 Signal Source Opens a dialog box to select the signal source For Digital Baseband UO the source can also be configu
359. s are available for the R amp S FSV e R amp S FSV base unit in addition R amp S FSV K9 Power Sensor Support R amp S FSV K14 Spectrogram Measurement e R amp S FSV K7 Analog Demodulation and R amp S FSV K7S FM Stereo Measurements e R amp S FSV K10 GSM EDGE Measurement R amp S FSV K30 Noise Figure Measurement e R amp S FSV K40 Phase Noise Measurement e R amp S FSV K70 Vector Signal Analysis Operating Manual R amp S FSV K70 Vector Signal Analysis Getting Started First measurements e R amp S FSV K72 3GPP FDD BTS Analysis e R amp S FSV K73 3GPP FDD UE Analysis e R amp S FSV K76 77 3GPP TD SCDMA BTS UE Measurement e R amp S FSV K82 83 CDMA2000 BTS MS Analysis e R amp S FSV K84 85 1xEV DO BTS MS Analysis e R amp S FSV K91 WLAN IEEE 802 11 e R amp S FSV K93 WiMAX IEEE 802 16 OFDM OFDMA Analysis e R amp S FSV K100 K104 EUTRA LTE Downlink Measurement Application R amp S FSV K101 K105 EUTRA LTE Uplink Measurement Application These manuals are available in PDF format on the CD delivered with the instrument Service Manual This manual is available in PDF format on the CD delivered with the instrument It describes how to check compliance with rated specifications instrument function repair troubleshooting and fault elimination It contains all information required for repairing the R amp S FSV by replacing modules The manual includes the following chap ters Chapter 1 Performance Test Chapter 2 Adjustment Cha
360. s not carry information In the physical constellation diagram the constellation points at the symbol decision points obtained after ISI free demodulation are shown as with common PSK meth ods This diagram corresponds to the display on the analyzer The position of the con stellation points is standard specific For example some QPSK standards define the constellation points on the diagonals while other standards define the coordinate axes In table 2 5 the symbols are assigned to phase shifts The QPSK INMARSAT map ping corresponds to simple QPSK with phase differential coding Tables table 2 6 and table 2 7 show two types of differential 8PSK modulation Another type of differential PSK modulation is shown in table 2 6 Differential coding according to VDL is shown in table 2 8 It can be used for modula tion types with 3 bits symbol e g 8PSK Other types of modulation using differential coding method are described in chap ter 2 3 4 Rotating Differential PSK Modulation on page 29 Fig 2 19 Constellation diagram for DQPSK INMARSAT and NATURAL including the symbol map ping Table 2 5 DQPSK INMARSAT Logical symbol mapping Modulation symbol binary indication MSB LSB 00 01 10 11 Phase shift 0 90 90 180 2 3 4 Symbol Mapping Fig 2 20 Constellation diagram for D8PSK including the symbol mapping for APCO25 APCO25 Phase 2 GRAY NATURAL and TETRA Table 2 6
361. s not find bursts that are more narrowly Modulation Orderd Remote command SENSe DDEMod SEARCh BURSt GLENgth MINimum on page 301 Pattern Search The Pattern Search tab contains the settings for pattern searches In addition it con tains a link to the Signal Description settings see Signal Description on page 151 For details on pattern searches see chapter 3 3 5 Working with Pattern Searches on page 194 Burst amp Pattern Search Pattern Search IM Auto according to Signal Description Pattern found o Co ce Meas only if Pattern was found w Auto Configuration IQ Correlation Threshold 90 Related Settings Signal Description Select Pattern for search w EDGE_TSCO EDGE_TSC1 EDGE TSC2 EDGE TSC3 EDGE TSC4 EDGE TSC5 EDGE TSC6 EDGE TSC7 Advanced Settings PIS 166 Meas only if pattern symbols cOrTect isses eiit citet ane 166 Ae ee E 166 L WO Correlation BEE 166 SBEC Patet for Sedrelt d ren eee et ee nh ee t Ren e e te ek t a b eae exeun 167 Advanced Seting S EE 167 d o cM na RENE 167 EE 167 GE 168 Configuring VSA measurements L Pattern Search e EE 168 L Meas only if pattern symbols Core 168 L Add to Standard EE 168 L Remove from Standard 168 a i oe eo Seed Presets ERE 168 TEE 168 GE 169 Auto On Off Enables or disables pattern searches
362. s the measurement window lt m gt Selects the marker Example CALC MARK2 MIN Positions marker 2 to the minimum value of the trace CALC MARK2 MIN RIGH Positions marker 2 to the next higher minimum value to the right of the current value Usage Event CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt SEARch lt MarkReallmag gt This command specifies whether the marker search works on the real or the imag trace Suffix lt n gt 1 4 lt m gt 1 4 irrelevant Setting parameters lt MarkReallmag gt REAL IMAG RST REAL Example CALC4 MARK SEAR IMAG Mode VSA Manual operation See Marker Real Marker Imag on page 137 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt STATe State This command turns markers on and off If the corresponding marker number is currently active as a deltamarker it is turned into a normal marker CALCulate subsystem Suffix lt n gt Selects the measurement window lt m gt depends on mode Selects the marker Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Example CALC MARK3 ON Switches on marker 3 or switches to marker mode Manual operation See Marker 1 2 3 4 on page 134 See Marker Norm Delta on page 134 See Select 1 2 3 4 A on page 136 See Marker on page 136 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt TRACe Trace This command selects the trace a marker is positioned on The corresponding trace must have a trace mode other than Blank If necessary the corresponding marker is swi
363. st search active see Auto On Off on page 164 Pattern Pattern search active see Auto On Off on page 166 Stat Count Statistics count for averaging and other statistical operations see Statistics Count on page 124 cannot be edited directly Capt Count Capture count the current number of captures performed if several captures are necessary to obtain the number of results defined by Statistics Count cannot be edited directly For more information on general measurement settings displayed in the channel bar see the description of basic operations in the base unit Result Ranges and Evaluation Ranges The defined result and evaluation ranges are included in the result displays where useful to visualize the basis of the displayed values and traces Result ranges In some cases the data in the capture buffer contains parts that are not relevant for the evaluation task at hand For example bursted signals have intervals between the bursts that are not of interest when analyzing peaks or overshoots Thus you can exclude them from the result range seechapter 3 3 2 Defining the Result Range on page 186 The result ranges are indicated by green bars along the time axis of the capture buffer result diagrams R amp S FSV K70 Instrument Functions for Vector Signal Analysis Depending on the type of signal and your result range definition the result ranges may be continuous or discrete Bursted signals commonly
364. t This command defines the minimum length of a burst Only those bursts will be recog nized that exceed this length The default unit is symbols The value can also be given in seconds SENSe subsystem Setting parameters lt UsefulLength gt numeric value Range 10 to 15000 RST 98 Default unit SYM Example DDEM SEAR BURS LENG 140 us The minimum burst length is 140 us Mode VSA SENSe DDEMod SEARch BURSt MODE lt MeasOnlyOnBurst gt This command sets the vector analyzer so that a measurement is performed only if a burst is found BURSt The command is available only if the burst search is activated beforehand using the DDEM SEARch BURSt STATe ON command see SENSe DDEMod SEARch BURSt STATe on page 303 Setting parameters lt MeasOnlyOnBurst gt MEAS BURS RST MEAS Example DDEM SEAR BURS MODE BURS Measurement is performed only if burst is found Mode VSA Manual operation See Meas only if burst was found on page 164 SENSe DDEMod SEARch BURSt SKIP FALLing lt RunOut gt This command defines the length of the falling burst edge which is not considered when evaluating the result The default unit is symbols The value can also be given in seconds Setting parameters lt RunOut gt numeric value Range 0 to 15000 RST 1 Default unit SYM Example DDEM SEAR BURS SKIP FALL 5US 5 us of the rising burst edge a
365. t ZOOMIAREA EE BISPlay WINDowsn ZOOM S TUATIG s oxi strap seas Perth Y ent EE AE ATENEO OSESE EEE FORMat DEXP Ot EE TEE FOR Mat DE bot HE Aler xe ism ee ep INiTiate TE Jl Eeer INimatesn a CONTINUOUS tee EEN ll ME BIEN MINN UE A SM TEE 271 INPUGAT Ten ation AUTO EE 271 INPUtLCOUPIING DEE 272 ele Klee RE 272 INPutDIQ RANGe COUPliig zt rr trt de e ENEE ee 273 INPut DIQ RANGe UPPST EE 274 ele DIO Ce BT OR ON T pr 274 INPUEDIQ ISRA NK 274 INPut EATT he REGER INPUEEAT TEE IST KEE ME lee Ci eas cttw caster E EN eTunt aer EE ENT Lee GE MMEMory LOAD IQ STATe MMEMbOry SEEectITEM VIODala reteroc rotten otia t esc Pe ee ette eet an eap 278 MMEMOrLySTORGIQ COMM iiio tre e e s be Ya EO eege Rev dv ED a eS 278 MMEMOE STOR6S IQ FORMIal eicere nace ie ree eege Uri reise e tee eS 278 NEE ele ER RE 278 MMEMory S TORGSN TRAC c 279 OUT GE RI 279 OUTPUtDIOZC DEV e 280 STATUS QUEStionable e e TR TEE 317 STATus QUEStionable MODulation n ResultType CONDition see 320 STATus QUEStionable MODulation n ResultType ENABle essen 320 STATus QUEStionable MODulation lt n gt lt ResultType gt NTRansition 321 STATus QUEStionable MODulation n ResultType PTRansition sse 321 STATus QUEStionable MODulation n ResultType
366. t CFRequency EVM FSK IQRHo MAGNitude PHASe CFRequency limit violations in Carrier Frequency evaluation EVM limit violations in EVM evaluation FSK limit violations in FSK evaluation IQRHo limit violations in I Q Offset and RHO evaluation MAGNitude limit violations in Magnitude Error evaluation PHASe limit violations in Phase Error evaluation Setting parameters lt Enable gt 0 the EVEN bit is not set 1 the EVEN bit is set Usage Query only SCPI confirmed Mode VSA STATus QUEStionable MODulation lt n gt lt ResultType gt PTRansition lt Mode gt This bit acts as a transition filter When a bit of the CONDition part of the associated status register for the result type is changed from 0 to 1 the PTR bit decides whether the EVENt bit is set to 1 Suffix n 1 4 STATus QUEStionable Subsystem lt ResultType gt CFRequency EVM FSK IQRHo MAGNitude PHASe CFRequency limit violations in Carrier Frequency evaluation EVM limit violations in EVM evaluation FSK limit violations in FSK evaluation IQRHo limit violations in I Q Offset and RHO evaluation MAGNitude limit violations in Magnitude Error evaluation PHASe limit violations in Phase Error evaluation Setting parameters Enable 0 the EVENt bit is not set 1 the EVEN bit is set Usage Query only SCPI confirmed Mode VSA STATus QUEStionable SYNC CONDition lt ChannelName gt This command reads out the C
367. t Trace gt This command queries the trace data The data the R amp S FSV returns for each result display is as follows e Capture Buffer For the Capture Buffer result display the command returns the y axis values of the data that is stored in the capture buffer The number of returned values depends on the size of the capture buffer and the oversampling rate For example a capture buffer of 500 in combination with an oversampling rate of 4 would return 2000 level values The unit is dBm Cartesian diagrams For cartesian diagrams the command returns the Y values of the trace only mag nitude phase frequency real imag eye diagrams The number of returned values is the product of the Result Length and the Points per Symbol The unit depends on the unit you have set previously You can query the x value that relates to the first value of the y axis with DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt X SCALe STARt on page 262 When querying the results for eye diagrams the results are merely superimposed in the display This means that the eye diagram result displays are the same as the real imag result display e Polar diagrams For polar diagrams the command returns a pair of values for each trace point The first value is the real part the second value the imaginary part The number of returned value pairs is the product of evaluation range length and points per sym bol for the Vector UO result display and the evaluation range length
368. t are not relevant for your measurement results by disabling the Screen X active option in the Display Config dialog see also Screen X active on page 181 Press the TRACE key Press the ASCII Trace Export softkey Specify the file location to store the data to a Bo N Select the Mode Trace If you only want to save the I Q samples of your capture buffer select RAW 3 2 3 2 1 Softkeys and Menu Overview for Vector Signal Analysis R amp S FSV K70 6 To include all your parameter settings select Header On 7 Select the format of the Decimal Separator 3 1416 or 3 1416 8 Press Save To export the data via remote control TRACe lt n gt Example DATA on page 324 SENSel DDEMod PRESet GSM NB Load GSM Normal Burst Standard INITiatel CONTinuous OFF Switch to single sweep mode INITiatel IMMediate Perform single sweep TRACe4 TRACel Query the result symbols in screen D Softkeys and Menu Overview for Vector Signal Analy sis R amp S FSV K70 This chapter describes the softkeys available for the R amp S FSV K70 option e Softkeys of the VSA menu R amp S FSV KT70 eene 113 e Softkeys of the Frequency Menu R amp S FSV K70 eee 116 e SoftkeySoftkeys of the Amplitude Menu R amp S FSV K70 csser 116 e Softkeys of the Auto Set Menu R amp S FSV K70 eeeeeneee 122 e Softkeys of the Sweep Menu R amp S FSV K70
369. t eel ei oie aaah eos 189 Managing standard settings les 192 Working with Pattern Searclies ono teer en AOGA 194 MANAGING Ren E 196 Working With Known Data Flog eee E 199 Working with Limits for Modulation Accuracy Measurements sess 204 Further Informatio nn cicisscicccestssciececesscctceesttscteccesdsceiceesessncgccenstsatedeneesnetgeestsinceccensapaness 205 Trace Mode OVOrViBW i nei eterna Ged ae dens cda Ded dd e Rd er 205 ASCII File Export Format for VSA Data 206 Measurement Result Display Various different result displays for VSA measurements are available You select the display using the Display Config softkey in the VSA menu see chapter 3 3 1 6 Measurement Result Display Display Configuration on page 180 or by pressing the MEAS key Which result types are available depends on the selected data source Furthermore for some result types you can display either spectral statistical or time domain results You can define which part of the signal is to be evaluated and configure the alignment of the result range see chapter 3 3 1 4 Result Range and Evaluation Range Settings on page 170 You can also define how detailed the trace is displayed Display Points Sym parameter in the Display Configuration dialog vsa To Analyzer Ref Level 10 00 dBm Std GSM NormalBurst SR 270 833 kHz Att 10 dB Freq 15 0 GHz Res Len 148 Input RF A IZQ Vector Meas amp Ref 1M Clrw B Result Summary
370. t help for a certain problem send these files to the support in order to identify and solve the problem faster Available Context Menus For many objects on the screen context sensitive menues are available that provide helpful functions for the specific object e g an edit dialog box for a specific setting Configuring VSA measurements Thus you don t have to navigate through various softkey levels or dialog boxes to quickly change a setting There are two ways to access the context menus Right click the object to display the menu temporarily and select the required func tion directly Double click the object to display a context sensitive softkey menu that remains visible until you click a hardkey with its own menu Example For example the context sensitive menu for the symbol rate display in the information bar at the top of the screen provides a function to change the symbol rate directly Alternatively you could select Home Modulation and then the Symbol Rate input field 3 3 Configuring VSA measurements Using the VSA option you can perform vector signal analysis measurements using pre defined standard setting files or independently of digital standards using user defined measurement settings Such settings can be stored for recurrent use Thus configuring VSA measurements requires one of the following tasks e Selecting an existing standard settings file and if necessary adapting the mea surement sett
371. t search if absolutely necessary If you need to switch it off align your Result Range to the pattern make sure it does not exceed the burst ramps and choose Continuous Signal as the Signal Type in the Signal Descrip tion dialog For more information see e chapter 2 5 Demodulation Overview on page 48 Message Sync Prefers Longer Pattern This message can only occur if the coarse synchronization is data aided i e is based on a known pattern In case the pattern is very short pattern based coarse synchroni zation might be unstable If demodulation is stable e g you get a reasonable EVM there is no need to change anything Otherwise you have two options e Switch to the non pattern based mode by setting the parameter Coarse Synchro nization Data e M H Operating Manual 1176 7578 02 05 345 Flow Chart for Troubleshooting see Coarse Synchronization on page 177 e f possible use a longer pattern For more information see e chapter 2 5 Demodulation Overview on page 48 Message Result Ranges Overlap This message does not indicate an error It is merely displayed to inform you that the defined result ranges in the capture buffer overlap Thus some captured data is evalu ated more than once For example the same peak value may be listed several times if it is included in several
372. ta Data Remote command SENSe DDEMod FSYNc AUTO on page 287 SENSe DDEMod FSYNc MODE on page 288 SENSe DDEMod FSYNc RESult on page 288 If SER S This setting is only available if Known Data is selected for Fine Synchronization You can define a maximum symbol error rate for the known data in reference to the analyzed data Thus if a wrong file was mistakenly loaded or the file proves to be unsuitable it is not used for synchronization Otherwise the results would be strongly distorted If the SER of the known data exceeds this limit the default synchronization using the detected data is performed Remote command SENSe DDEMod FSYNc LEVel on page 288 R amp S FSV K70 Instrument Functions for Vector Signal Analysis Ech Measurement Filter The Measurement Filter tab contains the settings for the measurement filter In addi tion a link to the Modulation Settings tab of the Modulation and Signal Description Settings dialog box is provided see Modulation on page 148 A live preview of the trace with the current settings is displayed in the preview area at the bottom of the dialog box The preview area is not editable directly For details on measurement filters see chapter 2 2 6 Measurement Filters on page 18 The Measurement Filter tab is also displayed when you select the Demod Meas Fil ter softkey in the Meas Config menu see Demod Meas Filter on page 133
373. tched on prior to the assignment Suffix lt n gt Selects the measurement window lt m gt depends on mode Selects the marker Parameters lt Trace gt 1 6 Trace number the marker is positioned on Example CALC MARK3 TRAC 2 Assigns marker 3 to trace 2 Manual operation See Marker to Trace on page 135 See Move Marker to Trace on page 136 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt X Position This command positions a marker on a particular coordinate on the x axis Suffix lt n gt Selects the measurement window lt m gt Selects the marker CALCulate subsystem Parameters lt Position gt Numeric value that defines the marker position on the x axis The unit is either Hz frequency domain or s time domain or dB statistics Range The range depends on the current x axis range Example CALC MARK2 X 1 7MHz Positions marker 2 to frequency 1 7 MHz Manual operation See Marker 1 2 3 4 on page 134 See Select 1 2 3 4 A on page 136 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt X SLIMits STATe State This command turns marker search limits on and off If the power measurement in zero span is active this command limits the evaluation range on the trace Suffix lt n gt Selects the measurement window lt m gt marker Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Example CALC MARK X SLIM ON Switches on search limitation CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt X SLIMits LEFT lt Limit gt
374. te n LIMit MACCuracy FDERror CURRent VALue lt LimitValue gt CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy FDERror MEAN VALue lt LimitValue gt CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy FDERror PEAK VALue lt LimitValue gt This command defines the lower limit for the current peak or mean center frequency deviation error Note that the limits for the current and the peak value are always kept identical This command is available for FSK modulation only Suffix lt n gt 1 4 window Setting parameters lt LimitValue gt numeric value Range 0 0 to 1000000 RST 1 kHz Default unit Hz Example CALC2 FEED XTIM DDEM MACC switch on result summary in screen 2 CALC2 LIM MACC FDER PEAK VAL 1050 define a limit of 1050 Hz Mode VSA R amp S FSV K70 Remote Control Commands R amp S FSV K70 IEN CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy FERRor PCURrent VALue lt LimitValue gt CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy FERRor PMEan VALue lt LimitValue gt CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy FERRor PPEak VALue lt LimitValue gt CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy FERRor RCURrent VALue lt LimitValue gt CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy FERRor RMEan VALue lt LimitValue gt CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy FERRor RPEak VALue lt LimitValue gt This command defines the value for the current peak or mean frequency error peak or RMS limit Note that the limits for the current and the peak value are always kept identical
375. te lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt X ABSolute This command queries the absolute x value of the selected delta marker in the speci fied window The command activates the corresponding delta marker if necessary Suffix lt n gt 1 4 window For applications that do not have more than 1 measure ment window the suffix lt n gt is irrelevant lt m gt 1 4 marker number Usage Query only Mode all 4 3 2 CALCulate subsystem CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt X RELative This command queries the x value of the selected delta marker relative to marker 1 or to the reference position for CALC DELT FUNC FIX STAT ON The command acti vates the corresponding delta marker if necessary Suffix lt n gt Selects the measurement window lt m gt Selects the marker Example CALC DELT3 X REL Outputs the frequency of delta marker 3 relative to marker 1 or relative to the reference position Usage Query only CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt Y This command queries the measured value of a delta marker The corresponding delta marker is activated if necessary The output is always a relative value referred to marker 1 or to the reference position reference fixed active To obtain a correct query result a complete sweep with synchronization to the sweep end must be performed between the activation of the delta marker and the query of the y value This is only possible in single sweep mode Depe
376. te rrr rer rhe e PY E ER nga 217 CALOCulate n DELTamarker m Y 2 217 el e E DEL ENEE ERC HR KEE 215 GAL Gulate n ELINsstartstop S TAT6 cir rrr ere menn rt tette rr erre rere rh E eo 248 CALC latesn TE Ee ele E BT DEE 248 CALCulate lt n gt FEED s GAL Gulate n FORMAaL airettrri trino rer reor re n ER EE REX EX RR E ERES aE STATENE NANSA 249 CALCulate n FSK DEViation COMPensation eee eene entree tnt atta tatnen tat renean etna 251 GALCulate n FSK DEViation REFerence RELative netter tin err ntn tnn 251 CALCulate lt n gt FSK DEViation REFerence VALue 1t tirer eritis 252 CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy lt ResultType gt lt LimitType gt STATe CALCulate n LIMit MACCuracy ResultType LimitType RESUIt sees CALOCulate n LIMit MACCuracy CFERror CURRent VALue esses 221 CAL Culate nzLUlMt MAC Curacv CFERrorMEANVAL ue CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy CFERror PEAK VALue a GALCulate n LIMitMACCuracy DEFault 2 nt notre tente nnn eni rie i enne CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy EVM PCURrent VALue eese nennen nre nnne CALOCulate n LIMit MACCuracy EVM PMEan VALue essent nennen enne trennen CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy EVM PPEak VALue essent rennen nre n nnne CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy EVM RCURrent VALue
377. tenuation can be set in 10 dB steps Configuring VSA measurements The RF attenuation can be set in 5 dB steps with option R amp S FSV B25 1 dB steps The range is specified in the data sheet If the defined reference level cannot be set for the set RF attenuation the reference level is adjusted accordingly Note Values under 10 dB can only be entered via the numeric keypad or via remote control command in order to protect the input mixer against overload The RF attenuation defines the level at the input mixer according to the formula leVel mixer VElinput RF attenuation The maximum mixer level allowed is 10 dBm Mixer levels above this value may lead to incorrect measurement results which are indicated by the OVLD status display Remote command INPut ATTenuation on page 271 El Attenuation ON OFF Enables and defines the electric attenuation The attenuation can be varied in 1 dB steps from 0 to 30 dB Other entries are rounded to the next lower integer value If the defined reference level cannot be set for the given RF attenuation the reference level is adjusted accordingly and the warning Limit reached is output Remote command INPut EATT STATe on page 276 INPut EATT on page 275 UO Capture The I Q Capture tab contains the settings for the measured UO data Note that the maximum usable UO bandwidth for the R amp S FSV40 with the order num ber 1307 9002K39 is 10 MHz Therefore the maximum symbol rate
378. ter 3 3 1 6 Display Configuration on page 180 A more detailed description of the most important stages is given in the following sec tions Burst Search The burst search is performed only if it is switched on Otherwise this stage is skipped It is recommended that you switch the burst search on if the signal is bursted This ensures that all internal estimators are operated in time ranges where the burst power ramping is up In order to eliminate amplitude variations caused by noise or the modulation itself the instantaneous power of the whole capture buffer is computed and then a moving aver Demodulation Overview age filter is applied The length of this filter is automatically determined with the help of the user settings The filtered power of the capture buffer is subsequently compared to an automatically chosen threshold and the rising and falling edges of bursts are identified With the help of the detected edges and some further processing it is possible to decide whether the burst candidates comply with the user settings All bursts must have a length between Min Burst Length Search Tolerance and Max Burst Length Search Tolerance to be accepted See Continuous Signal Burst Signal on page 152 and Search Tolerance on page 164 for a more detailed description of these parameters Min Burst Length Min Gap Length Max Burst Length Fig 2 42 Burst Search parameters You can influence the robus
379. ter frequency EES Characters ire T 210 Clear Write trace mode cccccccceceesseeeeeeeeeeseeeeee 126 205 Coarse Synchronization ceni eterne rr 177 Commands Description ce oe EUR R 208 Compensation Berniodilatiorizscsoc eet iere O 175 Config ModAcc Limits DONKEY p tute E 138 Config Pattern ifj 133 Constellation UO ISesultty DO iiim opo NOE EE 86 Rotated Result type 290 Continuous Signal 152 Continuous SWEEP oce neci a qiero oon ne HR ERE EE Cu 124 Couple Screens On Off Remote control itte tti o tree EO IER DR 238 leid Men 134 D Decimal SOMKEY ees hee eet ees 119 Default Settings e M 119 Delete Standard cuj c 115 Demod Meas Filter SOK CY ee emere re nr ker n eaae 133 Demodulation IEN EE 15 Coarse Synchronization 177 COMPCNSALIOMN EE 175 Estimation Points per Symbol ss 177 Fine Synchronization cete ene 178 Mode remote control A 297 298 NorimallZatlOI cree crecer trece re Grecs EE ele 176 Offset EVM Order remote control Demodulation order Remote Control iuc rae 296 297 Differential PSK DPSK iier ee rr creen 28 DiglConf Ee 143 Digital Baseband Info Remote Control cicer ear reete 280 Digital IQ data to i e AR A BV E E EN E bess eaeectas 141 Digital IQ Info Isemote control ret eres 272 ei M
380. ters Alpha Mode numeric value Range 0 1 to 1 0 RST 0 22 Default unit NONE VSA SENSe subsystem SENSe DDEMod TFILter NAME Name This command selects a transmit filter and automatically switches it on For more information on Transmit filters refer to chapter 2 2 4 Modulation and Demodulation Filters on page 15 Parameters Name Name of the Transmit filter an overview of available Transmit fil ters is provided in table 2 3 Example SENS DDEM TFIL NAME RRC Selects the RRC filter Mode VSA Manual operation See Transmit filter Type on page 150 See Load User Filter on page 150 SENSe DDEMod TFILter STATe lt TXFilterState gt Use this command to switch the Transmit filter off To switch a Transmit filter on use the SENSe DDEMod TFILter NAME command Setting parameters lt TXFilterState gt ON OFF OFF Switches the Transmit filter off ON Switches the Transmit filter specified by SENSe DDEMod TFILter NAME on However this command is not necessary as the SENSe DDEMod TFILter NAME command automati cally switches the filter on RST ON Example SENS DDEM TFIL STAT OFF Mode VSA Manual operation See Transmit filter Type on page 150 SENSe DDEMod TFILter USER lt FilterName gt This command selects a user defined Transmit filter file Setting parameters lt FilterName gt The name of the Transmit filter file
381. that contain a specific prefix enter the Prefix in the edit field To create a new pattern 1 In the VSA gt Settings Overview dialog box select Signal Description 2 Press Pattern Settings 3 Press New Pattern The pattern definition dialog box is displayed 4 Define the following pattern settings Setting Description Name Pattern name that will be displayed in selection list Description Optional description of the pattern which is displayed in the pattern details Modulation order Number of values each symbol can represent order of modulation Symbol format Hexadecimal or decimal format Symbols Pattern definition consisting of one or more symbols Comment Optional comment for the pattern displayed in the pattern details kept for compatibility with FSQ Configuring VSA measurements To define the pattern proceed as follows a If necessary add a new symbol field by pressing Add b Select the symbol field you want to define c Enter a value using the keyboard Depending on the Modulation Order the value can be in the range 0 to n 1 where n is the Modulation Order e g 8 for 8 PSK d Select the next symbol field or insert a new one and continue to define the other symbols To scroll through the fields for long patterns use the scrollbar beneath the input area The number beneath the scrollbar at the right end indi cates the sequential number of the last symbol field the
382. the EVM for OQPSK modulated signals Setting parameters lt EVMOffsetState gt ON OFF RST ON Mode VSA SENSe DDEMod ECALc MODE lt EvmCalc gt This command defines the calculation formula for EVM SENSe subsystem Setting parameters lt EvmCalc gt SIGNal SYMBol MECPower MACPower SIGNal Calculation normalized to the mean power of the reference sig nal at the symbol instants SYMBol Calculation normalized to the maximum power of the reference signal at the symbol instants MECPower Calculation normalized to the mean expected power of the mea surement signal at the symbol instants MACPower Calculation normalized to the maximum expected power of the measurement signal at the symbol instants RST SIGNal Example DDEM ECAL SIGN EVM is normalized to the average power Mode VSA Manual operation See Normalize EVM to on page 176 SENSe DDEMod EPRate AUTO lt LinkMode gt This command activates and deactivates automatic estimation oversampling for the modulation accuracy table Setting parameters lt LinkMode gt ON OFF RST ON Mode VSA Manual operation See Estimation Points Sym on page 177 SENSe DDEMod EPRate VALue lt EstimationOverSampling gt This command determines the number of estimation points per symbol for the modula tion accuracy table Setting parameters EstimationOverSamplingneric value RST 1 Mode VSA Manual operation See Estimation Poin
383. the user Hz AREF Carrier Frequency Error C h h yt The carrier frequency error of the measured signal Hz Carrier Frequency Drift D The drift in the carrier frequency of the measured signal Hz Sym 7 1 3 Statistical Evaluations for the Result Summary The statistical evaluations in the result summary are based on the measurement results that are displayed in the Current column Hence the index m here repre sents the current evaluation M is the total number of evaluations In single sweep mode M coresponds to the statistics count If the measurement values are represented in the logarithmic domain the linear values are averaged The result is then subsequently converted back into logarithmic domain The linear values are indicated by the subscript lin in table 7 1 Mathematical expression Calculation in R amp S FSV Mean 1 M 1 XM XM A Xm gt um XM with Xo 0 Peak ao o i m XM Xiax Xy Xy if lx gt Il M with y Xaya E kl lt Bual idx arg max x with m Xo 0 Formulae Mathematical expression Calculation in R amp S FSV StdDev oy Bum I with Xm E K i m M with 0 0 95 ile X95 M xosu brtz x 0 95j Pr denotes the probability Sorting the values and giving the 95 ile 7 1 4 Trace Averaging The index m represents the current evaluation M is the total number of evaluations In si
384. those provided in the Modulation Accuracy table see chapter 3 1 1 22 Result Summary on page 95 Suffix lt n gt 1 4 screen number lt m gt 1 4 irrelevant CALCulate subsystem Query parameters lt type gt lt none gt Amplitude droop in dB symbol for current sweep AVG Amplitude droop in dB symbol evaluating the linear average value over several sweeps RPE Peak value for amplitude droop over several sweeps SDEV Standard deviation of amplitude droop PCTL 95 percentile value of amplitude droop RST PEAK Usage Query only Mode VSA CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion DDEMod STATistic ALL This command queries all results of the result summary as shown on the screen Suffix lt n gt 1 4 screen number lt m gt irrelevant Usage Query only Mode VSA CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion DDEMod STATistic CFERror lt type gt This command queries the results of the carrier frequency error measurement per formed for digital demodulation The output values are the same as those provided in the Modulation Accuracy table Suffix lt n gt 1 4 screen number lt m gt 1 4 irrelevant Query parameters lt type gt Usage Mode CALCulate subsystem lt none gt Carrier frequency error for current sweep AVG Average carrier frequency error over several sweeps RPE Peak carrier frequency error over several sweeps SDEV Standard deviation of frequency erro
385. tion tab of the Modulation amp Signal Description dialog box contains modulation and Transmit filter settings A live preview of the Constellation l Qtrace using the currently defined settings is displayed at the bottom of the dialog box to visu alize the changes to the settings The preview area is not editable directly Modulation Modulation Settings Type FSK Order 4FSK Mapping NATURAL FSK Ref Deviation 2 0 SR Symbol Rate 3 84 MHz TX Filter Type Alpha BT Trace Constellation Freq Meas amp Ref 1M Clrw Start 12 5 MHz Stop 12 5 MHz Modulation Typ cies voee dei cere reae 148 lte E ee reri ann E EE E A EE 149 FSK Ref RE 150 leie Ee Wi E Le ei e DE 150 SV MBO cic 150 Transmit iker ke EE 150 L ikoad aa ne ae he ee ee eee 150 Te EE 151 Modulation Type Defines the modulation type of the vector signal The following types are available PSK MSK QAM FSK UserQAM Remote command SENSe DDEMod FORMat on page 287 Operating Manual 1176 7578 02 05 148 Configuring VSA measurements Modulation Order Depending on the Modulation Type various orders of modulation are available Type Available orders PSK BPSK QPSK Offset QPSK DQPSK 3Pi 4 QPSK Pi 4 DQPSK 8PSK D8PSK 3Pi 8 8PSK Pi 8 D8PSK Pi 4 QPSK MSK MSK DMSK QAM 16QAM Pi 4 16QAM 32QAM Pi 4 32QAM
386. tness of the burst search directly by entering the correct minimum gap length see Min Gap Length on page 164 minimum burst length and maximum burst length Refer to figure 2 42 for an illustration of the three parameters Demodulation Overview Power Averaged Calculate Average Filter Length Calculate Threshold Find Next Rising amp Falling Edge Calculate Acceptable Burst Lengths Burst Length Okay Add to Burst List Fig 2 43 Burst search algorithm 2 5 2 Q Pattern Search The I Q pattern search is performed only if it is switched on Otherwise this stage is skipped The main benefit of the UO pattern search is that it enables an alignment of the result range to the pattern Furthermore this stage can function as a filter If the burst search and UO pattern search are switched on and the parameter Meas Only If Pattern Symbols Correct is set to true only bursts with the correct pattern are demodulated see Meas only if pattern symbols correct on page 166 During the UO pattern search stage the capture buffer is searched for an UO pattern by trying different time and frequency hypotheses The IQ pattern is generated inter nally based on the specified symbol number of the pattern and the signal description R amp S FSV K70 Brief Description of Vector Signal Analysis 2 5 3 i e modulation scheme and transmit filter The IQ pattern search can also be referred to as the UO waveform
387. to the largest absolute peak value maximum or minimum of the selected trace Remote command CALCulate n MARKer m MAXimum APEak on page 239 3 2 11 Softkeys and Menu Overview for Vector Signal Analysis R amp S FSV K70 Min Sets the active marker delta marker to the minimum of the selected trace Remote command CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MINimum PEAK on page 241 Next Min Sets the active marker delta marker to the next minimum of the selected trace Remote command CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MINimum NEXT on page 241 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MINimum NEXT on page 214 Setting Limits Softkeys of the Lines Menu The following table shows all softkeys available in the Limits menu which is displayed when you press the LINES key Tasks chapter 3 3 8 Working with Limits for Modulation Accuracy Measurements on page 204 ee Bn 138 Contig Mog AC tu EE 138 PALE E 139 L Set to Default EEN 139 L Curent Mean EEN 139 EEG nrnna 140 E E E 140 ModAcc Limits Activates or deactivates evaluation of modulation accuracy limits in the result sum mary If limit check is activated and the measured values exceed the limits those values are indicated in red in the result summary table If limit check is activated and no values exceed the limits the checked values are indicated in green For details on working with limits see chapter 3 3 8 Working with Limits for Modulation
388. tor EVM MAGNItude Real Imag UO RIMag Vector UO COMP Modulation Errors Magnitude Error MAGNitude Phase Error PHASe Frequency Error Absolute FREQuency Frequency Error Relative FREQuency Modulation Accuracy Bit Error Rate BERate CALCulate subsystem Whether the result type shows absolute or relative values is defined using the DISP WIND TRAC Y MODE command see DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe MODE on page 264 Suffix n 1 4 Setting parameters Format MAGNitude PHASe UPHase RIMag FREQuency COMP CONS IEYE QEYE FEYE CONF COVF IQCorr RCONStellation RSUMmary BERate NONE Example CALC FEED XTIM DDEM MEAS Selects the measurement signal CALC FORM PHAS Selects the phase measurement CALC DDEM SPEC STAT ON Selects the spectral evaluation Mode VSA Manual operation See Result Type on page 182 CALCulate lt n gt FSK DEViation COMPensation lt RefDevCompensation gt This command selects the method for calculating the frequency error for FSK modula tion Suffix lt n gt 1 4 Setting parameters lt RefDevCompensatioiON OFF RST ON Mode VSA CALCulate lt n gt FSK DEViation REFerence RELative FSKRefDev This command sets the relative reference value of the frequency deviation for FSK modulation The reference is in relation to the symbol rate Suffix lt n gt 1 4 Setting parameters lt FSKRefDev gt numeric value Range 0
389. trace Signal Model Estimation and Modulation Errors A emvodbte4s as oof Fp zta pa PR PR ET PA d uta AEN Sa 3 Ni A I yt L P ul Imaginary Fig 2 54 Additive noise The figure 2 54 shows a 64QAM signal only the 1st quadrant is shown with additive noise The symbol decision thresholds are also shown The noise signal forms a cloud around the ideal symbol point in the constellation dia gram Exceeding the symbol decision boundaries leads to wrong symbol decisions and increases the bit error rate Similar displays are obtained in case of incorrect transmitter filter settings When an incorrect filter is selected crosstalk occurs between neighbouring symbol decision points instead of the ISI free points The effect increases the more the filtering deviates from actual requirements The two effects described cannot be distinguished in the Constellation UO diagram but in statistical and spectral analyses of the error signal 2 6 2 FSK Modulation Signal Model Frequency shift keying FSK involves the encoding of information in the frequency of a transmitted signal As opposed to other modulation formats such as PSK and QAM the FSK process is a non linear transform of the transmitted data into the transmitted waveform A sequence of symbols sj are modulated using a frequency pulse g t to form the instantaneous frequency of the transmitted complex baseband waveform denoted by fage t and defined
390. trum between symbol rate capture oversampling 2 is dis played The input signal is subjected to a fast Fourier transformation FFT with 4096 points and the magnitude is calculated and displayed If the basic result display is too long the total length is divided into several subblocks of 4096 points each and the results are averaged The subblocks overlap each other by 25 of the block length In addi tion the input signal or the subblocks are evaluated with a FLATTOP window If the valuation range is active the FLATTOP window is also restricted to the area inside the evaluation lines Following the FFT the spectrum magnitude is calculated and displayed figure 3 19 and figure 3 20 show examples of such spectral evalua tions The upper trace shows the basic diagram in each case while the lower trace shows the associated spectral evaluations The top part of figure 3 19 shows EVM versus time the spectrum of the EVM signal is shown at the bottom In figure 3 20 the FFT is applied to the complex signal REAL IMAG top The bottom diagram shows the spectrum Since the input signal is com plex a two sided spectrum is shown In both cases the time range for the FFT is restricted by the activated evaluation lines so that for example burst edges are not included Measurement Result Display Ref Level 10 00 dBm Std EDGE_NormalBurst SR 270 833 kHz Att 30 dB Freq 1 8056 GHz ResLen 1 Clrw sa Re Eent bg E NENNEN
391. ts Sym on page 177 SENSe subsystem SENSe DDEMod FACTory VALue lt Factory gt This command restores the factory settings of standards or patterns for the R amp S FSV K70 option Setting parameters lt Factory gt ALL STANdard PATTern ALL Restores both standards and patterns RST ALL Usage Setting only Mode VSA Manual operation See Restore Standard Files on page 115 See Restore Pattern Files on page 115 SENSe DDEMod FILTer ALPHa lt MeasFilterAlphaBT gt This command determines the filter characteristic ALPHA BT The resolution is 0 01 Setting parameters lt MeasFilterAlphaBT gt numeric value Range 0 1 to 1 0 RST 0 22 Default unit NONE Example DDEM FILT ALPH 0 5 Sets ALPHA BT to 0 5 Mode VSA Manual operation See Alpha BT on page 151 SENSe DDEMod FILTer STATe lt MeasFilterState gt This command defines whether the input signal that is evaluated is filtered by the mea surement filter This command has no effect on the Transmit filter Setting parameters lt MeasFilterState gt ON OFF ON SENSe DDEMod MFILter AUTO is activated OFF The input signal is not filtered SENSe DDEMod MFILter AUTO is deactivated RST ON Example DDEM FILT OFF The input signal is not filtered Mode VSA SENSe subsystem SENSe DDEMod FORMat lt Group gt This command selects the digital demodulation mode Setting parameters lt Group gt Examp
392. ts to sym bols Setting parameters Mapping string string Example SENS DDEM MAPP GSM Sets mapping to GSM Mode VSA Manual operation See Modulation Mapping on page 150 SENSe DDEMod MFILter ALPHa MeasFilterAlphaBT This command sets the alpha value of the measurement filter Setting parameters lt MeasFilterAlphaBT gt numeric value Range 0 1 to 1 0 RST 0 22 Default unit NONE Example SENS DDEM MFIL ALPH 0 8 Sets alpha to 0 8 Mode VSA Manual operation See Alpha BT on page 151 SENSe DDEMod MFILter AUTO lt MeasFilterAuto gt If this command is set to ON the measurement filter is defined automatically depend ing on the Transmit filter SENSe subsystem Setting parameters lt MeasFilterAuto gt ON OFF RST ON Example SENS DDEM MFIL AUTO ON Mode VSA Manual operation See Auto on page 179 SENSe DDEMod MFILter NAME Name This command selects a measurement filter and automatically switches it on For more information on measurement filters refer to chapter 2 2 6 Measurement Fil ters on page 18 Setting parameters Name Name of the measurement filter or User for a user defined filter An overview of available measurement filters is provided in table 2 4 Example SENS DDEM MFIL NAME RRC Selects the RRC measurement filter Mode VSA Manual operation See Type on page 180 See Load User Filte
393. tured UO data is included in the save set when instrument data is stored single sweep mode only Parameters Mode ON OFF Mode VSA MMEMory STORe IQ STATe 1 lt FileName gt This command stores the complex UO data to the specified o rar file in 32 bit float ing point format Parameters lt FileName gt Complete file name including the path Example MMEM STOR IQ STAT 1 C R_S Instr user data ig tar Stores UO data to the specified file Manual operation See IQ Export on page 145 MMEMory STORe IQ COMM Description Defines a description of the export file which is stored with the data and also displayed in the file selection dialog box for UO data import and export Parameters lt Description gt Example MMEM STOR IQ COMM Device test 1b Creates a description for the export file MMEM STOR IQ STAT 1 IC R_S Instr user data ig tar Stores UO data and the comment to the specified file Manual operation See IQ Export on page 145 MMEMory STORe IQ FORMat Format lt DataFormat gt This command defines the format of the I Q data to be stored Parameters Format FLOat32 INT32 Defines the format of the complex or real data RST FLOat32 lt DataFormat gt COMPlex REAL Defines whether complex or real data is exported RST COMPlex 4 10 OUTPut Subsystem Example MMEM STOR IQ FORM INT REAL Stores real UO data as integer values to the specified file see
394. u di ZCapt t Measurement Result Display When evaluating the capture buffer the absolute frequency is derived from the mea sured phase with Tp the duration of one sampling period at the sample rate defined by the capture oversampling parameter see Capture Oversampling on page 159 This measurement is mainly of interest when using the MSK or FSK modulation but can also be used for the PSK QAM modulations However since these modulations can have transitions through zero in the UO plane in this case you might notice uncriti cal spikes This is due to the fact that the phase of zero or a complex value close to zero is of limited significance but still influences the result of the instantaneous fre quency measurement vsa 3 Ref Level 10 00 dBm Std GSM NormalBurst SR 270 833 kHz Att 30 dB Freq 15 0 GHz Res Len 178 Input RF A FreqAbs Meas amp Ref 1M Clrw ead nd i dead bla MI RATT W UE a M A EAT T WW Start 15 0 sym Stop 163 0 sym Fig 3 5 Result display Frequency Absolute in normal mode SCPI commands CALC FEED XTIM DDEM MEAS to define the required source type see CALCulate lt n gt FEED on page 249 CALC FORM FREO to define the result type see CALCulate lt n gt FORMat on page 249 TRAC DATA TRACE1 to query the trace results see TRACe lt n gt DATA on page 324 3 1 1 6 Frequency Relative The instantaneous freque
395. um RICH 215 CALC late lt n gt DELTamarker lt M gt STATE enne ia 215 CAL Culate nz DEL Tamarkercmz TR ACe assess ii sisse nsns dann 216 CAL Culate nz DEL Tamarkercmz NN 216 CAL Culate nz DEL Tamarkercmz XADBGolute eene enne snnt s 216 CAL Culate nz DEL Tamarkercmz SREL ative senes 217 CAL Culate nz DEL TamarkercmzN naani nannini ninia naana t nnda 217 n CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt AOFF This command turns all active delta markers off Suffix lt n gt Selects the measurement window lt m gt Selects the marker Example CALC DELT AOFF Switches off all delta markers CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt LINK lt State gt This command links delta marker 1 to marker 1 If you change the horizontal position of the marker so does the delta marker Suffix lt n gt Selects the measurement window lt m gt 1 irrelevant Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF Example CALC DELT LINK ON Manual operation See Link Mkr1 and Delta1 on page 135 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MAXimum APEak This command positions the active marker or deltamarker on the largest absolute peak value maximum or minimum of the selected trace Suffix lt n gt 1 4 m 1 4 Usage Event CALCulate subsystem Mode all CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MAXimum LEFT This command positions
396. urrent measurement window Remote command CALCulate lt n gt STATistics PRESet on page 253 Adjust Settings Ranges statistic measurements Adjusts the x axis scaling to the occurring statistical values Remote command CALCulate lt n gt STATistics SCALe AUTO on page 253 Ranges Symbol Table Opens a submenu to define the display mode for the symbol table Binary Ranges Symbol Table Sets the symbol display to binary mode This setting also affects the number of sym bols displayed in each row Octal Ranges Symbol Table Sets the symbol display to octal mode This setting also affects the number of symbols displayed in each row Decimal Ranges Symbol Table Sets the symbol display to decimal mode This setting also affects the number of sym bols displayed in each row Softkeys and Menu Overview for Vector Signal Analysis R amp S FSV K70 Hexadecimal Ranges Symbol Table Sets the symbol display to hexadecimal mode This setting also affects the number of symbols displayed in each row Units Opens a submenu to define the units for the x and y axis X Axis Unit Units Opens an edit dialog field to define the x axis unit as seconds or symbols Remote command CALCulate lt n gt X UNIT TIME on page 257 Y Axis Unit Units Opens an edit dialog field to define the y axis unit according to the displayed measure ment type Remote command DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y S
397. urrent settings of the vector signal analysis as a new user defined digital standard If the name of the digital standard is already in use an error message is output and a new name has to be selected It is recommended that you define a comment before storing the standard Setting parameters lt FileName gt string The path and file name to which the settings are stored Example Usage Mode Manual operation SENSe subsystem DDEM STAN COMM GSM AccessBurst with Pattern Defines a comment for the settings DDEM STAN SAVE C R_S Instr usr standards USER_GSM Stores the settings in the user defined digital standard USER_GSM Setting only VSA See Save As Standard on page 114 SENSe DDEMod STANdard SYNC OFFSet STATe lt PatternOffsState gt This command de activates the pattern offset Setting parameters lt PatternOffsState gt Mode Manual operation ON OFF RST OFF VSA See Offset on page 153 SENSe DDEMod STANdard SYNC OFFSet VALue lt PatternOffset gt This command defines a number of symbols which are ignored before the comparison with the pattern starts Setting parameters lt PatternOffset gt Mode Manual operation numeric value Range 0 to 15000 RST 0 Default unit SYM VSA See Offset on page 153 SENSe DDEMod TFILter ALPHa Alpha This command determines the filter characteristic ALPHA BT The resolution is 0 01 Setting parame
398. urst The R amp S FSV K70 option automatically takes into account filter settling times by making the internal buffers sufficiently longer than the selected Result Range Demodulation amp Symbol Decisions This stage operates on the extracted Result Range and aims at making the correct symbol decisions Within this stage a coarse synchronization of the carrier frequency offset the carrier phase the scaling and the timing takes place Furthermore an auto matically selected internal receive filter Rx filter is used in order to remove the inter symbol interference as effectively as possible The outputs of this stage are the coarsely synchronized measurement signal and the symbol decisions bits The symbol decisions are later used for the Pattern Symbol Check stage and for the Ref erence Signal Generation stage Pattern Symbol Check The IQ Pattern Search stage can only detect whether the similarity between the IQ pattern and the Capture Buffer exceeds a certain threshold and in this way find the most likely positions where a pattern can be found Operating Manual 1176 7578 02 05 49 2 5 1 Demodulation Overview Within this stage the R amp S FSV K70 checks whether the pattern symbols bits really coincide with the symbol decisions at the pre detected position E g if one out of 20 symbols does not coincide the IQ Pattern Search stage might detect this IQ pattern but the Pattern Symbol Check stage will decline
399. us QUEStionable MODulation n EVENIt J cesser 318 STATus QUEStionable MODulation lt n gt NTRansition iecerei iii iaaiiai 319 STATueOUEGtonabie MODulatton nz PD Haneiton eese 319 SGTATusOUESGtonabie MODulatton cnz HResultTwvpeztEVENUN nenen eneneeereee 319 STATusOUEGtonable MODulatton nz HResultTwvpez CONDiton reren nne 320 STATus QUEStionable MODulation n ResultType ENABle sse 320 STATus QUEStionable MODulation n ResultType NTRansition suus 321 STATus QUEStionable MODulation n ResultType PTRansition sss 321 STATus QUESHGtable S dere le E RE 322 RN e Ee le 322 STATUS QUEStionable SY NCNM REMSIW ON nsere Ea tte RR ERR bt RR E 322 STATueOUEG onable GC P Ransition esee esee eene nnne nnn 323 STATus QUEStIoiable S YNODEVENtIS 2 gea ctio iE Eoo erbe edente peer ai 323 STATus QUEStionable CONDition This command queries the CONDition part of the STATus QUEStionable register This part contains the sum bit of the next lower register This register part can only be read but not written into or cleared Readout does not delete the contents of the CON Dition part Example STAT QUES COND Mode all STATus QUEStionable EVENt This command queries the contents of the EVENT part of the STATus QUEStionable register The EVEN part indicates whether an event has occurred since the last read ing it is the m
400. us results from the reference signal e g the EVM However when the signal is known to have a poor transmission quality or has a high noise level false symbol decisions are more frequent which may cause spikes in the EVM results To improve these calculations the reference signal can be estimated from a smaller area that includes a known symbol sequence in the input signal In this case the results for the limited reference area are more precise at the cost of less accurate results outside this area Thus the result range should be set to the length of the refer ence area The reference area can be defined either using a pattern or using a known data sequence from a Known Data file If no predefined data sequences are available for the signal the detected data is used by default If Auto mode is selected and a Known Data file has been loaded and activated for use the known data sequences are used Otherwise the detected data is used Note You can define a maximum symbol error rate SER for the known data in refer ence to the analyzed data If the SER of the known data exceeds this limit the default synchronization using the detected data is performed Known Data The reference signal is defined as the data sequence from the loaded Known Data file that most closely matches the measured data Pattern The reference signal is estimated from the defined pattern Detected Default The reference signal is estimated from the detected da
401. usly loaded data file is removed Any referen ces to the known data in the Demodulation dialog box are replaced by the default parameter values see Demodulation on page 174 Note When a standard is loaded the use of a Known Data file is automatically deacti vated Remote command SENSe DDEMod KDATa STATe on page 289 Load Data File If Known Data is activated this function displays a file selection dialog box to select the xml file that contains the known data Once a file has been selected any additional information provided by the file is displayed at the bottom of the dialog box Remote command SENSe DDEMod KDATa NAME on page 289 3 3 1 2 Frontend and UO Capture Settings You configure the measurement of the actual input signal in the Frontend and UO Capture Settings dialog box This dialog box contains the following tabs e Frontend on page 154 e Q Capture on page 157 Frontend The Frontend tab contains the frontend settings of the instrument A live preview of the signal with the current settings is displayed in the preview area at the bottom of the dialog box The preview area is not editable directly R amp S FSV K70 Instrument Functions for Vector Signal Analysis Frontend amp I Q Capture Settings p X Frontend Frequency Frequency 905 4 MHz General Level Settings Adjust Reference Level Reference Level 27 16 dBm Ref Level Offset Preamp Input Couplin
402. ves the smallest of the previously stored currently measured values in the trace memory This mode is useful e g for making an unmodulated carrier in a composite signal visi ble Noise interference signals or modulated signals are suppressed whereas a CW signal is recognized by its constant level Further Information This mode is not available for statistics measurements Remote command DISP TRAC MODE MINH see DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt MODE on page 259 Average The average is formed over several sweeps The Statistics Count determines the num ber of averaging procedures This mode is not available for statistics measurements Remote command DISP TRAC MODE AVER see DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt MODE on page 259 View The current contents of the trace memory are frozen and displayed Note If a trace is frozen the instrument settings apart from level range and reference level see below can be changed without impact on the displayed trace The fact that the displayed trace no longer matches the current instrument setting is indicated by the icon on the tab label If the level range or reference level is changed the R amp S FSV automatically adapts the measured data to the changed display range This allows an amplitude zoom to be made after the measurement in order to show details of the trace Remote command DISP TRAC MODE VIEW see DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe
403. with the R amp S FSV K70 2 1 1 Block Diagram for RF Input The following block diagram provides an overview on how RF input is processed in the R amp S FSV K70 option Digital Down Converter IF Filter 40 MHz sampling rate 100 Hz to 45 MHz no BTO installed 100 Hz to 128 MHz B70 installed Fig 2 1 Block diagram of digital hardware for RF input in vector signal analysis After having passed several RF IF and filter stages the RF input signal is converted to an IF of 96 MHz and applied to an A D converter with a sample frequency of exactly 128 MHz The digitized signal is then routed through two ICs for resampling conversion of sam ple rate by a real factor and for filtering and decimation reduction of sample rate by 2 2 Filters and Bandwidths During Signal Processing an integral factor An equalizer filter before the resampler compensates for the fre quency response of the analyzer s analog filter stages which would otherwise add to the modulation errors During operation the filters and decimation factors of the instrument are set so that a sample frequency is obtained at the output of the decimation stage which exactly cor responds to the following equation Sample rate Symbol rate Capture Oversampling see Capture Oversampling on page 159 The complex output signal of the decimation stage is stored in the UO memory record buffer and forwarded to a signal processor DSP for further processing
404. xports of trace data ASCII Trace Export Export Opens the ASCII Trace Export dialog box and saves the active trace in ASCII format to the specified file and directory Various options are available to configure the stored data e Mode Stores raw UO data or trace data Header Includes a header with scaling information etc e Decimal Separator Defines the separator for decimal values as point or comma Remote command FORMat DEXPort DSEParator on page 268 FORMat DEXPort HEADer on page 268 FORMat DEXPort MODE on page 268 MMEMory STORe lt n gt TRACe on page 279 IQ Export Export Opens a file selection dialog box to select an export file to which the IQ data will be stored This function is only available in single sweep mode For details see the description in the base unit Importing and Exporting UO Data Remote command MMEMory STORe IQ STATe on page 278 MMEMory STORe IQ COMM on page 278 R amp S Support Export Stores useful information for troubleshooting in case of errors This data is stored in the C R_S Instr user Support directory on the instru ment The SupportSave dfl file contains the instrument settings and input data and can be loaded to the instrument again for inspection later Remember to set the sweep mode to Single Sweep beforehand as Continuous Sweep would immediately over write the loaded input data If you contact the Rohde amp Schwarz support to ge
405. y SCPI confirmed VSA STATus QUEStionable MODulation lt n gt lt ResultType gt ENABle lt Mode gt Determines whether the EVENt bit of the associated status register for the result type contributes to the sum bit of the STATus QUEStionable MODulation register Each bit of the EVENt part is ANDed with the associated ENABle bit The results of all logical operations of this part are passed on to the event sum bit via an OR func tion Suffix n lt ResultType gt 1 4 CFRequency EVM FSK IQRHo MAGNitude PHASe CFRequency limit violations in Carrier Frequency evaluation EVM limit violations in EVM evaluation FSK limit violations in FSK evaluation IQRHo limit violations in I Q Offset and RHO evaluation MAGNitude limit violations in Magnitude Error evaluation PHASe limit violations in Phase Error evaluation STATus QUEStionable Subsystem Setting parameters lt Mode gt 0 the associated EVENt bit does not contribute to the sum bit 1 if the associated EVENt bit is 1 the sum bit is set to 1 as well Usage Query only SCPI confirmed Mode VSA STATus QUEStionable MODulation lt n gt lt ResultType gt NTRansition Mode This bit acts as a transition filter When a bit of the CONDition part of the associated status register for the result type is changed from 1 to 0 the NTR bit decides whether the EVENt bit is set to 1 Suffix n 1 4 lt ResultType g
406. y EVM RMEan VALue eeeseseseenenen ene 222 CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy EVM RPEak VALUG ccccceeeeceeee cece eaeaeeeaeeeeeeeeeetetenenes 222 CAL Culate nzLlMirMACCuracvFDERror CURRentVAl ue 222 CALOCulate n LIMit MACCuracy FDERror MEAN VALue sees 222 CALOCulate n LIMit MACCuracy F DERror PEAK VALue ssessseeesenenenene nennen 222 CALOulate n LIMit MACCuracy FERRor PCURrent VALue eese 223 CALOulate n LIMit MACCuracy FERRor PMEan VALue essen 223 CALOCulate n LIMit MACCuracy FERRor PPEak VALue sisse 223 CAL Culate nzLlMirM ACCuracvFERRorbRCUlbrentvVAl ue 223 CALOulate n LIMit MACCuracy FERRor RMEan VALue eese 223 CALOCulate n LIMit MACCuracy FERRor RPEak VALue sseseseseseeeee eene 223 CALOCulate n LIMit MACCuracy MERRor PCURrent VALue esses 223 CALOCulate n LIMit MACCuracy MERRor PMEan VALue eese 223 CALOulate n LIMit MACCuracy MERRor PPEak VALue sess 223 CALOCulate n LIMit MACCuracy MERRor RCURTrent VALue eeeeeessssss eene 223 CALOCulate n LIMit MACCuracy MERRor RMEan VALue essent 223 CALOulate n LIMit MACCuracy MERRor RPEak VALue eene 223 CALOCulate n LIMit MACCuracy OOFFset CURRent VALue essen 224 CAL Culate nzLlMirMACCuracv OOEFFserMEANVAL ue 224 CAL
407. y remain synchronized in the reconstructed UO waveform 7 1 2 Result Summary Evaluations The evaluations for the result summary take place at the sample rate defined by the Display Points Per Symbol parameter see Display Points Sym on page 184 This value can be one of the following e 1 only the symbol instant contributes to the result e 2 two samples per symbol instant contribute to the result e the Capture Oversampling rate see Capture Oversampling on page 159 all samples contribute to the result equally The results are determined by the evaluation range The sampling instants at this rate are referred to as t here i e t n Tp where Ty equals the duration of one sampling period at the sample rate defined by the Display Points Per Symbol parameter 2 3 2 1 Formulae PSK QAM and MSK Modulation For PSK QAM and MSK modulation the estimation model is described in detail in chapter chapter 2 6 1 PSK QAM and MSK Modulation on page 57 The parameters of the PSK QAM and MSK specific result summary table can be related to the distor tion model parameters as follows Table 7 1 Evaluation of results in the PSK QAM and MSK result summary x Xeno Tp EVM RMS Peak max EVM n T Modulation RMS error lyv T y 20 log K DIRER TY Peak min MER n T l DEV y with MER n T 20 1og x Einer ry Magnitude R
408. z can also be deleted To change the path press the arrow icons at the right end of the Path field and select the required folder from the file system Press the Select button Confirm the message to avoid unintentionally deleting a standard The standard file is removed from the folder To restore standard files gt In the VSA gt Digital Standards menu select Restore Standard Files The standards predefined by Rohde amp Schwarz available at the time of delivery are restored to the Standards folder To restore default standard settings If you change predefined standard settings for a specific measurement you may want to return to the default settings later Configuring VSA measurements 3 3 5 This task can also be performed by remote control see SENSe DDEMod STANdard PREset VALue on page 311 gt Inthe VSA gt Digital Standards menu select Standard Defaults The instrument is reset to the default settings of the standard last used Working with Pattern Searches Patterns provide a fixed sequence of symbols at a defined point in time in the symbol stream They are used in many digital mobile radio systems to evaluate the channel impulse response and to facilitate a demodulation in the receiver The pattern search is performed on the UO capture buffer The R amp S FSV K70 takes the symbol numbers of the pattern modulates the pattern according to the Transmit fil ter and th
409. zation MM 177 Fine Syme TE E 178 IR 178 Compensate for If enabled compensation for various effects is taken into consideration during demodu lation Note Note that compensation for all the listed distortions can result in lower EVM val ues For PSK QAM MSK modulation e UO Offset e IO Imbalance e Amplitude Droop For FSK modulation e FSK Deviation Error e Carrier Frequency Drift Operating Manual 1176 7578 02 05 175 R amp S FSV K70 Instrument Functions for Vector Signal Analysis EEE EE EEE EE EE EE eee ee Example The following figures compare the results for a compensated UO offset of 2 5 and a non compensated offset UO Offset compensated for UO Offset NOT compensated for A IZQ Const Meas amp Ref 1M Clrw A IZQ Const Meas amp Ref 1M Clrw Stop 2 52 Stop 2 52 e 1 Clrw Start O sym Stop 300 sym Start 0 sym Stop 300 sym Remote command SENSe DDEMod NORMalize ADRoop on page 292 SENSe DDEMod NORMalize IQIMbalance on page 293 SENSe DDEMod NORMalize IQOFfset on page 293 SENSe DDEMod NORMalize CFDRift on page 293 SENSe DDEMod NORMalize FDERror on page 293 Normalize EVM to Normalizes the EVM to the specified power value This setting is not available for MSK or FSK modulation e Max Ref Power Maximum power of the reference signal at the symbol instants e Mean Ref Power mean power of the reference signal at the symbol instants e M

R&S®FSV-K70 Vector Signal Analysis User

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

R&amp;S&reg;FSV-K70 Vector Signal Analysis User

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

R&S®FSV-K70 Vector Signal Analysis User